PDO sp1279

Petroleum Development Oman L.L.C.
UNRESTRICTED Document ID: SP-1279

December 2009 Filing key: 1279
Specification for Civil & Building Construction
SP 1279
This document is the property of Petroleum Development Oman, LLC. Neither the whole nor any
part of this document may be disclosed to others or reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form by any means (electronic, mechanical, reprographic recording or otherwise)
without prior written consent of the owner.
Specification for Civil & Building Construction - Index Version 2.0
Authorised For Issue December 2009
Signed: ............................................................
Ali Nasser Al Jahadhamy, UIB/4 (UEB)
CFDH, Civil Engineering
The following is a brief summary of the recent revisions to this document. Details of all revisions prior to
these are held on file by the issuing department.
Version No. Date Author Scope / Remarks
Revision 1 Aug ‘93 W. Von Schmidt, TTH/4 Original issued as ERD-17-01
Version 1.0 Feb ‘04 Ali Nasser Al Jahadhamy, Converted to Specification as per PDO
TTO/2 (UEC) policy and minor changes to the text
Version 2.0 Dec ‘09 Ali Nasser Al Jahadhamy, Revision to reference standards and minor
UIB/4 (UEB) changes to the text
Dec 2009 Page 2 SP 1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – General Requirements
Contents
1.0 Introduction ................................................................................................ 9

1.1 Purpose........................................................................................................................ 9
1.2 User Guidelines ........................................................................................................... 9
1.3 Specification Index ..................................................................................................... 9
1.4 Changes to the Specification ..................................................................................... 10
1.5 Quality Control ......................................................................................................... 10
1.6 Supervision ............................................................................................................... 11
General Requirements ........................................................................................... 12

A 1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................. 13
A 1.1 User Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 13
A 1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes ...................................................... 13
A 1.3 Compliance with Standards....................................................................................... 13
A 2.0 Scope ........................................................................................................ 14
A 2.1 Units of Measurement ............................................................................................... 14
A 2.2 Materials and Workmanship ..................................................................................... 14
A 2.3 Approval of Work ..................................................................................................... 14
A 2.4 Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) Requirements ............................................. 15
A 3.0 Appendix .................................................................................................. 15
Demolitions & Alterations ..................................................................................... 19

B1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................. 20
B1.1 User Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 20
B1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes ...................................................... 20
B1.3 Compliance with Standards....................................................................................... 20
B2.0 Scope ........................................................................................................ 21
B2.1 Materials Arising From Demolition .......................................................................... 21
B2.2 Schedule and Method ................................................................................................ 21
B2.3 Existing Services ....................................................................................................... 22
B2.4 Explosives ................................................................................................................. 22
B2.5 Asbestos & Man-Made Mineral Fibres (MMMF)..................................................... 23
Excavation & Earthworks ..................................................................................... 24

C1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................. 25
C1.1 User Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 25
C1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes ...................................................... 25
C1.3 Compliance with Standards....................................................................................... 26
C1.4 Product / Asset Warranty .......................................................................................... 26
C2.0 Scope ........................................................................................................ 27
C2.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 27
C2.2 Plant, Schedule & Method ........................................................................................ 27
C2.3 Materials ................................................................................................................... 27
C2.4 Earthworks ................................................................................................................ 28
C2.5 Excavation................................................................................................................. 29
C2.6 Trench Works............................................................................................................ 32
C2.7 Backfilling................................................................................................................. 33
C2.8 Laying & Compaction ............................................................................................... 34
C2.9 Sampling & Testing .................................................................................................. 35
C2.10 Termite Protection..................................................................................................... 36
C2.11 Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ........................................................................................ 37
C3.0 Appendix .................................................................................................. 37
C3.1 Appendix: Inspection Test Plan ................................................................................ 38
Concrete Works ..................................................................................................... 42

D1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................. 43
SP 1279 Page 3 Dec 2009

D1.1 User Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 43

D1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes ...................................................... 43
D1.3 Compliance with Standards....................................................................................... 45
D1.4 Product / Asset Warranty .......................................................................................... 45
D2.0 Scope ........................................................................................................ 46
D2.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 46
D2.2 Plant, Schedule & Method ........................................................................................ 46
D2.3 Materials ................................................................................................................... 46
D2.4 Formwork .................................................................................................................. 55
D2.5 Concrete .................................................................................................................... 57
D2.6 Grout Mortar ............................................................................................................. 64
D2.7 Tolerances ................................................................................................................. 66
D2.8 Quality Control ......................................................................................................... 66
D2.9 Sampling and Testing................................................................................................ 66
D2.10 Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ........................................................................................ 68
D2.11 Supervision ............................................................................................................... 69
D2.12 Pouring Records ........................................................................................................ 69
D3.0 Appendices ............................................................................................... 70
D3.1 Appendix D1: Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ................................................................. 71
Block work ............................................................................................................. 82

E1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................. 83
E1.1 User Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 83
E1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes ...................................................... 83
E1.3 Compliance with Standards....................................................................................... 84
E2.0 Scope ........................................................................................................ 85
E2.1 Materials ................................................................................................................... 85
E2.2 Mixing Mortar........................................................................................................... 85
E2.3 Blockwork Construction ........................................................................................... 86
E2.4 Finished Wall Protection........................................................................................... 88
E2.5 Termite Protection..................................................................................................... 88
E3.0 Appendices ............................................................................................... 88
Roofing Works ....................................................................................................... 90

F1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 91
F1.1 User Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 91
F1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes ...................................................... 91
F1.3 Compliance with Standards....................................................................................... 92
F2. Scope ........................................................................................................ 93
F2.1 Materials ................................................................................................................... 93
F2.2 Profiled Roof Sheeting & Cladding .......................................................................... 93
F2.3 Flat Roofs .................................................................................................................. 96
F2.4 Inspection Test Plans (ITP) ....................................................................................... 98
F3. Appendix .................................................................................................. 99
Structural Steel Works ........................................................................................ 101

G1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 102
G1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 102
G1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 102
G1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 104
G2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 105
G2.1 Materials ................................................................................................................. 105
G2.2 Testing..................................................................................................................... 105
G2.3 Fabrication .............................................................................................................. 106
G2.4 Welding ................................................................................................................... 107
G2.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling................................................................................. 107
G2.6 Erection ................................................................................................................... 108
G2.7 Workmanship .......................................................................................................... 108
G2.8 Composite Flooring................................................................................................. 109
Dec 2009 Page 4 SP 1279

G2.9 Runway Beams ....................................................................................................... 109

G2.10 Fire proofing of steel structures .............................................................................. 109
G3.0 Appendix ................................................................................................ 109
Metal Works......................................................................................................... 111

H1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 112
H1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 112
H1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 112
H1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 114
H2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 115
H2.1 Fabrication .............................................................................................................. 115
H2.2 Welding ................................................................................................................... 115
H2.3 Delivery, Storage & Handling................................................................................. 116
H2.4 Testing..................................................................................................................... 116
H2.5 Construction ............................................................................................................ 116
H3.0 Appendix ................................................................................................ 118
Carpentry and Joinery Works............................................................................. 120

J1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 121
J1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 121
J1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 121
J1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 123
J2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 124
J2.1 Materials ................................................................................................................. 124
J2.2 Storage .................................................................................................................... 125
J2.3 Preservative Treatment............................................................................................ 125
J2.4 Termite Protection................................................................................................... 125
J2.5 Fixing ...................................................................................................................... 125
J2.6 Doors ....................................................................................................................... 126
J2.7 Windows ................................................................................................................. 126
J2.8 Defective Work ....................................................................................................... 126
J3.0 Appendix ................................................................................................ 127
Ironmongery Works ............................................................................................ 129

K1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 130
K1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 130
K1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 130
K1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 131
K2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 132
K2.1 Materials ................................................................................................................. 132
K2.2 Operating Manuals & Spare Parts ........................................................................... 136
K2.3 Storage .................................................................................................................... 136
K2.4 Work Incidental to Hardware Systems.................................................................... 136
K2.5 Manufacturers Warranties ....................................................................................... 137
K3.0 Appendix ................................................................................................ 137
ITP No: SP-1279-K-001: Ironmongery................................................................................ 137
Glazing Works ..................................................................................................... 139

L1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 140
L1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 140
L1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 140
L1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 141
L2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 142
L2.1 Materials ................................................................................................................. 142
L2.2 External Glazing ..................................................................................................... 143
L2.3 Internal Glazing....................................................................................................... 143
L2.4 Cleaning Of Glass ................................................................................................... 144
SP 1279 Page 5 Dec 2009

L3.0 Appendix ................................................................................................ 144

Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishing Works .............................................................. 146
M1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 147
M1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 147
M1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 147
M1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 149
M2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 150
M2.1 Materials ................................................................................................................. 150
M2.2 Testing..................................................................................................................... 150
M2.3 Floor Finishing ........................................................................................................ 150
M2.4 Wall Finishing......................................................................................................... 153
M2.5 Ceiling Finishing..................................................................................................... 155
M2.6 Swimming-Pool Tiles ............................................................................................. 156
M3.0 Appendix ................................................................................................ 158
Building Painting & Decorating Works .............................................................. 160

N1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 161
N1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 161
N1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 161
N1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 162
N2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 163
N2.1 Materials ................................................................................................................. 163
N2.2 Storage .................................................................................................................... 163
N2.3 Environmental Conditions ...................................................................................... 163
N2.4 Equipment & Tools ................................................................................................. 164
N2.5 Protection ................................................................................................................ 164
N2.6 Painting of Timber .................................................................................................. 165
N2.7 Staining & Lacquering Of Timber .......................................................................... 166
N2.8 Painting of Glazing Putty ........................................................................................ 166
N2.9 Painting of Structural Steelwork ............................................................................. 167
N2.10 Painting of Exposed Copper Pipe work & Galvanized Steel .................................. 168
N2.11 Coatings For Marine Structures .............................................................................. 169
N2.12 Painting of Internal Gypsum-Plastered Walls ......................................................... 169
N2.13 Painting of Concrete & Rendered Surfaces ............................................................. 169
N2.14 Application of Flexible Wall Coverings ................................................................. 170
N2.15 Repainting & Maintenance Of Existing Works ...................................................... 170
N2.16 Inspection & Records .............................................................................................. 172
N3.0 Appendix ................................................................................................ 172
Fencing & Gates................................................................................................... 174

P1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 175
P1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 175
P1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 175
P1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 176
P1.4 Product / Asset Warranty ........................................................................................ 176
P2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 177
P2.1 General .................................................................................................................... 177
P2.2 Materials ................................................................................................................. 177
P2.3 Fencing System ....................................................................................................... 177
P2.4 Fencing Components............................................................................................... 178
P2.5 Fence Types ............................................................................................................ 179
P2.6 Gates ....................................................................................................................... 180
P2.7 Functional & Design Requirements ........................................................................ 180
P2.8 Installation............................................................................................................... 182
P2.9 Workmanship .......................................................................................................... 182
P2.10 Protection ................................................................................................................ 182
P2.11 Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ...................................................................................... 183
P3.0 Appendix ................................................................................................ 183
Dec 2009 Page 6 SP 1279

Landscaping Works ............................................................................................. 185

Q1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 186
Q1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 186
Q1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 186
Q1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 187
Q1.4 Product / Asset Warranty ........................................................................................ 187
Q2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 188
Q2.1 General .................................................................................................................... 188
Q2.2 Schedule & Method ................................................................................................ 188
Q2.3 Materials & Plants for Landscaping ........................................................................ 188
Q2.4 Testing..................................................................................................................... 188
Q2.5 Excavation............................................................................................................... 188
Q2.6 Hard Landscaping ................................................................................................... 189
Q2.7 Soft Landscaping..................................................................................................... 191
Q2.8 Irrigation System..................................................................................................... 194
Q2.9 Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 194
Q2.10 Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ...................................................................................... 195
Q2.11 Supervision ............................................................................................................. 195
Q3.0 Appendices ............................................................................................. 196
Q3.1 Appendix Q1: Tables - Schedules of Plants ............................................................ 197
Q3.2 Appendix Q2: Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ............................................................... 217
Roads & Paving Works........................................................................................ 219

R1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 220
R1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 220
R1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 220
R1.3 Compliance with Standards..................................................................................... 222
R1.4 Quality Control ....................................................................................................... 222
R1.5 Supervision ............................................................................................................. 223
R1.6 Product / Asset Warranty ........................................................................................ 223
R2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 224
R2.1 General .................................................................................................................... 224
R2.2 Plant, Schedule & Method ...................................................................................... 224
R2.3 Materials ................................................................................................................. 224
R2.4 Setting Out & Site Clearances................................................................................. 240
R2.5 Excavation, Cutting & Embankments ..................................................................... 241
R2.6 Sub-Base ................................................................................................................. 245
R2.7 Road Base ............................................................................................................... 246
R2.8 Asphalt Prime Coat ................................................................................................. 246
R2.9 Asphaltic Concrete Base Course, Wearing Course & Single Course...................... 248
R2.10 Asphalt Surface Treatment ...................................................................................... 257
R2.11 Concrete Paving ...................................................................................................... 263
R2.12 In-situ Concrete Footpaths ...................................................................................... 272
R2.13 Pre-Cast Concrete Paving Slabs & Kerb Stones ..................................................... 273
R2.14 Pre-Cast Concrete Block Paving ............................................................................. 275
R2.15 Irish Crossings, Pipe and Box Culverts & Other Drainage Structures .................... 277
R2.16 Graded Roads .......................................................................................................... 277
R2.17 Highway Signing..................................................................................................... 281
R2.18 Road Marking ......................................................................................................... 281
R2.19 Road Accessories & Furniture ................................................................................ 283
R2.20 Sampling and Testing.............................................................................................. 283
R2.21 Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ...................................................................................... 285
R3.0 Appendices ............................................................................................. 285
R3.1 Appendix: Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ..................................................................... 286
Rig Locations, Airstrips, tank Pads & Bunds ..................................................... 296

S1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................ 297
SP 1279 Page 7 Dec 2009

S1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 297

S1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................... 297
S1.3 Quality Control ....................................................................................................... 299
S1.4 Supervision ............................................................................................................. 299
S1.5 Product / Asset Warranty ........................................................................................ 300
S2.0 Scope ...................................................................................................... 301
S2.1 General .................................................................................................................... 301
S2.2 Plant, Schedule & Method ...................................................................................... 301
S2.3 Materials ................................................................................................................. 301
S2.4 General Requirements (Setting Out, Site Clearances etc.,) ..................................... 302
S2.5 Earthworks & Formation (Excavation, Cutting & Embankments) ......................... 302
S2.6 Rig Locations .......................................................................................................... 302
S2.7 Airstrips................................................................................................................... 303
S2.8 Tank Pads, Bund Walls & Bund Floors .................................................................. 305
S2.9 Sampling and Testing.............................................................................................. 307
S2.10 Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ...................................................................................... 307
S3.0 Appendices ............................................................................................. 307
S3.1 Appendix A: Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ................................................................. 308
S3.2 Appendix B: SP User - Comment Form.................................................................. 310
Dec 2009 Page 8 SP 1279

1.0 Introduction
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to specify the minimum requirements for “Civil and Building
Construction Works” and is intended for use by PDO and its nominated Consultants and
Contractors for the development and operation of Company facilities.
This specification is intended to:
- Set the Company standards for facilities along the facilities life cycle.
- Disseminate and record facilities related information, experience and procedures.
1.2 User Guidelines

This Specification supersedes the Version 1.0 - Civil & Building Construction Specifications –
Parts A to S. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are the main changes to
this document.
- The reference standards have been revised to reflect the latest international standards.
- All parts of the Specification is combined into one document (To be known as
Construction Specification) to be in line with procedures of Common Management
Framework
1.3 Specification Index

This Specification comprises of the following Parts:
Chapter - A : General Requirements
Chapter - B : Demolition and Alterations
Chapter - C : Excavation and Earthworks
Chapter - D : Concrete Works
Chapter - E : Block Works
Chapter - F : Roofing
Chapter - G : Structural Steel Works
Chapter - H : Metal Works
Chapter - J : Carpentry and Joinery
Chapter - K : Ironmongery
Chapter - L : Glazing
Chapter - M : Floor, Wall and Ceiling Finishes
Chapter - N : Painting and Decorating
SP 1279 Page 9 Dec 2009

Chapter - P : Fencing and Gates
Chapter - S : Landscaping Works
Chapter - R : Roads and Paving Works
Chapter - S : Graded Roads, Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bund
Works
1.4 Changes to the Specification

Custodian of this document is the Corporate Functional Discipline Head (CFDH) of Civil
Engineering. Any User of this document, who encounters an inaccuracy or ambiguity, is
requested to notify the CFDH using the ‘SP User-Comment Form’ provided at the end of this
document.
Reviews and modifications/ changes to the specification will normally be made by the CFDH
every four years or earlier when justified.
1.5 Quality Control

1.5.1 Quality Plan
The Contractor shall submit a quality plan, which shall be based on ISO 9000 quality system
requirements, BS EN 206 and or in accordance with the contract requirements of a particular
contract. The Quality plan shall cover quality assurance and control and shall be divided into
detailed design and production/execution plan. The quality plan shall be subject to audit by
Company.
1.5.2 Reporting system

A reporting system shall be part of the quality plan. The reporting system shall record all
results obtained during testing, transporting, production, supplying, placing / pouring,
finishing, etc. Weather conditions shall also be recorded. Any deviation shall be reported,
including measurements to be taken.
1.5.3 Records
The Contractor should maintain the accurate and comprehensive records of the entire Works
for the contract period or a minimum of one year. The records shall include the following:
The Contractor shall maintain accurate and comprehensive records of every activity for the
contract period or a minimum of one year. The records shall include the following:
- Materials and its manufacturer or supplier’s details
- Location of borrow pits with test results
- Composition of mix
- Quantity and grade of material
- Complete Field and Laboratory test results
- Temperature records
- Date, time, including commencing and finishing time of pouring works
- Method of Curing
Dec 2009 Page 10 SP 1279

- Name and signature of Contractors supervision
See also Inspection Test Plan in Appendices
1.6 Supervision
1.6.1 Contractor’s Supervisor
A qualified supervisor fluently conversant in the English language and experienced in the
construction field shall be employed by the Contractor on the Worksite and shall directly
supervise all construction and Concrete works.
1.6.2 Company Inspection

The Contractors shall give at least one working day's notice or mutual agreed time, to the
Company Site Representative, so that he may inspect the completed or ongoing activities.
After inspection the CSR will inform the contractor about necessary improvement or allow the
contractor to continue with the next sequence of the work. Such permissions will not relief the
contractor in any way from his responsibilities as to carry out the works in accordance with the
contract and specifications.
SP 1279 Page 11 Dec 2009

Chapter – A
General Requirements
Dec 2009 Page 12 SP 1279

A 1.0 Introduction
A 1.1 User Guidelines
Part A ‘General Requirements’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are the
main changes to this document.
- Latest revisions of international codes are referenced as appropriate.
- Specific Code for HSE requirements are introduced in this document.
For all HSE requirements, the User shall refer the CP-122 Code of Practice for Health, ‘Safety
and Environmental Protection’ and other documents referenced therein.
A 1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

This Parts of Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Contract Specifications and
the Company’s General Conditions for Construction Works. Contract Specifications contain:
- Scope of Work including Technical Design Parameters.
- Particular Specifications.
- Technical Schedules.
- List of Drawings.
- Samples of Inspection Certificates.
A 1.3 Compliance with Standards

Any deviations from this part of Specification shall be subject to Company approval and shall
be advised in writing to the Custodian.
In all cases the Company determine the adequacy of the design carried out and works executed
by the Contractor in accordance with this Specifications.
SP 1279 Page 13 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction - General Requirements Version 2.0
A 2.0 Scope
A 2.1 Units of Measurement
The units of measurement used in these Specifications are:
Areas in metres square : m2
Strength in Newtons per square millimetre : N/mm2
Dimensions in metres or millimetre : m or mm
Energy in Watts : W
Force in kilo Newtons : kN
Liquid volume in litres : l
Temperature in degrees Celsius : oC
Thickness in millimetres or microns : mm or µm
Vibration frequency in hertz : Hz
Mass in tonnes, kilogrammes and grammes : MT, kg or g
A 2.2 Materials and Workmanship

Materials and Workmanship shall be of quality as specified herein and equal to samples
approved by the Company. Delivery of materials to the Worksite shall be sufficiently in
advance to enable further samples to be taken and tested if required by the Company.
Materials shall not be used until approved by the Company, and materials not approved shall
be immediately removed from the Worksite at the Contractor's expense.
A 2.3 Approval of Work

The Company shall have the right to order rejection and replacement of any material or a part
of that material, or the cessation of work, if there is reason to doubt the suitability or quality of
material or Work.
Any portion of the Work will be classified as defective by the Company if any of, but not
limited to, the following faults are applicable to that portion of the Works.
- The Contractor did not obtain the Company's prior approval of materials.
- The finished dimensions do not conform with those shown in the Contract
Documents subject to the tolerances specified.
- There is evidence of damage to the material caused by or operation of plant or

storage or transporting of materials.
- Any of the criteria specified in these specifications or the contract documents are not
attained.
Defective Work shall be repaired or removed and replaced by the Contractor under the
direction of and to the approval of the Company.
Dec 2009 Page 14 SP 1279

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that finished Work is adequately
protected from wear and abuse after completion and for the subsequent period up to the agreed
date of handover at Contract completion.
In the event of damage occurring despite these precautions, the Contractor shall repair,
renovate or otherwise make good Work to the approval of the Company.
The cost of all Work incurred due to the above provisions shall be at the Contractor's expense.
A 2.4 Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) Requirements

All HSE requirements shall comply with CP-122 Code of Practice for ‘Health, Safety &
Environmental Protection’. The Contractor shall throughout the progress of the Work have the
strongest regard for the Health, Safety and Environment of all persons and/or places upon and
around the Worksite and shall keep the Worksite and the Work in an orderly state appropriate
to the avoidance of danger to all persons and properties and shall provide its personnel, at the
Contractor's cost, with protective clothing and equipment as may be required for the Work
under the Company's Safety Regulations.
A 3.0 Appendix
Glossary of Definitions & Abbreviations
SP 1279 Page 15 Dec 2009

Appendix : Glossary of Definitions & Abbreviations

For the purposes of this document, the following definitions, terminology and abbreviations
shall apply.
A.1 General Definitions & Terminology

Shall : The word 'shall' indicates a requirement
Should : The word 'should' indicates a recommendation
the Company : Petroleum Development Oman L.L.C.,
the Contractor : The party with which the Company has entered into a
Contract
Manufacturer : A Party responsible for the manufacture of equipment and

services to perform the duties specified by the Consultant or
the Company.
Vendor / A party responsible for the supply of equipment, materials or

Supplier: : product related services in accordance with the purchase
order issued by PDO or it’s nominated purchasing office.
Local Agent : An authorised agent of a Manufacturer in the Sultanate Of Oman who can
supply the product and services.
National : A product defined as a National Product, in origin manufactured in the

Product Sultanate Of Oman as per the General Conditions of Contract.
GCC Product : A product defined as a GCC Product, in origin manufactured

in GCC country as per the General Conditions of Contract.
Works : The permanent Works to be executed and maintained in

accordance with the contract together with all temporary
works of every kind required in or about the execution or
maintenance of the Works.
Workshop : A defined place, approved by the Company, where the

Contractor executes fabrication works.
Worksite : The land and other places on, under, in or through which the
Works are to be executed.
the User : The Company, and/or Consultant, designate using this

document.
Dec 2009 Page 16 SP 1279

A.2 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations have been used in these Specifications.
AASHTO : American Association of State Highway and Transport

Officials
ACI : American Concrete Institute
ACV : Aggregate Crushing Value.
ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASNT : American Society Non-Destructive Testing
ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS : American Welding Society
BGC : British Gas Council
BPV : Boiler Pressure Vessel
BS : British Standard
BSCP : British Standard Code of Practice
BS EN : British Standard European Norm
BSWG : British Standard Wire Gauge
CBR : California Bearing Ratio
Cl : Chloride
CP : Code of Practice
CFDH : Corporate Functional Discipline Head
DEP : Design and Engineering Practice (SIEP / Shell GSI

Standard)
DFT : Dry Film Thickness
DIN : Deutsche Institute for Normung (West German Institute for

Standardisation)
Drg : Drawing
EPC : Engineering, Procurement & Construction
GCC : Gulf Corporation Council
GRC : Glass Reinforced Concrete
GRG : Glass Reinforced Gypsum
GRP : Glass Reinforced Plastic
SP 1279 Page 17 Dec 2009

GRE : Glass Reinforced Epoxy
HSE : Health, Safety and Environment
ISO : International Organization for Standardization
LLC : Limited Liability Company
Ltd : Limited
MAX : Maximum
MIN : Minimum
MMMF : Man Made Mineral Fibres
N/A : Not Applicable
No. : Number
OPC : Ordinary Portland Cement
PDO : Petroleum Development Oman LLC
ppm : Parts per Million
PSA : Public Services Agency (U.K. Body)
PVA : Polyvinyl Acetate
PVC : Polyvinyl Chloride
SIEP : Shell International Exploration and Production B.V.
Shell GSI : Shell Global Solutions International B.V.
SIC : Shell International Chemicals B.V.
SIS : Sveriges Standard Iseringskommision (Swedish Standards

Institute)
SP : Specification
STD : Standard
TB : Tender Board
UK : United Kingdom
WI : Welding Inspection
Dec 2009 Page 18 SP 1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Demolitions & Alterations
Chapter – B
Demolitions & Alterations
SP 1279 Page 19 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Demolitions & Alterations Version 2.0
B1.0 Introduction
B1.1 User Guidelines
Part B ‘Demolition & Alterations’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are
the main changes to this document.
- Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes are revised
This document should be read in conjunction with Chapter A. For all HSE requirements, the
User shall refer the CP-122 Code of Practice for ‘Health, Safety and Environmental Protection’
and other documents referenced therein.
B1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

This specification shall be read in conjunction with the latest revisions of the following
Standards, Specifications and Codes.
B1.2.1 PDO Standards

CP-122 : Code of Practice for Health, Safety and Environmental
Protection
SP-1284 : Specification for Signs and Signboards – Standard

Signs Catalogue
B1.2.2 Omani Standards

Royal Oman Police : Bye Laws and Ordinances
B1.2.3 International Standards

BS 5607 : Code of Practice for the Safe Use of Explosives in the
Construction Industry
BS 6187 : Codes of Practice for Demolition
B1.3 Compliance with Standards

Any deviations from this part of Specification shall be subject to Company approval and shall be
advised in writing to the Custodian.
by the Contractor in accordance with this Specification.
Dec 2009 Page 20 SP 1279

B2.0 Scope
B2.1 Materials Arising From Demolition
Materials arising from demolition Works are deemed to become the property of the Company,
unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents.
Materials, as specified in the Contract documents, to be hand over to the Company shall be
carefully removed and delivered, by the Contractor, to a location specified by the Company.
B2.1.1 Disposal
All discarded materials arising from demolition shall be disposed of as directed by the Company
and or as specified in the contract document of a particular contract. Materials taken off the
Worksite shall be disposed of in accordance with the Company requirements and byelaws of the
Local Municipality if it is outside of the Company area. The Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions and care to avoid interference with and obstruction or damage, in particular through
pollution, to the environment. The Contractor shall repair at his own expense any damage to the
environment resulting from demolition or disposal of materials.
Burning of combustible material on the Worksite shall only be carried out with Company's
approval. Timber infested with termites, lice, dry rot and the like shall not be removed from the
Worksite and shall be burnt in a location and time approved by the Company.
The Contractor should stock pile different materials resulting from demolition works in separate
piles prior to removal from the Worksite.
B2.2 Schedule and Method

The Contractor shall carry out all demolition Work in accordance with the recommendations of
BS 6187, 'Code of Practice for Demolition'.
The Contractor shall submit, in writing, to the Company full details of all plant and methods of
working prior to commencement of the Work. Work shall not commence until the Company has
given such approval.
The foregoing provisions shall not prevent the Company from requiring the Contractor to vary
his plant or methods at any time during the execution of the Works should the Company consider
it essential to ensure compliance with the Contract documents and this Specification.
The Contractor shall not vary his plant or method of working, without obtaining the Company's
written approval of such variation.
The Contractor shall provide all requisite shoring, needling, strutting or other temporary
supports, which are necessary for the protection and safety of the existing structure.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the safety of the existing structure and the
sufficiency of all the temporary Works.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection for the existing Works against the effects
of inclement weather and make good any damage caused to existing works, which are not to be
demolished.
The Contractor shall protect all existing fittings and surfaces, which are not to be demolished,
and any damage so caused shall be made good to the Company's approval at the Contractor's
expense.
SP 1279 Page 21 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Demolitions & Alterations Version 2.0
The Contractor shall remove all foundations and any other underground services etc., associated
with the demolished structure and makeup levels to existing ground level by filling up all voids
left by the removal of the above. The material shall match the surrounding ground.
B2.2.1 Signs & Barriers

Where work is required on, or adjacent to an area accessible by personnel the Contractor shall
erect barriers and signs, approved by the Company, warning of the danger that demolition work
is being carried out in accordance with SP-1284 Specification for Signs and Signboards –
‘Standard Signs Catalogue’.
B2.2.2 Debris & Dust

The Contractor shall ensure that debris and dust resulting from the Work is contained and kept to
a minimum.
The Contractor shall ensure that all debris is removed to a temporary stockpile, on the Worksite,
if it is not immediately to be carted away from the Worksite.
The Contractor shall ensure that air blown dust from demolition Work is kept to a minimum by
such means as dampening with water.
B2.2.3 Permits
Before commencing demolition Work the Contractor shall obtain a work permit from the
Company. The Contractor shall ensure that this permit states that all services have been
disconnected. Instructions on the permit shall be adhered to.
The Contractor shall keep the permit securely on the Worksite for inspection by the Company.
The Contractor shall obtain disposal consignment sheet and make sure it is signed by the scrap
yard authorities once demolished materials disposed.
B2.3 Existing Services

The Contractor shall check that existing services will be unaffected by demolition or alterations
and fully protect such services.
The Contractor shall maintain and protect existing live services in the vicinity of the demolition
Works. Any services affected by demolition work shall be identified, and counter measure shall
be taken. Contractor shall minimise the shut down time of any services. Any damage, caused by
the Contractor shall be made good to the Company's approval at Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall ensure that any watercourses or drainage are not obstructed whilst
executing the Works.
B2.4 Explosives
The Contractor may use explosives for demolition only, at such times and places and in such a
manner as approved by the Company in writing.
Transport, storage and use of explosives shall comply fully with the Byelaws and Ordinances of
the Royal Oman Police and all relevant Government Departments.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits for the transport, storage
and use of explosives.
The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the Works and adjoining structures, roads and
property and for injury to persons or animals, consequent to the misuse of explosives.
Dec 2009 Page 22 SP 1279

B2.5 Asbestos & Man-Made Mineral Fibres (MMMF)

Where demolition or alteration Work entails the handling of asbestos the Contractor shall
comply with the recommendations of BS 6187. These are more detailed and require careful
application.
Where demolition or alteration Work entails the handling of man-made mineral fibres (MMMF)
the Contractor shall seek guidance from the Company.
SP 1279 Page 23 Dec 2009

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Excavation & Earthworks
Chapter – C
Excavation & Earthworks
Dec 2009 Page 24 SP 1279

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Excavation & Earthworks Version 2.0
C1.0 Introduction
C1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes the Version 1.0 Civil & Building Construction Specifications –
Part-C ‘Excavation & Earthworks’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are
This document should be read in conjunction with Chapter - A Civil and Building Construction –
‘General Requirements’. For all HSE requirements, the User shall refer the CP-122 Code of
Practice for ‘Health, Safety and Environmental Protection’ and other documents referenced
therein.
C1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

This Specification shall be read in conjunction with the latest revisions of the following
C1.2.1 PDO Standards

SP-1274 : Specification for Civil & Building Construction –Materials
Testing
Chapter - A : Specification for Civil & Building Construction – General

Requirements
Chapter - R : Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Roads &

Paving Works
Chapter - S : Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Graded

Roads, Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bund Works
SP-1099 : Specification for Electrical Installation Practice
ERD 71 01 : Telephone Cabling Installation Standards

Protection
C1.2.2 Omani Standards

Royal Oman Police : Bye Laws and Ordinances
C1.2.3 International Standards

BS 1377 : Methods of Tests for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes
BS 5607 : Code of Practice for Safe use of Explosives in the

Construction Industry
BS 5930 : Code of Practice for Site Investigations
BS 6031 : Code of Practice for Earthworks
BS 8004 : Code of Practice for Foundations
SP 1279 Page 25 Dec 2009

C1.2.4 SIEP / Shell GSI Standards

DEP 34.11.00.11-Gen. : Site Preparation and Earthworks including tank
foundations and tank farms
DEP 34.11.00.12-Gen. : Geo Technical and Foundation Engineering
C1.3 Compliance with Standards

Any deviations from this part of Specifications shall be subject to Company approval and shall
C1.4 Product / Asset Warranty

The entire Earthworks, executed under a particular contract, shall be guaranteed to meet the
specified technical specifications and its referred standards & specifications.
Any defects, identified within the maintenance period (as per the contract or a minimum of one
year), have to be repaired by the Contractor at his own cost.
The Contractor shall prepare a repair procedure for the defects. All repair procedures shall not
be performed without the prior approval of the Company.
Dec 2009 Page 26 SP 1279

C2.0 Scope
C2.1 General
This Specification shall define the physical characteristics of the suitable materials and describes
the Works on the basis of end product or a method of Specifications. This Specification shall
also define the type of testing requirements, frequency of each test and number of samples for
the materials and the Earthworks.
C2.2 Plant, Schedule & Method

The Contractor shall submit, in writing, to the Company, full details of plant, methods of
working, schedule proposals and mix design of materials prior to commencement of the Work.
Work shall not commence until the Company has approved the submissions.
his plant or methods at any time during the execution of the Works, should the Company
consider it necessary to ensure compliance with the Contract documents.
C2.3 Materials
The Contractor shall supply and lay materials from a source, approved by the Company, known
to produce materials for earthworks.
The Company shall be afforded access during working hours to all parts of plants or source of
materials necessary for the execution of the Works. The Contractor shall be responsible for
locating all borrow pits and quarries.
Particulars relating to materials supplied in accordance with this Specification shall be clearly
marked on the delivery note, invoice and supplier's certificate, provided with each consignment,
and shall include:
- Source of material
- Size of material
- Type of material
- Quantity of material
- Statement of compliance with the relevant Specifications or Standards
C2.3.1 Granular Fill

Granular fill material shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel.
Materials that break up when alternately wet and dried shall not be used. Fill material shall have
a percentage of wear, based on the Los Angeles Rattler Test of no more than 50%. Fine material
passing 2 mm sieve shall consist of natural or crushed sand. The composite fill material shall be
free from vegetable matter, lump/balls of clay. PDO Type-B material shall be used for all
granular filling work and shall comply with the requirements as given in SP-1279-R
Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Roads & Paving Works’ section 2.3.1.
C2.3.2 Hardcore Fill

Hardcore fill material shall consist of clean, hard, durable particles or fragments of stones or
gravel of size not more than 50 mm. Materials that break up when alternately wet and dried
shall not be used. Fill material shall have a percentage of wear, based on the Los Angeles
Rattler Test of no more than 50%. Fine material passing 2 mm sieve shall consist of natural or
crushed sand. The composite fill material shall be free from vegetable matter, lump/balls of
clay, bushes and weeds. PDO Type-E material shall be used for all hardcore filling work and
SP 1279 Page 27 Dec 2009

shall comply with the requirements as given in SP-1279-R Specification for Civil & Building
Construction – ‘Roads & Paving Works’ section 2.3.1.
C2.3.3 Rock
Rock is defined as geological strata or deposits so designated by the Company as any hard
natural or artificial material requiring the systematic use of blasting or pneumatic tools for its
removal.
C2.3.4 Rock Fill / Gravel Fill

Rock fill is defined as a hard durable inert material of size and shape suitable for placement and
compaction. This shall be used for the Road base, Storage tank shell foundations and other areas
as specified in the contract documents for a particular contract. For materials type, grading
requirements and other details refer the following Specifications
SP-1279-R Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Roads & Paving Works’ section
2.3.2 and
SP-1279-S Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Graded Roads, Rig Locations,
Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bund Works’ section 2.3.3.
C2.3.5 Boulder Rock

Boulder Rock is defined as a substance, which is in the opinion of the Company, of such size,
position or composition that it can only be removed by means of special equipment but which
does not need breaking up prior to removal.
C2.3.6 Topsoil or Agricultural Soil

Topsoil or Agricultural soil is defined as any material that contains humus, or any organic
matter. This shall be free draining, non-toxic and capable of sustaining healthy plant growth.
This soil should be free from calcium carbonate, refuse, weed or any other deleterious material.
C2.3.7 Water
Water used for mixing fill material shall be clean and free from organic matter, waste material
and other harmful substances. Water analysis are not required if the source is approved and
supplied by the Company or Municipality. In case, the Contractor proposes to use the water
from other sources, one complete analysis is required to prove the water specifications as stated
in SP1279-D section 2.3.4.
C2.4 Earthworks
C2.4.1 Datum & Setting Out
Before Work commences the Contractor shall carry out a survey of the levels of the Worksite
and obtain the approval from the Company, of these levels. Levels shall be taken on a grid
approved by the Company and the Contractor shall produce a drawing of these levels for record
purposes for the Company's retention.
Levels shown on the Contract Documents shall relate to a local datum established by the
Company.
The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up and maintaining a site datum level with respect
to the Company PHD datum or MSL and accurately ascertained from this datum.
All survey points to be maintained by the Contractor for the entire period of the particular
contract or for as long as they are needed by the Company to check the Works. If any point
needs to be reinstated this shall be executed at the Contractor's expense.
Dec 2009 Page 28 SP 1279

C2.4.2 Clearing
The Contractor shall cut off shrubs, trees and bush roots as required for the Construction and
shall cut off all other vegetations and its roots, (except trees and bushes required for replanting or
to remain in place), in the construction area and remove from the Worksite within one week of
clearing.
C2.4.3 Replanting
As directed by the Company, the Contractor shall excavate any trees or bushes and replant on the
Worksite, or elsewhere. Excavation shall be performed in such a manner as to not damage the
root formation. Trees or bushes shall be replanted in sweet soil and kept adequately watered and
protected for the Contract period. Holes resulting from such excavation shall be backfilled with
approved material.
C2.4.4 Protection of Plants

As directed by the Company the Contractor shall protect any plants, trees and bushes on the
Worksite.
C2.4.5 Topsoil Removal

The Contractor shall strip all topsoil from the area to be excavated and/or filled or constructed
upon and shall stockpile it on the Worksite in such a manner to prevent deterioration so that it
can be reused for planting.
C2.5 Excavation
Methods of excavation shall be at the discretion of the Contractor and shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 6031.
Notwithstanding any information contained within any report of a site investigation, the
Contractor shall judge for himself the nature of the ground and shall be fully responsible for
ascertaining all necessary information concerning water table, periods of rainfall, flooding of the
Worksite and all matters affecting excavations.
The Contractor shall inform the Company of any irregularity in the nature of ground and subsoil.
Trial pit or borehole results shall not be taken as a guarantee that similar conditions apply on
other parts of the Worksite.
Soft ground encountered in fill material previously placed by the Contractor shall be removed by
the Contractor and back-filled with approved material as directed by the Company.
Excavation shall be executed to the required length, width, depth, inclination and curvature as
shown in the Contract documents or as may be necessary for construction of the work in
whatever material that may be found, including rock.
The excavation shall proceed in such proportions, at one time, as the Company may direct.
The Contractor shall be responsible and include for excavation of trenches and pits, grading and
compacting bottoms, planking and strutting, filling and ramming, stockpiling, wheeling, loading
and carting away surplus material from the Worksite.
Excavated material shall be deposited at least one metre away from the edge of excavation, so
that it will cause no damage and as little inconvenience as possible.
Battered sides to excavations may be allowed providing that by so doing the integrity of any
adjacent structure or service is not jeopardised. Degree of batter shall be sufficient at all times to
ensure stable ground conditions.
Slopes of cuttings and embankments shall be trimmed by hand or by approved mechanical

means to uniform batters as shown in the Contract documents or as directed by the Company.
SP 1279 Page 29 Dec 2009

C2.5.1 Excavation Work Permits

Before commencing excavation work the Contractor shall obtain an excavation work permit
from the Company. Having ascertained the existence or possible existence of live services, the
Contractor shall be held liable for any damage caused during the course of the excavation works.
Instructions on the excavation permit shall be strictly adhered to. The Contractor shall keep the
Excavation Permit securely on the worksite for inspection by the Company.
C2.5.2 Existing Services

The Contractor shall excavate, by hand, any trial excavations deemed necessary for locating the
position of underground services.
When in the course of excavation the Contractor encounters existing services or any other
obstructions he shall immediately seek instruction from the Company as to the course of action.
Services or other obstruction shall be physically marked on the ground.
Positions of existing services or other obstructions, where shown in the contract documents, are
not guaranteed as to accuracy and/or completeness, and the Contractor shall verify their
positions by hand excavation before commencing Work. Position of services shall be shown on
the 'As Built' drawings.
The Contractor shall submit a written report or sketch of data obtained from a trial excavation
and shall not, if trial pit permits, be back-filled until the report, has been approved by the
Company.
The Contractor shall maintain and protect services affected by the excavations.
C2.5.3 Explosives
Where excavation in rock by mechanical or hand methods prove to be impractical or
uneconomic, the Contractor may use explosives for blasting in rock at such times and places and
in such a manner as approved by the Company in writing.
Transport, storage and use of explosives shall comply fully with the Bye - Laws and Ordinances
of the Royal Oman Police and all relevant Government Departments.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits for the transport, storage
and use of explosives.
The Contractor shall not store explosives on the Worksite.
The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the Works and adjoining structures, roads,
property, and for injury to persons and animals, consequent to the misuse of explosives.
C2.5.4 Hard Ground & Rock Cutting

The Contractor shall allow for excavating in all types of ground including rock. The Contractor
shall be responsible for ascertaining the nature of the ground and to include for necessary
additional costs for excavating in rock, as no claims resulting from his failure to do so will be
admitted. Hard ground includes, but is not limited to, concrete, brickwork and block work.
If rock contains severe cracks, either:
- Formation level shall be lowered to a depth where the rock layer is not cracked, the
additional excavation being filled with approved, compacted fill material.
- Cracked rock shall be improved with the aid of grout injection in accordance with BS
8004.
Dec 2009 Page 30 SP 1279

C2.5.5 Unsound Ground

Unsound ground or cavities encountered within any part of excavations shall be excavated to a
solid formation and filled to formation level with approved, compacted material in layers to the
Company's approval. Beneath all strip footings and foundations for structures excess excavated
material shall be replaced with approved compacted fill material.
C2.5.6 Shoring Excavations

The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all excavation, structures, services and
roads.
Contractor shall carryout the excavation to a maximum depth of 1.2 m without any shoring
protection. However, the Contractor shall decide as per the site condition where necessary, and
to get the Company's approval. Shore the sides of excavations for structures, trenches and pits to
prevent them from slipping or falling shall be carried out in accordance with BS 6031. Should
any slips, falls or settlement occurs, to be removed by the Contractor, at his own expense, and
backfilled with approved material as directed by the Company.
Excavations carried out near any existing structure or work liable to be affected by subsidence,
the Contractor shall at his own expense prevent damage by subsidence due to his excavation
works, in a manner approved by the Company.
The Contractor shall submit the following details to the Company for review and inspection:
- Calculations
- Working drawings for the proposed scheme of shoring and retaining the sides of the
excavations
The Contractor shall not proceed with the appropriate section of the Work until receipt of the
Company's approval.
All shoring shall be properly maintained until permanent Work is sufficiently advanced to permit
shoring to be removed. Removal of shoring shall be carried out only with the approval of the
Company.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the Works and for any consequential
damage caused by or arising out of removal of shoring.
Shoring shall be designed to permit gradual withdrawal during backfilling.
C2.5.7 Exclusion of Water from Excavations & Dewatering System

The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping all excavations free from water from whatever
cause arising from whatever means.
The Contractor shall make good, at his own expense, any damage that may result form his
failure to keep excavations free from water.
The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain, a system approved by the Company of
temporary drains, intercepting ditches, cut-off drains, sub-drains, sumps, wells, pumps, well
points, dewatering equipment and all other things necessary to keep surface water out of
excavations. The Contractor shall drain out the water from excavations or from any other source
to keep the water table below the formation level in accordance with BS 8004.
The Contractor shall convey water from the Works in such a manner as not to cause any
nuisance or injury.
The Contractor shall take particular care to avoid undermining any part of the new or existing
Works due to the method adopted for removal and disposal of water.
SP 1279 Page 31 Dec 2009

Existing pipes, culverts or watercourses shall not be used for disposal of water without the
Company's approval. Should such approval be given, the Contractor shall clean out and remove
all silt, etc, and make good any damage whatsoever resulting from such use.
All temporary ditches, sumps, wells shall be filled by the Contractor with material approved by
the Company on completion of the Works.
C2.5.8 Spoil
To avoid surcharge on ground adjacent to excavations, the Contractor shall keep spoil heaps well
back (at least one metre away) from the edges of excavations.
Different classes of excavated materials required for backfilling or landscaping, shall be

stockpiled separately in areas approved by the Company.
All excess spoil shall be carted away by the Contractor, to a location approved by the Company.
C2.5.9 Oversized Excavations

Oversized excavations shall, upon the Company's approval and the Contractor's expense, be
filled to the correct level or size with approved compacted material or mass concrete.
C2.5.10 Formation Levels

The Contractor shall inform the Company when excavations are ready to receive other Works,
which shall not proceed until such excavations are inspected and approved by the Company.
Faces and bottoms of excavations shall be properly trimmed and cleared of all loose material and
foreign matter.
The final 150 mm of all excavations should be carried out by hand and the bottom shall be
levelled and rammed immediately prior to placing of other Works. Traffic shall not be permitted
over prepared formation other than for placing of other Works.
Any soft areas considered unsatisfactory by the Company shall be removed and the extra depth
filled with compacted material approved by the Company.
C2.6 Trench Works

Trenches for the underground services like cabling works, ducts and on plot piping works shall
be free from rocks, stones, tree roots or other harmful matter.
Excavations for trenches should be made with vertical sides in compact and cohesive soil.
Where trench excavation is in loose sand, a suitable batter shall be formed with the Company's
approval. Excavated material shall be kept at least one metre away from the edge of the trench
excavation.
Fill material shall not be placed on services until the service has been inspected and approved by
the Company.
Except where the nature of the ground makes the following requirements unnecessary, a service
trench that is adjacent to and deeper than an existing structure shall be backfilled with mass
concrete up to the underside of the existing structure. PVC service ducts shall be provided in the
mass concrete backfill.
When constructing structures and laying adjacent services, the one requiring the deepest
excavation should be excavated first. If this is not possible, the Contractor shall obtain the
Company's approval for the proposed method of maintaining support to the higher construction.
Dec 2009 Page 32 SP 1279

C2.7 Backfilling
C2.7.1 Granular Filling
Materials used for backfilling around foundations, trenches, and the like other than hardcore,
shall be selected approved backfill material, complying with Section 2.3.1 of this document.
Peaty or organic soil shall not be used as backfilling.
Fill material used within 5 m of concrete structures shall have a soluble sulphate content not
exceeding 2.5 g per litre tested in accordance with BS 1377 and chloride content shall not exceed
0.05% by weight of soil. If the Sulphate and Chloride contamination exceeds the limits,
appropriate protection system is required for Concrete. Where and only with the approval of the
Company, backfill is not to be compacted, due allowance shall be made by the Contractor for
consolidation and shrinkage in both height and width.
Backfill to foundations, walls, trenches, pipelines and site grading shall be compacted in layers
not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness. Each layer shall extend over the whole area before
the next layer is spread. Backfill around and over the underground services shall be hand
compacted up to 300 mm above the top of the underground services.
Backfill shall be brought up and compacted evenly on each side of block-work and at no time
shall differential in fill levels exceed 300 mm except for retaining walls.
Density after compaction shall be not less than 95% of maximum dry density. During
compaction fill material shall have uniform moisture content within 2% of the optimum moisture
content.
Pipe trenches should be partly backfilled to provide adequate pipe anchorage leaving all joints
exposed prior to testing. Backfilling around joints shall not be carried out until the pipe has been
tested and approved by the Company.
Mechanical rammers shall not be used within 300 mm of the top of any pipe. Backfilling
material shall not be dropped from a height exceeding two metres.
Excavations around structures shall not be backfilled before they have been inspected and
approved by the Company.
C2.7.2 Hardcore Filling

Hardcore can be used for general filling, make up levels and or specified in the contract
documents for a particular Work. Materials used for hardcore fill shall comply with the section-
2.3.2 of this document. Hardcore fill shall not be used for backfill around and over the
underground services.
C2.7.3 Rock / Gravel Filling

Rock or Gravel can be used as a fill material for the Tanks foundation, base course of the roads
and or specified in the contract documents for a particular Work. Materials used for Rock or
Gravel fill shall comply with the grading requirements as stated in section 2.3.4. Hardcore fill
shall not be used for backfill around and over the underground services.
C2.7.4 Trench Filling

Electric cables, telephone cables and earthing tapes, where shown on the drawings, shall be laid
on clean sand bedding with nominal depth of 100 mm below cables and at least 100 mm above
the top of cables. Bedding shall be of clean sand or equivalent, free of stones and other material
liable to damage the cables. Contractor shall get approval from CSR prior to backfilling upper
layer of the trench.
The upper layer of the trench shall be backfilled, using materials of a suitable type. Backfill
containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large/sharp angular material, or corrosive
SP 1279 Page 33 Dec 2009

material shall not be placed in an excavation where materials may damage ducts, cables or other
substructures, or prevent adequate compaction of fill or contribute to corrosion of ducts, cables
or other substructures.
Surfaces of refilled trenches and other excavations shall be left proud by not more than 25 mm.
The Contractor shall provide, place and consolidate additional approved material to make good
any settlement until permanent reinstatement is carried out below the level of adjacent surfaces.
C2.8 Laying & Compaction

C2.8.1 Granular Fill Compaction
All fill material shall be incorporated in an approved sequence of operations, including the
dumping, spreading, watering, mixing and compacting. The Contractor shall keep the delays
between consecutive operations to a minimum.
Material shall be spread or levelled by a crawler tractor weighing not less than 15 tonnes or any
other approved manner. Each layer shall be graded and all surface voids filled with broken
fragments before the next layer is placed and compacted by at least 12 passes of a towed
vibratory roller with a static mass per metre width of roll of at least 1800 kg or a grid roller with
a mass per metre width of roll of at least 8000 kg or other plant approved by the Company. The
top surface and side slopes shall be thoroughly blinded with approved fine graded material to
seal the surface.
Fill material shall be placed and compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm in thickness over
the full width of the formation. The Contractor shall route his compaction equipment, in such a
manner, over the full width of the filling as to achieve a uniform compaction over the entire area.
All fill material including sub-grade and verges shall then be compacted to 95% of the maximum
dry density obtained in the modified AASHTO compaction test.
Compaction shall be measured by expressing the dry density of the sample as a percentage of the
maximum dry density at optimum moisture content for that material when compacted to the
modified AASHTO test.
Compaction of all fill material shall be carried out at moisture content between 1% above and
2% below the optimum for compaction. The Company may however direct that the moisture
content at compaction be further controlled in order to reduce any subsequent consolidation or
swelling. When it is necessary to increase the moisture content of materials, the water shall be
evenly sprinkled on the surface of the ground, or fill by machine of a type being capable of
uniformly distributing the water at a predetermined and constant rate.
Tests for the control of compaction shall be carried out at regular intervals as directed by the
Company. If any test results from a particular area falls below the minimum specified then the
Contractor should, at his own expense, scarify, water and re-compact the area to the approval of
the Company.
C2.8.2 Hardcore Fill Compaction

Hardcore fill shall be laid on the approved sub-grade surfaces. In general, the method of placing
and compaction of hardcore fill shall be in accordance with section 2.8.1 of this document.
Hardcore shall be filled in layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness. Mechanical
compacting plant approved by the Company weighing or having an equivalent weight of 10
tonnes shall be used to compact hardcore. The Contractor shall route his compaction equipment,
in such a manner, over the full width of the filling as to achieve a uniform compaction over the
entire area. All fill material including sub-grade and verges shall then be compacted to 95% of
the maximum dry density obtained in the modified AASHTO compaction test. Compaction
shall continue until there is no creep of hardcore ahead of the roller, all voids are filled and the
surface is smooth and even and shall be within a tolerance of  15 mm from the required levels
shown in the contract documents.
Dec 2009 Page 34 SP 1279

C2.8.3 Rock / Gravel Fill Compaction

For the Rock / Gravel fill compaction refer the following specifications
SP-1279-R Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Roads & Paving Works’
SP-1279-S Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Graded Roads, Rig Locations,
Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bund Works’ and the relevant referred DEP 34.11.00.11-Gen. ‘Site
preparation and Earthworks including tank foundations and tank farms’.
C2.9 Sampling & Testing

Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with appropriate standards as listed in section 1.4.3.
Copies of all reports and test results shall be issued, for information, to the Company. Company
shall instruct a complete analysis or part of the tests as detailed in the relevant ITP and SP-1274
Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Guideline to Materials Testing’ in case of
doubt arises about its test results.
Facilities, equipment and staff used to carry out specific tests shall be subject to approval by the
Company.
The Contractor shall carry out the tests regularly to ensure that the works are being carried out in
accordance with the contract documents. The Company may at any time order any necessary
tests to ensure that the Work is being carried out in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Any remedial Works proved necessary as a result of such tests shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
The Contractor should provide and maintain facilities, equipment and qualified staff capable of
conducting and testing of materials.
Any tests which cannot be carried out on the Worksite or borrow pit shall be tested by qualified
staff in a laboratory approved by the Company. The Company can, at its discretion have the
tests witnessed by its site representatives.
The Contractor shall notify the Company in advance of all sampling and testing activities.
If any test results submitted for any material fail then the Company may order further tests of
any material performed by other independent laboratories as such places as the Company may
determine, and the Contractor shall provide the samples for such test at his own expense.
Testing requires amplification and the addition of review / inspect / approve documents by the
Company.
At least one complete analysis of the material shall be undertaken in every:
- 500 m3 of fill
- 2000 m3 of formation in cutting, taken from the top 300 mm below formation level.
- Change of material
One complete analysis, or part thereof approved by the Company, shall consist of tests as
described in BS 1377 of:
- Particle Size Analysis.
- Atterberg Limits
- Moisture Content
SP 1279 Page 35 Dec 2009

- Specific Gravity
- Soil Compaction Tests
- California Bearing Ratio
For the appropriate ASTM or ASHTO Test methods (equivalent to BS 1377) refer SP-1274
Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Guideline to Materials Testing’.
For every 1000 m2 of any layer compacted, or such smaller area as may work at any time, field
density and moisture content shall be determined.
C2.10 Termite Protection

When specified in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall apply a solution of ‘Tribute
(Fenvalerate)’ or any other approved equivalent termite protection poison. The solution shall
be mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instruction.
C2.10.1 Method of Application

Anti-termite treatment shall commence after levelling compaction of the filled soil and before
the damp-proof membrane is installed. Application of anti-termite treatment shall be as follows:
Stage 1 Treatment of Soil Under Slabs at Plinth Level
After earth filling and before dry rubble or hardcore packing, the entire surface of the filled earth
shall be treated with a chemical emulsion at the specified rate.
On blinded areas chemical emulsion will be sprayed on the surface of the blinding instead of the
earth filling, at the specified rate.
In case of load-bearing walls, treatment shall be carried out to the cavities of block walls at
plinth level.
Stage 2 Treatments for the Junction of Wall and Floor
Emulsion shall be sprayed at the specified rate at the junction of wall and floor.
Stages 1&2 shall be carried out simultaneously to establish the chemical barrier.
Stage 3 Treatments of Critical Areas
Soil under piers, utility pipe openings, floor drains, expansion joints, conduit entry points, shall
be thoroughly flooded with chemical emulsion at an approximate rate of five times that
specified. If drainage pipes are laid along walls and the chemical barrier created is disturbed or
broken, additional treatment to such areas will be necessary.
Stage 4 Treatment of Soil Along the External Perimeter of Buildings
After levelling and before flagging or plinth protection is laid, soil along external perimeters of
buildings up to a depth of 300 mm shall also be treated at the same rate as specified for soils
under slabs.
C2.10.2 Warning
Precautions shall be taken to avoiding disturbing treated areas by re-levelling, digging or earth
filling, as this will disrupt the chemical barrier. Should disturbance occurs, these area should be
treated again to restore the chemical barrier.
Dec 2009 Page 36 SP 1279

C2.10.3 Guarantees
Completed termite treatment shall carry a guarantee of ten years against termites.
The Contractor shall forward to the Company a copy of the specialist subcontractor's
specification and details of materials to be used for approval, prior to the commencement of the
Works.
The guarantee should list all the areas protected, the various applications and witness signature
(and name) to show that the specification has been fully followed.
C2.11 Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

The Contractor shall submit an Inspection Test Plan (ITP) for all tests to be performed. The ITP
shall cover as a minimum of the following:
Inspection and Testing of:
- Granular & Hard Core Fill materials
- Completed Earthworks
- Water
Requirements of the Inspection Test Plan are given in Appendix-C1. Additional Testing
requirements shall be advised by the Company Site Representative whenever is required.
C3.0 Appendix
Appendix: Inspection Test Plan
SP 1279 Page 37 Dec 2009

C3.1 Appendix: Inspection Test Plan

ITP No: SP-1279-C-001 - Granular & Hard Core Fill Materials
ITP No: SP-1279-C-002 - Completed Earthworks
ITP No: SP-1279-C-003 - Water
Dec 2009 Page 38 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-C-001 - Granular & Hard Core Fill Materials

Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Conducted by Number of Tests Acceptance Criteria Remarks
Materials Controlling (min)
Document
Granular Fill & Hard Physical & Chemical BS / BSEN / ASTM / One complete See note 1
Core Fill Properties test includes AASHTO analysis
Particle Size Analysis BS 1377 Third Party Refer section C2.9 Refer section C2.3 See note 2 & 3
Atterberg Limit BS 1377 Third Party Refer section C2.9 Refer section C2.3 See note 2 & 3
Moisture Content BS 1377 Third Party Refer section C2.9 Refer section C2.3 See note 2 & 3
Specific Gravity BS 1377 Third Party Refer section C2.9 Refer section C2.3 See note 2 & 3
Soil Compaction BS 1377 Third Party Refer section C2.9 Refer section C2.3 See note 2 & 3
California Bearing Ratio BS 1377 Third Party Refer section C2.9 Refer section C2.3 See note 2 & 3
(CBR)
Chemical Test BS 1377 Third Party Refer section C2.9 Refer section C2.3 See note 2 & 3
Note:
1. Contractor shall submit a test certificate to prove the requirements as stated in section 2.3.1. The test certificate shall cover the complete test results.
2. Company shall instruct a complete or part of the tests in case of doubt arises about its test results.
SP 1279 Page 39 Dec 2009

3. Refer SP-1274 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Materials Testing’ for the appropriate AASHTO or ASTM test methods.
ITP No: SP-1279-C-002 - Completed Earthworks

Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Conducted Number of Acceptance Criteria Remarks
Materials Controlling Document by Tests (min)
Completed Earthworks Visual Verification of records CSR / Random Refer section C2.3.1
for each Layer – For Contractor
every 150 mm thick
layer or specified Field Density BS 1377 Third Party Refer section Refer section C2.3 & See note below
thickness C2.9 C2.8
Moisture Content BS 1377 Third Party Refer section Refer section C2.3 & See note below
C2.9 C2.8
Note:
1. Refer SP-1274 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Materials Testing’ for the appropriate AASHTO or ASTM test methods
Dec 2009 Page 40 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-C-003 - Water

For the ITP of ‘Water’ for the Excavation & Earthworks, refer SP-1279-D Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Concrete Works’ ITP No:
SP-1279-D-003.
SP 1279 Page 41 Dec 2009

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Concrete Works
Chapter – D
Concrete Works
Dec 2009 Page 42 SP 1279

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Concrete Works Version 2.0
D1.0 Introduction
D1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes the ERD-17-01 Part-D ‘Civil & Building Construction
Specifications – Concrete Works’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are
For all HSE requirements, the User shall refer the CP-122 Code of Practice for ‘Health, Safety
D1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

D1.2.1 PDO Standards

SP-1274 : Specification for Civil & Building Construction –Materials
Testing
SP-1275 : Specification and criteria for design of Civil & Building

Works
SP-1282 : Specification for Reinforced Concrete Production &

Construction
STD-2-3950 : Standard Foundation Bolts

Protection
D1.2.2 International Standards

ACI 207-4R : Cooling and Insulating system for Mass Concrete
ACI 304-2R : Placing of Concrete by Pumping Methods
ACI 305-R : Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 309 : Consolidation of Concrete
ASTM C-33 : Sieve Analysis
ASTM C-131 : Aggregate Abrasion Test
ASTM C-150 : Portland Cement Composition
ASTM C-289 : Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates, Chemical Method
ASTM C1240 : Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious

Mixtures
BS EN 196 : Methods of Testing Cement
SP 1279 Page 43 Dec 2009

BS EN 197 : Cement, Composition, Specifications and Conformity

criteria for common cements
BS EN 197-4 : Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria

for low early strength blast furnace cements
BS EN 206 Concrete specification, performance, production and

conformity
BS EN 480 : Concrete Admixtures
BS EN 932 : Test for General Properties of Aggregates
BS EN 933 : Tests for geometrical properties of Aggregates
BS EN 1008 : Mixing water for concrete. Specification for Sampling,

Testing and Suitability.
BS EN 1097 : Test for Mechanical & Physical Properties of Aggregates
BS EN 1367 : Test for Thermal & Weathering Properties of Aggregates
BS EN 1992-1 : Euro code 2. Design of Concrete structures
BS EN 12350 : Testing of Fresh Concrete
BS EN 12390 : Testing of Hardened Concrete
BS EN 12504 : Testing Concrete in Structures
BS EN 12620 : Specification of Aggregates for Concrete
BS EN 12878 : Specification for Pigments for colouring materials based on

cement and or lime. Specification and methods of test.
BS EN 13263 : Silica fume for concrete
BS EN ISO 3766 : Construction drawings. Simplified representation of concrete

reinforcement
BS 410 : Specification for Test Sieves
BS 812 : Methods for the Sampling & Testing of Mineral aggregates
BS 1305 : Batch Type Concrete Mixers
BS 1377 : Methods of Test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes
BS 1521 : Waterproof Building Papers
BS 4027 : Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement
BS 4449 : Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete
BS 4482 : Cold Reduced Steel Wire for the Reinforcement Concrete
BS 4483 : Steel Fabric for the Reinforcement of Concrete
Dec 2009 Page 44 SP 1279

BS 5975 : Code of Practice for False Work
BS 6744 : Austenitic Stainless Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of

Concrete
BS 8666 : Specification for Scheduling, Dimensioning, Bending and

Cutting of Steel Reinforcement for Concrete
CIRIA Report SP-31 : The CIRIA Guide to Concrete Construction in the Gulf
Region
CIRIA & The : Guide to the Construction of Reinforced Concrete in the

Concrete Society Arabian Peninsula
D1.2.3 SIEP / Shell GSI Standards

DEP 31.29.00.10-Gen. : Installation of Rotating Equipments
DEP 34.19.20.31-Gen. : Reinforced Concrete Foundations Structures
D1.3 Compliance with Standards

be advised in writing to the custodian.
D1.4 Product / Asset Warranty

The entire Concrete Works, executed under a particular contract, shall be guaranteed to meet
the specified technical specifications and its referred standards & specifications.
Any defects, identified within the maintenance period (as per the contract or a minimum of
one year), have to be repaired by the Contractor at his own cost.
In the event of defect of any structure or component being of such a nature that the
Specification requirements cannot be fulfilled by repair, such structure or item shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Company.
The Company shall not approve the repaired structure, unless the Contractor guarantees in
writing that the repaired structure will have a service lifetime from the original year of
construction.
SP 1279 Page 45 Dec 2009

D2.0 Scope
D2.1 General
This Specification shall define the physical characteristics of the suitable materials and
describes the Works on the basis of end product or a method of Specifications. This
Specification shall also define the type of testing requirements, frequency of each test and
number of samples for the materials and the Concrete Works.
D2.2 Plant, Schedule & Method

D2.3 Materials
All materials shall be obtained from a source approved by the Company. Contractor shall get
approval for all materials prior to the delivery to worksite.
Particulars relating to concrete materials shall be clearly indicated on the delivery note,
invoice or supplier's certificate supplied with each consignment and shall include:
- The name, trademark or other means of identification of the manufacturer
- Date of manufacture and batch number
- Statement of compliance with the relevant Specifications, or Standards
D2.3.1 Cement
Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, Cement used for Concrete Works
should be Ordinary Portland Cement in accordance with BS EN 197 or ASTM C150.
If soil conditions, ground water, seawater or effluent water, are harmful to Ordinary Portland
Cement, the most appropriate of the following types of cement shall be used after getting
approval from the Company.
- Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement in accordance with BS 4027 or Portland Cement

Type-V in accordance with ASTM C150
- Portland Blast-Furnace Cement in accordance with BS EN 197-4 or Portland Cement

Type-II in accordance with ASTM C150
- Ordinary Portland cement with microsilica admixture conforming to ASTM C1240

or BS EN 13263-1. The quantity of microsilica to be used shall be determined based
on trial mix design.
High Alumina Cement and Rapid Hardening Cement are suitable only for marine environment
and shall not be used for any Works in the hot climate and for the onshore construction works.
D2.3.1.1 Test Certificate for Cement

All consignment of cement shall be certified by the Manufacturer as complying with the
requirement of this Specification and be obtained from a source approved by the Company.
Dec 2009 Page 46 SP 1279

Each consignment of cement delivered to the site shall be accompanied by a Manufacturer’s

test certificate indicating the particular batch number or fabrication date, place of manufacture
and the results of the standard tests carried out on the stock of supply from which the cement
was extracted.
D2.3.1.2 Delivery & Storage of Cement

Bagged cement shall be delivered to the Worksite in strong bags. These shall be plainly
marked with brand name, specification compliance, and name of the manufacturer and date of
manufacture.
Cement on arrival on the Worksite shall be stored in a weatherproof shed, that shall have a
wooden floor or platform raised 150 mm from the ground on which the bags shall rest.
Different types of cement shall be stored separately in clearly defined areas.
Cement in bags shall not be stacked to a height greater than 1500 mm.
Cement may be supplied in bulk only after the Company has approved proposed methods of
delivery and storage. Bulk cement shall be stored in weatherproof silos that shall be painted
with reflective white paint and shaded from the sun. Special care shall be taken during
topping-up of silos by means of pneumatic movement to minimising build up of static
electricity.
In all areas, the temperature shall not exceed 40 oC and/or shall be maintained frost proof.
D2.3.1.3 Age of Cement

Consignments of cement shall be used in the order in which they are delivered. Cement that
has been held in stock longer than 3 months from date of manufacture shall be tested to prove
its suitability in the Works. The test results shall meet the requirements of physical and other
properties as stated in the appropriate BS and ASTM standards. Refer section D2.3.1.
Cement that shows signs of deterioration, partial setting, or other defects, or that fails when
tested, shall not be used in the Works.
If upon opening any bag of cement any portion is found to have lumps then the complete bag
shall be removed from the Worksite at the Contractors expense.
D2.3.2 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be crushed stone complying with BS EN 12620 and shall be obtained from a
source known to produce aggregates for concrete.
Aggregates shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, durable, and of limited porosity and shall
be free from adherent coatings, clay lumps, silts and organic matter or other impurities that
may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or may impair the strength or durability of the
concrete.
The maximum aggregate size should not exceed 40 mm for mass concrete and 20 mm for
reinforced concrete unless specified otherwise in the contract documents.
Aggregates shall be tested in accordance with BS 812 and other appropriate BS EN standards
listed in section D1.2.2 of this specification. The results of such tests shall be as hereinafter
specified, the percentages being by weight unless the context indicates otherwise.
D2.3.2.1 Test Certificate for Aggregates

The Contractor shall submit for the Company's approval test certificates showing the grading
of coarse and fine aggregates, which he proposes to use and state the sources from which they
are obtained.
SP 1279 Page 47 Dec 2009

The Company may make tests on selected consignments of aggregate after delivery to the
Worksite and if the results are not satisfactory or if in the opinion of the Company the
aggregate contains an undesirable portion of chemicals, dust, clay, silt, organic matter or other
undesirable constituents, the consignment will be rejected notwithstanding any prior approval
given on the evidence of the aforementioned test certificate.
Approval given by the Company to any type of consignment of aggregate shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to provide concrete fulfilling the requirements specified
hereafter and the Company may order the Contractor to remove any aggregate from the
Worksite or to change the source of aggregate during construction if it considers that unsound
concrete is being produced or is likely to be produced by the use of any particular aggregate.
D2.3.2.2 Delivery & Storage of Aggregates

The Contractor shall ensure that fine and coarse aggregates are delivered to Worksite in
separate vehicles and mixed loads shall be removed from the Worksite at the Contractor's
expense.
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be stored on site on a hard impervious surface. Each size of
aggregate shall be stored in separate heaps and clearly segregated, without intermixing and
any aggregate, which becomes intermixed or dirty shall be removed from the Worksite at the
Contractor's expenses. Aggregate shall be covered with waterproof sheets against wet weather
and from wind blown dust. It should be shaded against from the direct sunlight.
D2.3.2.3 Contamination of Aggregates

Aggregates shall not contain deleterious matter either in any form or sufficient quantity such
as to adversely affect the strength and durability of the concrete. In particular, the following
shall apply:
1. Chloride Content
The maximum chloride content, expressed as Cl, of the aggregate shall not exceed the
following percentages of the dry weight of the aggregates.
Fine aggregate: 0.06%
Coarse aggregate: 0.03%
Note: If the content of either aggregate exceeds these limits, the material shall still be
considered as acceptable, if the total chloride content of the concrete mix (from all sources of
materials) not exceeding the allowable limit. For details refer section D2.5.1 of this
document.
2. Sulphate Content
The maximum sulphate content, expressed as SO 3 (sulphur trioxide), shall not exceed the
Fine aggregate: 0.4%
Coarse aggregate: 0.4%
3. Clay, Silt and Dust
The maximum clay, silt and dust shall not exceed the following percentages of the dry weight
of the aggregate.
Fine aggregate
Natural sand/crushed gravel: 3%
Dec 2009 Page 48 SP 1279

Crushed rock: 5%
Coarse aggregate -
Natural sand/crushed gravel: 1%
Crushed rock: 3%
4. Clay Lumps
Maximum clay lump content (to ASTM C-33) shall not exceed the following percentages of
the dry weight of the aggregates.
Fine aggregate: 1%
Coarse aggregate: 2%
5. Calcium Carbonate (CaCO 3 )
Maximum shell content expressed as Calcium Carbonate (CaCO 3 ), shall not exceed the
Type Size Total Hollow
Fine Aggregate 15% 2%
Coarse Aggregate 40 mm 6% 1%
20 mm 10% 1%
6. Lime Stone
Where limestone aggregate is used for the coarse aggregate, the Contractor shall satisfy the
Company that the proposed aggregate is compatible with the cement and that its use will not
give rise to a chemical reaction between the alkali in the cement and the aggregates, which
would affect the durability of the concrete.
D2.3.2.4 Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregate shall be natural sand or sand derived by crushing gravel or stone and shall be
free from coagulated lumps. Sand derived from stone unsuitable for coarse aggregate shall not
be used as fine aggregate.
The caustic soda test for organic impurities shall show a colour not deeper than that of the
standard solution. The amount of fine particles as ascertained by the laboratory sedimentation
test shall not exceed 10% for crushed stone and 3% for natural sand or crushed gravel. In the
setting test, and after being allowed to settle for three hours, the thickness of the layer of silt
deposited on the coarser material shall not exceed 6% by volume.
The grading of fine aggregate, when determined in accordance with BS EN 12620, shall be
such that not more than 11% shall be retained on a 5 mm BS 410 test sieve. For a natural sand
or crushed gravel, not more than 10%, and for crushed stone not more than 15%, shall pass a
150 µm BS 410 test sieve. (Refer Table D1 for the Grading requirements).
For heavy-duty concrete floor finishes, the Fine aggregate shall comply with C or M given in
Table D1.
SP 1279 Page 49 Dec 2009

Table D1: Fine Aggregates
Sieve Size in mm % by mass passing BS 410 sieve
Overall Limits Additional limits for grading
C M
10.00 mm 100 - -
5.00 mm 89 - 100 - -
2.36 mm 60 - 100 60 - 100 65 - 100
1.18 mm 30 - 100 30 - 90 45 - 90
600 µm 15 - 100 15 - 54 25 - 80
300 µm 5 - 70 5 - 40 5 - 48
150 µm 0 - 15 - -
Note: Individual fine aggregates may comply with the requirements of more than one grading.
Alternatively, some fine aggregates may satisfy the overall limits but may not fall within any
one of the additional limits C & M. In this case and where fine aggregates do not comply with
this table, an agreed envelope may also be used, provided that the Contractor satisfies the
Company that such materials can produce concrete of the required quality.
D2.3.2.5 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate shall be crushed gravel or crushed stone. The pieces shall be angular or,
except for concrete surfaces subject to abrasion, rounded in shape and shall have granular or
crystalline or smooth (but not glassy), non-powdery surfaces.
The 'aggregate crushing value' shall not exceed 45% and for concrete surfaces subject to
abrasion shall not exceed 30% as ASTM C131-76 "Resistance to Abrasion of Sand Size
Aggregate by use of Los Angeles Method". The amount of fine particles occurring in a free
state or as a loose adherent shall not exceed 1% when determined by the laboratory
sedimentation test. After 24 h immersion in water, a previously dried sample of the coarse
aggregate shall not have gained in weight more than 10% or not more than 5% if for use in
impermeable construction.
Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, coarse aggregates for reinforced
concrete shall be PDO Type G, see Table D2, where the grading of coarse aggregate shall be
such that not more than 10%, shall be larger than 20 mm BS 410 test sieve and not more than
10% shall be smaller than 5 mm BS 410 test sieve and not less than 30% or more than 60%
shall be smaller than 10 mm BS 410 test sieve.
Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, coarse aggregate for mass concrete, i.e.,
without reinforcement, shall be PDO type G40, as given in Table D2.
Dec 2009 Page 50 SP 1279

Table D2: Coarse Aggregates
Sieve % by mass passing BS 410 sieves for nominal sizes

Size
in Graded Aggregates Single Sized Aggregates
mm
40 - 5 20 – 5 14 – 5 40 mm 20 mm 14 mm 10 mm 5*
mm mm mm mm
PDO G40 G20 G14 S40 S20 S14 S10 S5

Type
50 100 - - 100 - - - -
37.5 90 – 100 100 - 85 - 100 100 - - -
20 35 – 70 90 - 100 100 0 - 25 85 - 100 100 - -
14 25 – 55 40 - 80 90 - 100 - 0 - 70 85 - 100 100 -
10 10 – 40 30 - 60 50 - 85 0-5 0 - 25 0 - 50 85 – 100 100
5 0–5 0 - 10 0 – 10 - 0-5 0 - 10 0 – 25 45 – 100
2.36 - - - - - - 0–5 0 – 30
*: Used mainly in pre-cast concrete products.
D2.3.3 Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement in Concrete Works shall be plain round hot-rolled mild steel bars or high-
yield high-bond bars complying with BS 4449. Cold-worked bars shall not be used. Stainless
steel reinforcement, where specified, shall comply with BS 6744. Welded wire fabric shall be
either square or oblong meshes and shall comply with BS 4483.
Reinforcement shall be free of pitting, rust, mill scale, oil, grease, adherent earth or any other
material that may impair the bond between concrete and reinforcement, or that may cause
corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete.
Reinforcement shall be free from sodium chloride contamination from seawater spray.
Reinforcement with traces of rust shall be tested for surface chloride contamination, and
rejected if the test is positive.
Dimensions of hooks, bends, etc, not specifically dimensioned on the bending schedule or
elsewhere shall comply with BS 8666 and BS EN ISO 3766. Bars incorrectly bent shall not
be straightened and re-bent. Heat shall not be used for bending reinforcement.
D2.3.3.1 Delivery & Storage of Reinforcement

Reinforcement shall be delivered to the Worksite in original straight lengths or bent as shown
in the reinforcement bending schedules. Reinforcement shall not be folded to fit size of
delivery vehicle.
Reinforcement steel bars shall be stacked in groups correctly labelled and neatly stored clear
of the ground in a separate compound.
SP 1279 Page 51 Dec 2009

D2.3.3.2 Tying Wire

Wire used for fixing reinforcement shall be No. 16 BSWG black annealed soft iron tying wire
or No. 16 galvanised tying wire or any equivalent area of the above, in terms of max three
numbers of smaller dia wires.
D2.3.3.3 Fixing Reinforcement

Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed by approved means and maintained in the position
described on the contract drawings.
Cover to beams, columns, slabs, foundations or any other concrete elements reinforcement
shall be in accordance with SP-1275 Specification and criteria for design of Civil & Building
Works or as specified in the Contract documents for a particular Work. The cover should be
from the face of the elements to links, hoops or stirrups and not to the main reinforcement.
Contractor should ensure the above during fabrication.
Bars intended to be in contact at passing points shall be securely tied with tying wire. All
knots in tying wire shall be located within the reinforcement cage and shall not be located
towards the surface of the finished concrete.
All hoops, links and stirrups shall be taut so that the bars they tie together are properly braced.
Wherever possible reinforcement shall be constructed into rigid cages or mats before fixing in
formwork.
D2.3.4 Water
Water for mixing shall be clean, fresh and free from organic or inorganic matter in solution or
suspension that will impair the strength or durability of the concrete. Water shall be obtained
from a public supply (Municipality or from the Company) where possible, if Company
approves, shall be taken from any other sources and a complete analysis shall be required to
substantiate the requirements as stated in Table D3. Seawater or water from excavations shall
not be used for mixing. Only water of approved quality shall be used for washing out
formwork and similar purposes. Water for making concrete shall be tested in accordance with
BS EN 1008 and shall follow the requirements set out in Table D3. Water storage tanks shall
be painted white and shaded from the hot sun.
Table D3: Inorganic Contamination limits in Water
Form of Contaminant Maximum Concentration
(ppm) (%)
Chlorides 400 0.04
Sulphates, alkali carbonates or 800 0.08

bicarbonates
Dissolved solids (except above) 2000 0.20
Suspended solids 2000 0.20
D2.3.5 Spacers
Spacers shall be used for maintaining the minimum concrete cover as specified in SP-1275
Specification and criteria for design of Civil & Building Works and the referred Standards and
Specifications therein.
Dec 2009 Page 52 SP 1279

Spacer shall be durable, not lead to reinforcement corrosion and not cause concrete cover
spalling. Spacer materials shall be proprietary (Fosroc / Feb / Sika or any other approved
equivalent) pre-cast mortar blocks. Porous spacers shall not be used. Neither shall they be
made using mortar mix as block laying. The strength of the spacer blocks shall be the same or
greater than the concrete used for the casting.
The use of pre-cast mortar blocks, using 5 mm maximum size aggregate, to the same grade as
the main concrete element, made off-site, may only be used if sufficient quality control is
assured.
PVC spacers shall not be used due to differential expansion and contraction to the main
concrete elements, resulting in gaps through which aggressive salts may attack the
reinforcement.
Timber spacers should not be used.
Spacers (or chairs) shall be placed at a maximum spacing of 1 m, and always near the edge of
reinforcement bars / formwork.
D2.3.6 Mould Oil

Mould oil shall be an approved mineral type of oil, free from any chlorides or sulphates and
shall be insoluble in water, non-staining and non-injurious to the concrete. Diesel oil or similar
oils shall not be used under any circumstances.
D2.3.7 Admixtures
Admixtures are water based chemicals used to modify the normal properties of fresh or
hardened concrete.
Admixtures shall not be used unless approved by the Company in writing subject to the
following conditions:
- Used in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions.
- Dosing shall be automatically controlled at mixing plant.
- Proprietary accelerating, retarding and water-reducing agents shall comply with the
requirements of BS EN 480.
- MCI shall be mixed for all reinforced concrete works. Details of dosage and method
of mixing are specified in SP 1282 ‘Specification for Reinforced Concrete
Production & Construction’.
- Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used.
- Pigments shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 12878.
- Additives shall be in liquid form.
- The main function and choice of admixtures are detailed in SP 1282 ‘Specification
for Reinforced Concrete Production & Construction’.
Epoxy-Based Materials (Bonding Compound, Mortar &Grout)
Epoxy based materials may be used for the Concrete Works. If using, Contractor shall submit
the details of the brands, product related specifications, test report for approval by the
Company. Approved brands shall be tested for their particular application prior to use in the
Works.
SP 1279 Page 53 Dec 2009

D2.3.8 Water Bars

Proprietary water bars to be used in expansion and construction joints shall be of material and
type specified in the Contract documents. The jointing of water bars at walls and construction
joints etc., shall confirm to the manufacturers recommendations.
Intersection pieces and mitred corners shall be of preformed by the manufacturer.
Water bars (water stops) shall be fixed properly so as not to be displaced during concrete
compaction. For the larger base area the water bars shall be laid in accordance with the
project drawings and the manufacturer’s instructions. If the project drawing doesn’t address
the water stop details, Contractor shall submit a detail drawing for Company’s approval based
on the manufacturers advise. Water bars shall not be laid centrally for horizontal slabs due to
the risk of honeycombing. Instead externally placed water bars shall be used with horizontal
slabs.
D2.3.9 Expansion - Joint Filler

Expansion-joint (movement joint) filler to be used shall be of the type specified in Contract
Documents.
Expansion joint filler shall be fixed firmly to the first-placed concrete. If more than one strip
is used within a joint, the ends shall be taped together to prevent grout leakage.
The concrete on both sides of the joint shall be thoroughly compacted to form a dense,
uniform mass.
The use of crack inducers for contraction joints shall be subject to approval by the Company.
D2.3.10 Expansion - Joint Sealing Compound

Sealing compound shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. If the contract documents does not address the expansion joint details, Contractor
shall submit a standard details for Company’s approval based on the manufacturer’s advise.
Expansion-joint sealing compound shall be of the type specified in the Contract documents or
of an approved equal material provided it is suitable for exposure to extreme and prolonged
exposure of ultraviolet light and hydrocarbons without premature mechanical or chemical
breakdown.
D2.3.11 Vapour Barriers & Concrete Protections

Generally vapour barriers for PCC are not required if the RCC foundation or grade slab placed
over the PCC is protected with Surface protection. If specified in the Contract documents
vapour barriers to underside of the PCC (Plain Cement Concrete) in contact with the ground
shall be heavy duty, minimum thickness 1000g (250 μ) polythene sheeting in longest length
and widest width available and lapped not less than 300 mm at all joints and intersections.
Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents all other concrete surfaces of the PCC,
RCC in contact with the soil and its exposed surfaces shall be treated with Nitocote PE135 or
any other approved equivalent product. Minimum 2 coats shall be applied in accordance with
the manufacturers written instructions. The total dry film thickness of the coating shall be not
less than 400 micron. Refer SP 1275 Specification and criteria for design of Civil & Building
Works for standard concrete protection details.
D2.3.12 Building Paper

Building paper shall comply with BS 1521 supplied in longest length and widest width
available. It shall be lapped not less than 150 mm at all joints and intersections.
Dec 2009 Page 54 SP 1279

D2.3.13 Anchor Bolts

Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, anchor bolts shall be in accordance
with those listed in PDO Standard Drawing STD-2-3950, which gives details of Types J, F, P
and S holding down bolts.
Pockets shall be left for Types J & P holding down bolts using smooth polystyrene spacers, or
similar. On completion of the works, the polystyrene shall be removed and the pocket
thoroughly cleaned. Hydrocarbon solvents shall not be used to remove the polystyrene.
For Type S & F sleeved holding down bolts, reinforcement bars shall be relocated to allow
complete freedom for accurate positioning of the bolts.
On completion of the work, the bolt locations and elevations shall be accurately checked.
Bolts shall be thoroughly cleaned and threads carefully checked and greased. The nuts shall
then be replaced and protected by masking tape. Washers shall be attached to the bolts with
tie wire, ready for later use.
D2.4 Formwork
Formwork shall be designed in accordance with BS 5975, ACI 347 and the recommendations
of The Concrete Society Technical Report No. 13-'Formwork'.
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for both design and construction of all
formwork as to safety, strength, allowances for tolerances and maintenance of design shapes.
The Contractor shall submit design calculations and formwork construction drawings.
Formwork for concrete shall be rigidly constructed with an approved material and shall be true
to both shape and dimensions specified in the Contract documents. Timber shall be of well-
seasoned wood, free from loose knots and, except where otherwise approved, wrought on all
faces. Faces in contact with concrete shall be free from adherent grout, projecting nails, splits
and other defects.
Joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement grout and to avoid formation of
fins or other blemishes. Faulty joints shall be caulked. Unless specified in the Contract
documents, 25 mm chamfers shall be formed on all external exposed corners of concrete
members.
Formwork shall only be provided for top faces of sloping surfaces, and anchored to prevent
floatation, where slope exceeds 20o from the horizontal plane.
Formwork shall be true to line, and braced and strutted to prevent deformation under weight
and pressure of unset concrete, dynamic and static loads associated with constructional
activities, wind, and other forces. Deflection shall not exceed 3 mm for all surfaces.
Formwork joints shall be constructed such as to permit easy removal and shall be either
nailed, screwed, bolted, clamped, wired, or otherwise secured so as to be strong enough to
retain correct shape during compaction of the concrete. Boltholes in concrete shall be made
good after removal of bolts.
Formwork for beams and slabs shall be erected separately, so that forms on the sides of beams
and soffits of slabs can be removed without disturbing beam bottoms or props under beam
bottoms. Props for an upper storey shall be placed directly over those in the storey
immediately below and the lowest prop shall be supported on a surface sufficiently strong to
carry up to two storeys.
Before placing concrete, bolts and fixings shall be fixed securely in position, and cores and
other devices used for forming openings, holes, pockets, chases, recesses, and other cavities
shall be fixed to formwork.
SP 1279 Page 55 Dec 2009

Insulated form work with thermocouples embedded in concrete for monitoring of temperature
gradient, as recommended by ‘CIRIA’ shall be used for all concrete elements whose least
dimension exceeds 1.0 m. For details of installation and measurement of temperature refer to
SP 1282 ‘Specification for Reinforced Concrete Production & Construction’.
D2.4.1 Cleaning & Treatment of Formwork surfaces

Formwork shall be cleared out of all dust, wood shavings, dirt and other extraneous material
near blowing-out with compressed air before any concrete is placed.
Before concreting, all formwork shall be wetted with clean water.
Openings for inspection of the inside of formwork and for escape of water used for washing
out, dust, wood shavings or other extraneous matter, shall be formed so that they can be closed
tight before placing concrete.
Mould oil approved by the Company shall be applied to faces of formwork to prevent
adherence of concrete. Mould oil, retarding liquid or similar coatings shall not contaminate
reinforcement.
D2.4.2 Formwork Removal

The minimum period of time, which shall elapse between pouring the concrete and loosening
or removing the formwork, shall be in accordance with Table D4. However, the Company
may order this time to be increased if considered as necessary.
Formwork shall not be loosened or struck without the approval of the Company, but such
approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the proper state of finished
Work. Responsibility for safe removal of whole or any part of the formwork shall rest with
the Contractor. Contractor should follow all safety regulations in accordance with CP 122
‘Code of Practice for Health, Safety and Environmental Protection’ and the relevant
appropriate standards referred in.
Formwork shall be removed by gradual easing without jarring. The Contractor shall inform
the Company when formwork is to be struck so that the Company may be present. The
Contractor shall not carry out remedial or cosmetic work until the concrete exposed by the
striking of formwork has been inspected and approved by the Company.
In addition, formwork shall be removed only when concrete has attained sufficient strength to
support its own weight and any load likely to be imposed upon it. The Contractor shall record,
on the drawings or elsewhere, dates upon which concrete is placed to structural soffits in each
part of the work and dates on which formwork to structural soffits is removed.
Table D4 – Minimum Periods Before Striking Formwork
Type of Formwork Minimum period

before striking
Vertical formwork to columns, walls up to 2m high 36 hours

and deep beams vertical faces
Walls and columns 2m and above 48 hours
Soffit formwork to slabs (but not at the props) 6 days
Props to slabs 15 days
Soffit formwork to beams (but not at the props) 15 days
Dec 2009 Page 56 SP 1279

Props to beams 21 days
Concrete for floors and horizontal beams shall not be placed on supporting walls or piers or
columns within 72 hours after the latter have been poured.
D2.5 Concrete
Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, Concrete for Reinforced Cement
Concrete (RCC) shall be a minimum of Grade C35 and Plain Cement Concrete (PCC) for
blinding or Mass Concrete shall be a minimum of Grade C10.
D2.5.1 Chlorides & Sulphates in the Concrete mix

The total amount of chlorides and sulphates (from all sources of materials) present in the
concrete mix shall not exceed the limits as given in Table D5.
Table D5 – Recommended limits of Chloride & Sulphate content in the Concrete

mix (total from all sources)
Type of Concrete Maximum Content (% by

Weight of Cement)
Chlorides Sulphates
Reinforced concrete made with cements containing 0.15 All cases 4.0,
less than about 4% C3A (e.g., sulphate-resisting including the
Portland cement) sulphate ion in
the cement
Reinforced concrete made with cements containing 0.30
4% or more C3 A (OPC usually contains more than
4% C3A).
Plain Cement Concrete. 0.60
D2.5.2 Batching
Exact proportions of aggregate, cement and water, shall be determined by weight to achieve
the grade of concrete as specified in the Contract documents. Proportions of aggregate,
cement and water may be determined by volume for small concreting works (up to 2 m3)
provided that the mix design is calculated by weight and converted to volume using calibrated
batch boxes etc., only after obtaining written permission from the Company. Batching plant
shall be painted white and shaded from the sun.
Minimum cement content shall be 270 kg/m3 when using aggregate with a nominal maximum
size of 40 mm, and 375 kg/m3 when using aggregate with a nominal maximum size of 20 mm.
Aggregate to cement ratios to achieve the specified grades of concrete shall be determined by
the Contractor by means of trial mixes as described in BS 8110 or BS EN 1992-1 Eurocode 2
and other standards referred therein.
Only sufficient water shall be added to the dry concrete mix to obtain a water to cement ratio
high enough to ensure minimum suitable workability. Mix workability shall be such that
concrete can be worked into the corners of formwork and around reinforcement to give
specified surface finish and to ensure maximum compaction to attain specified minimum
strength.
SP 1279 Page 57 Dec 2009

When suitable water, cement and aggregate ratios have been established by trial mixes,
resulting consistencies shall be maintained throughout corresponding parts of the Works.
Target slumps shall be:
- Heavy reinforced foundations: 75 mm
(Cement content adjusted to ensure that design water/cement ratios are maintained)
- Other concrete structures: 50 mm
Concrete mix shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of BS 8110 or BS EN

1992-1 Eurocode 2.
D2.5.3 Trial Mixes

Trial mixes shall be made with water to cement ratio of approximately 0.45 by weight using a
clean dry concrete mixer. The first batch shall be discarded. Nine 150 mm cubes shall be
made from each of three consecutive batches. Three cubes, one taken from each batch shall
be tested at an age of 7 days, at 14 days and at 28 days. Sample cubes shall be made, cured,
transported and tested in accordance with appropriate BS EN standards as listed in section
D1.2.2 of this document. The Company shall be present at all tests. No concreting shall
commence on the contract until the test results at 14 days have been achieved.
D2.5.4 Mixing Concrete
D2.5.4.1 Machine Mixing

Unless otherwise approved by the Company, concrete shall be mixed on site, by weight, in a
batch mixer of approved size and design complying with BS 1305 or equal approved, and
producing a uniform distribution of the aggregates throughout the mix. Contents of the drum
shall be completely discharged before recharging, and the time of mixing shall be not less than
2 minutes after all materials are in the mixer. Mixing shall continue until all materials are
uniformly distributed and the mass is of uniform colour and consistency.
Mixing plant shall be painted white and shaded from the sun.
After mixing has stopped for more than 30 minutes then the mixer shall be emptied and
thoroughly cleaned.
Concrete quality, should be strictly and continuously maintained by the Contractor who shall
ensure that a competent and experienced operator shall be in attendance at the mixer to
approve each batch produced. Continuous mixing machines shall not be used.
D2.5.4.2 Hand Mixing

Where in exceptional circumstances the use of hand-mixed concrete is approved by the
Company, the proportioning of the ingredients may be made by volume, provided that the
amount of cement is increased by 10%.
If concrete is mixed by hand, the materials of each batch shall be gauged and mixed on a clean
platform and long pronged rakes shall be used in addition to shovels. Cement and sand shall
be first mixed together and turned over once in a dry state. They shall then be placed and
turned onto the coarse aggregate, spread out evenly on the platform. The whole mass shall
then be turned over twice in a dry state, and three times after the necessary amount of water
has been carefully added through a fine rose.
All concrete shall be thoroughly mixed to an even colour and consistency.
Dec 2009 Page 58 SP 1279

D2.5.4.3 Ready-Mixed Concrete

The term 'ready-mixed concrete' shall only include concrete, which has been wet-mixed at a
central batching plant and transported to the Worksite under continuous agitation in a
revolving drum transporters approved by the Company.
Transporters shall not be equipped to automatically add water to their charges of concrete.
Ready-mixed concrete shall be obtained from a ready-mixed plant approved by the Company.
All proportioning shall be by weight.
A statement, submitted to the Company, shall accompany each load, showing: amount of
concrete supplied with the subject load; time at which the vehicle was loaded; class and
quantity of cement used per m3 of concrete, slump, free water to cement ratio, time water was
added, guaranteed minimum compressive cube strength, types, trade names and quantities of
additives, if used.
Further, statements shall show total amount of concrete supplied so far, including subject load,
and amount of concrete to follow. All transporting equipment used in each batch of ready-
mixed concrete shall be fully discharged and cleaned after each delivery.
Receipt of loads on site shall be so arranged that intervals between loads do not exceed 30
minutes, unless otherwise approved by the Company.
Ready-mixed concrete shall comply in all respects with the requirements for site-mixed
concrete as described in this Specification and BS 8110 or BS EN 1992-1 Eurocode 2.
The Company shall be afforded access during working hours to all parts of plant for ready-
mixed concrete. Ready mixed concrete shall be supplied from one plant only unless otherwise
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements, at his own expense, to dispose of any
truckload of concrete rejected by the Company.
D2.5.5 Transporting & Placing Concrete

Provisions for concreting in extreme weather conditions shall be made in consultation with the
Company. Reference is made to SP-1282 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Production &
Construction.
Special care shall be taken to prevent high temperatures in fresh concrete during hot weather.
In no case shall temperatures of concrete exceed 30 oC at the time it is being placed. Water
may be cooled by cooling towers or chiller plant or by use of ice to replace part of mixing
water to keep the concrete temperature low.
In extremely hot conditions placing of concrete shall be discontinued.
Fresh concrete shall be shaded directly after finishing, and curing shall be started immediately.
Concrete shall be placed in forms only when the ambient temperature is below 46oC and when
forms are protected from direct rays of the sun by means of suitably constructed sunshades
Concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported from its place of mixing to its
final position in the Works as rapidly as possible by methods and plant, which shall prevent
segregation, loss or contamination of ingredients, or displacement of formwork or
reinforcement. All concrete shall be placed in its final position in the Works within 30
minutes of mixing. Contractor should produce a mixing, transporting and pouring schedule
for Company approval.
Whenever transport of concrete is stopped for longer than 30 minutes, chutes, barrows or other
means of conveyance shall be washed-out with mixing-quality water, cleaned and flushed
SP 1279 Page 59 Dec 2009

again immediately before resumption of concreting. The wash water used for cleaning
purposes shall discharge outside formwork and clear of all fresh concrete.
Before concreting all formwork shall be dampened with clean water, ensuring that areas of
ponding or standing water are not present when concreting commences.
Special care shall be taken not to spill water on to soils that have been identified as containing
expansive silts and clays (hydrites and anhydrites).
Concrete shall be placed only in the presence of the Company.
Concrete shall be placed in layers not exceeding 300 mm in depth. Immediately after each
batch of concrete is placed and before concrete has taken its initial set, it shall be compacted
with immersion type high frequency vibrators of approved design operated by experienced
operators. An adequate number of vibrators shall be used so that at the required rate of
deposition the vibration and complete compaction is secured throughout the entire volume of
each layer of concrete. At least one spare vibrator shall be always available.
Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent formation of voids. Vibration of

reinforcement bolts or formwork shall not be permitted. Vibrators shall not be used to move
concrete laterally.
Compaction of concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 309-72.
Placing of concrete by pumping methods shall be in accordance with ACI 304 2R and shall be
subject to the approval of the Company. Pneumatic pumping shall not be permitted.
When concrete is pouring by pumping methods the Contractor shall ensure that alternative
means of placing concrete is immediately available in the event of a pump breakdown.
Contractor should get advance approval from the Company for those alternative means of
placing concrete.
Concrete shall not be placed in standing or running water. Concrete shall not be poured
during storms, heavy rains or other adverse weather conditions, unless adequate protection to
the approval of the Company has been provided.
In the event of a sudden unexpected rainfall immediate measures shall be taken to stop
concreting, to introduce new stop-ends and to cover and protect fresh concrete from damage.
Concrete shall be placed only in the presence of the Company.
Concrete shall not be poured from free heights exceeding 1.5 m and is restricted to 0.5 m on
reinforcement or through forms, which are not in course of being filled. Where dropping
concrete from a height exceeding 1.5 m is unavoidable, chuting is permissible providing the
chute is not flatter in slope than 1 in 2. Chuting through a vertical pipe is permissible
providing the end of the pipe is near the surface of the concrete and a constant flow is
maintained throughout the pour.
Equipment for chuting and pumping of concrete shall be of such size and design as to ensure a
practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery point without segregation taking place.
Timetables for placing concrete shall be so arranged that placed concrete shall not be left more
than 30 minutes before fresh concrete is deposited against it.
Where concrete is to be placed directly against an exposed surface of an excavation, that

surface shall be free of all loose and soft materials. If the surface has become soft due to
weathering or by other means, further excavation shall take place until, with the approval of
the Company, a sound surface is reached. The whole of the resulting surface shall then be
covered with a layer of polythene sheeting.
Dec 2009 Page 60 SP 1279

Reinforcement, anchor bolts etc, which are to be left protruding from concrete shall not be
subject to any vibration or forces within 72 hours of casting concrete.
Before placing concrete resting on or abutting against hardened concrete, existing work shall
be thoroughly scrabbled to remove all latent to such an extent that no portion of the original
surface remains. These roughened surfaces shall then be thoroughly cleaned off, wire brushed
to remove all loose particles and dust, and shall be wetted with clean water before succeeding
concreting commences.
Special care shall be taken to place fresh concrete thoroughly up against hardened concrete
and shall be a continuous process in a single direction to the new stop-end. For water
retaining structures, appropriate water stops shall be used as detailed in section D2.3.8 of this
specification.
D2.5.6 Curing & Protection of Concrete

Before starting any concrete works, the Contractor shall become familiar with the nature of the
underlying and surrounding soil to ensure that curing water does not reach expansive silts and
clays (hydrites and anhydrites).
All freshly deposited concrete shall be protected from premature drying and rapid temperature
change by the use of hessian cloth or protective membrane, preferably pigmented to reflect
away the solar radiation.
During the curing period, and thereafter as conditions may require, concrete shall be protected
from mechanical damage, disturbance, particularly load stresses, heavy shock and excessive
vibration.
Curing compounds shall not be used unless approved by the Company in writing. The choice
of curing compounds and its applications are detailed in SP1282 Specification for Reinforced
Concrete- Production & Construction.
D2.5.6.1 Top Exposed Surfaces

Top-exposed surfaces of concrete, substantially free from starter bars or other obstructions,
shall be covered with pigmented polythene, or similar, impermeable sheeting
immediately after completion of the concrete pour, ensuring overlap with adjacent sheets at
the edges, and fixed down to prevent air circulation over the concrete surface.
Once the concrete has stiffened sufficiently (and in any case after not more than 24 hours), the
sheets shall be removed and the surface covered with wet Hessian. The polythene should
then be replaced, over the hessian, to reduce evaporation. Additional mixing quality water
shall be frequently introduced under the sheeting to keep the Hessian thoroughly and
permanently wet. Alternatively, the exposed surface may be ponded.
In cases where expansive silts and clays have been identified in the foundation, special care
shall be taken to avoid excess curing water reaching the underlying soil. In cases, where
expansive silts and clays are not present, ponding of the concrete top surface may be used as a
method of curing.
Unless the concrete surface is a construction joint, the sheeting and Hessian shall not be
removed before 7 days.
As an alternative to conventional method of curing with water and Hessian, concrete may be
sprayed with a film of suitable (FOSROC or any other approved equivalent product) curing
compound as per the manufacturers instruction, when it is just surface-dry. However the type
of material and method of application shall be subject to Company approval. The curing
compound shall be removed from concrete surface prior to plastering or painting by rubbing
down with sand paper.
Curing compounds shall not be applied to bonding surfaces such as construction joints.
SP 1279 Page 61 Dec 2009

D2.5.6.2 Side Exposed Surfaces

For the sides of columns, beams and walls, on removal of formwork, the concrete shall be
closely wrapped with wet Hessian and enclosed with pigmented polythene sheeting. Battering
shall be used to keep both the Hessian and the polythene lightly in contact with the concrete
surface. The Hessian shall be kept thoroughly and permanently wet for not less than 7 days,
by the frequent addition of mixing-quality water.
As an alternative to conventional method of curing with water and Hessian, concrete may be
sprayed with a film of suitable (FOSROC or any other approved equivalent product) curing
compound as per the manufacturers instruction, when it is just surface-dry. However the type
of material and method of application shall be subject to Company approval. The curing
compound shall be removed from concrete surface prior to plastering or painting by rubbing
down with sand paper.
D2.5.7 Construction Joints

Construction joints should be kept to a minimum. The location of all construction joints shall
be determined by the Contractor and fully approved by the Company before concrete pouring
commences.
All construction joints, unless detailed otherwise, shall be formed at right angles to the axis of
the member concerned by the use of rigid stop-off forms. Upper surface of lifts in columns
and walls shall be horizontal.
As soon as is practicable after pouring, any skin or laitance shall be removed from surfaces of
construction joints by means of washing and brushing. After cleaning, excess water shall be
removed.
Where concrete has set hard, any skin or laitance shall be removed from the concrete surface
and to be made roughened. Wire brush shall be used to remove all loose particles.
The surface shall be thoroughly washed with clean water and the surplus removed. The
placing of the fresh concrete shall follow immediately.
D2.5.8 Surface finishes

All exposed concrete surfaces shall have a dense smooth finish, free from honeycombing,
form marks, fins and other irregularities.
Top surfaces of concrete walls, beams, buttresses and slabs shall be finished to specified levels
and falls. No holes or rough patches shall remain.
Upper surfaces of floor slabs and paving that are not to receive a further finishing layer shall
be given a wooden float finish.
Finishing operations shall not bring an excess of laitance to the surface, nor provide a slippery
surface.
Surfaces requiring subsequent plastering, tiling or grouting shall be left rough to provide a
proper key for the finishing layer. All surfaces exposed to sewage are to be fair-faced.
Touching up concrete surfaces after removal of formwork is not permitted until they have
been inspected and released by the Company.
Painted surfaces are to be treated as rubdown or smooth finish surfaces.
Upper surfaces of slabs, which are to receive screed shall be left with neat tamping marks or
scored while still 'green' to provide a proper key.
Dec 2009 Page 62 SP 1279

Concrete surfaces, which are to be rendered or plastered, shall be treated by an approved

method to provide a proper key. Chemical retarders shall not be used unless approved in
writing by the Company.
Concrete surfaces formed with wrought formwork shall require only minor filling of surfaces
and removal of fins to produce fair smooth surfaces. Filling shall consist of sand and cement
mortar in which proportions are the same as those in concrete mix.
All droppings and grout marks shall be removed on completion. Any defective concrete finish
shall be rejected, and the Company may at its discretion order defects to be cut out and made
good.
D2.5.9 Shrinkage
The size of each pour and sequence of work shall be approved by the Company with the aim
that shrinkage effects are reduced to a minimum.
Slabs on the ground shall be cast in alternate or diagonally adjacent panels (chessboard
pattern) between construction joints. Panels shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 7 days
before concreting adjoining panels. The Contractor shall provide a pouring sequence plan for
the approval of the Company. This plan shall include all construction and expansion joints.
Maximum areas of concrete, placed in any one direction, shall be limited as follows:
1. Where exposed to the sun
Maximum area: 30 m2
Maximum dimension of side in any one direction: 6m
2. Where not exposed to the sun
Maximum area: 50 m2
Maximum dimension of side in any one direction: 8m
D2.5.10 Repair of New Concrete

Reconstruction or repairs to faulty work shall not be carried out unless approved by the
Company.
Any fins that may occur after striking of formwork shall be removed and air holes filled with
mortar (1 part cement: 1 1/2 part sand). Any area requiring treatment after stripping as
outlined above shall afterwards be rubbed-down with a carborundum block and washed
perfectly clean.
Extent and method of repair works to remedy any imperfections of concrete shall be subject to
the approval of the Company.
No openings, chases, holes or other voids shall be formed in concrete without the approval of
the Company. Details of fixing or fixtures to be permanently built into concrete shall be
submitted to the Company for approval. All formwork ties permanently cast into concrete
shall be recessed back from the face equal to the specified cover and filled in the prescribed
manner.
D2.5.11 Loading on Concrete

All parts of a structure shall be at least 28 days old before any load is applied, unless approved
strutting is provided or the minimum target mean strength (28 days compressive) has been
proven to the approval of the Company. Thereafter superimposed loads shall not exceed
design loads, which shall be obtained from the Company.
SP 1279 Page 63 Dec 2009

D2.6 Grout Mortar

Grout Mortar for filling and packing voids below steel structures shall consist of a sand
aggregate cement mix. Grout mortar for Static equipment shall be ready mixed shrinking
compensated cement base grout. Grout mortar for rotating and reciprocating equipment shall
be ready mixed or non-shrinking Epoxy grout. The selection of grout material shall depend
upon the strength requirement as mentioned in contract drawing and constructability.
Thickness and extent of all grouts shall be as per contract drawings.
D2.6.1 Sand Cement Grout

The grout mortar mix shall consist of a mixture of one part of OPC and two parts of clean sand
with a pouring consistency. The water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.4.
Cement used in grout mortar mixes shall comply with BS EN 197.
Aggregate used in grout mortar mixes shall be a sand aggregate to BS EN 12620 capable of
freely passing a filter mesh of 1.5 mm square.
The grout shall not contain more than 100 ppm of each of the following: chlorides, nitrates,
sulphides and sulphates. The total of chlorides, nitrates, sulphides and sulphates shall not
exceed 300 ppm.
Contractor shall carryout all tests by an independent laboratory, to confirm this requirement:
1. Grout shall have silt content of not greater than 1%.
2. Grout shall have a friable particles content of not greater than 0.5% and lignite content of
less than 0.25%.
3. Grout shall have a soundness value of not greater than 10% when tested with sodium
sulphate of 15% when tested with magnesium sulphate.
4. Water used in grout mortar mixes shall comply with this specification. Grout mortar
additives shall not be used.
5. The grout mortar shall have a crushing strength of not less than 35 N/mm2 at 28 days and
not less than 25 N/mm2 at 7 days when tested. The acceptance range shall be that no sample
shall have a crushing value of below 95% of the specified values and not greater than 10% of
all samples taken shall fall below the specified crushing value.
Two sets of three cubes shall be taken once for testing, three for 7 days test and another three
for 28 days test.
D2.6.2 Non-Shrink Grout

Rotating and reciprocating equipment and base plates with shear keys shall be placed on a
non-shrinking ready mixed flow grout as stated on the contract drawings.
Grout mortar shall have a compressive strength of not less than 75 N/mm2 for the cement
based non-shrink grout and 95 N/mm2 for the epoxy based non-shrink grout. The selection of
the type of grout for rotating and reciprocating equipment shall be in accordance with DEP
31.29.00.10-Gen ‘Installation of Rotating Equipment’.
Non-shrink grout shall be composed and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Company for the method of
placing of grout prior to the commencement of the work.
The grout mix shall not contain more than 100 ppm of each of the following: chlorides,
nitrates, sulphides and sulphates.
Dec 2009 Page 64 SP 1279

The total of chlorides, nitrates, sulphides and sulphates shall not exceed 300 ppm.
The grout mix shall only be approved by the Company, if accompanied by a manufacturer's
certificate of guaranteed performance, when used in accordance with manufacturer's
instruction.
In cases where epoxy-based grouts are used, the Contractor shall ensure that all exposed steel
to be embedded are epoxy coated so that corrosion is avoided.
In cases where Type S & F sleeved holding down bolts are used, after the machinery has been
located and the bolts installed, the sleeve shall be filled with vermiculite or glass wool up to
65 mm below the top level of the concrete foundation and sealed off with 13 mm of cement
mortar and the remainder with asphalt, before final epoxy grouting.
D2.6.3 Surface Preparation for Grouting

The surface of the foundation under the base plate to be grouted shall be chipped and brushed.
Prior to grouting, loose concrete or dust shall be removed and the surface soaked with clean
water. Excess water shall be removed particular care being given to anchor bolt sleeves and
the surface left clean and uniformly damp.
Adequate wedges and/or shim plates shall be used. The surfaces not in contact with concrete
shall be greased to ensure easy removal.
D2.6.4 Grouting Method

All grout mortar shall be machine mixed to an even consistency and under no circumstances
shall hand mixing be employed.
Grouting method shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Grout
pouring shall be carefully supervised to prevent distortion of the base plate. Vent holes shall
be drilled in base plates as directed by the Company.
Tools and receptacles used for pouring the grout mortar shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
grease and other deleterious substances prior to use.
Grouting shall not take place if the mix temperature exceeds 27oC, or is outside the
manufacturer's specification.
The placing of the grout mortar shall commence not later than 15 minutes after completion of
mixing. No grout mortar shall be used that has not been placed after 30 minutes has elapsed
from completion of mixing. Under no circumstances shall remixing be allowed.
After the grout has been tamped into place it shall be protected from the rapid loss of moisture
for a period of at least 48 hours, following which time normal curing procedures shall apply:
- Cement-based grout shall be kept moist during the first 7 days after placing and shall
be protected from sun and drying out by protective covering.
- Polystyrene anchor bolt sleeves shall be removed and the voids shall be carefully
filled with grout.
- Grouting shall be extended to the edge of the concrete surface where it shall be
finished with a 45o chamfer.
- The grout shall fill all voids between the base plates or sole plate and the foundation,
and shall have full surface contact.
After hardening, wedges etc. shall be removed and the resulting voids filled with grout.
SP 1279 Page 65 Dec 2009

D2.7 Tolerances
All work shall be constructed in accordance with dimensions, lines and levels in the Contract
documents. Acceptable tolerances shall be as follows.
D2.7.1 Form work

Refer BS 8110, Section 6.2.6 and its referred documents for formwork tolerances.
D2.7.2 Bars Used for Concrete Reinforcement

For the reinforcement tolerances refer BS 8666.
D2.7.3 Concrete Elements

Permissible tolerances for the concrete elements shall be referred to the following standards:
- Refer BS 5606 for the in-situ concrete elements
- Refer BS 8110, Section 6.2.8 - 'Dimensional Deviations' pre-cast concrete members.
D2.8 Quality Control

D2.8.1 Quality Plan
requirements and BS EN 206 and or in accordance with the contract requirements of a
particular contract. The Quality plan shall cover quality assurance and control and shall be
divided into detailed design and production/execution plan. The quality plan shall be subject
to audit by the Company.
D2.8.2 Production / Execution Quality Plan

The Production/Execution Quality Plan shall cover all aspects related to Production /
Execution requirements, such as performance of tests, trial mixes, availability of certificates /
data sheets, reinforcement, sources of cement / aggregates / sand / water, workmanship, batch
plants, storage, transport, handling etc.
D2.8.2.1 Local Conditions

The quality plan shall cover all aspects related to local conditions, such as climatic conditions,
back up facilities, spare parts, transport possibilities, storage facilities, quarries, local
Suppliers/Manufactures, test facilities (field laboratory), etc. Trial concrete mixes shall be
proven to perform under local conditions and with the equipment to be used during execution.
D2.8.3 Reporting system

finishing, curing, striking, etc. Weather conditions shall also be recorded. After completion
rebound and or ultrasonic, measurements should be taken to control and verify the concrete
quality against the compliance tests and required concrete quality if there is any doubt about
the above records. The results should be recorded. Any deviation shall be reported, including
measurements to be taken.
D2.9 Sampling and Testing

Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with appropriate standards as listed in section
D1.2.2. Copies of all reports and test results shall be issued, for information, to the Company.
Company shall instruct a complete analysis or part of the tests as detailed in the relevant ITP
and SP 1274 Specification for Civil & Building Construction-‘Materials Testing’ in case of
Dec 2009 Page 66 SP 1279

Facilities, equipment and staff used to carry out specific tests shall be subject to approval by
the Company.
All sampling and testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. The Company may order that
sampling or testing be repeated, at the Contractor's expense, until satisfied that a truly
representative test result has been obtained.
Sampling and testing of fresh concrete shall be performed in accordance with BS EN 12350 at
intervals recommended in BS EN 206 where applicable. Copies of all reports shall be issued,
for information, to the Company.
Tests on trial mixes shall be satisfactorily completed prior to commencing any concreting
work. The Company shall be present when the trial mixes are made and tested.
D2.9.1 Testing Apparatus

The following apparatus for testing concrete and aggregates shall be supplied by the
Contractor and kept permanently on the Worksite and shall be fit for use throughout the
construction of the Works.
- Maximum/minimum thermometer.
- 250 cc measuring cylinder.
Slump cone and Compactor or Compacting factor test apparatus complying with appropriate
parts of BS EN 12350 standards.
Not less than twelve steel moulds for making 150 x 150 x 150 mm cubes complete with
compactor complying with appropriate parts of BS EN 12390 standards.
- Water Tank for curing test cubes.
- Temperature gauge for determination of the temperature of freshly placed concrete.
D2.9.2 Rate of Sampling

Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, the rate of sampling shall be as given in
Table D6.
Five number of test cubes (or cylinders) shall be formed from each sample, two numbers to be
tested at 7 days, two numbers to be tested at 28 days and one number of spare to be kept until
the end of the contract period.
Each cube shall be numbered and marked and the Contractor shall record cube numbers, date
of casting, where each tested concrete batch was placed, proportions of water, cement and
aggregate used, slump of mixed concrete and any other particulars required by the Company.
The Company shall be informed immediately of the results of all cube tests at 7 days and 28
days. Test cubes (or cylinders) shall be made, cured, transported and tested in accordance
with appropriate parts of BS EN 112390 standards.
SP 1279 Page 67 Dec 2009

Table D6: Minimum Rate of Sampling
Average Sampling Rate Type of Structure Max Concrete

at Risk at Any
One Time
per 8 m3 or per 8 batches Columns, masts, cantilevers 30 m3
per 16 m3 or per 16 batches Beams, slabs, bridges, decks 60 m3
per 40 m3 or per 40 batches Solid raft bases, mass pours 150 m3
per concreting day All -
Note: Rate of sampling, shall be against either cubic metres or batches of

concrete, whichever is the lesser volume.
Higher rates of sampling and testing may be required, at the Contractor's expense, if the
Company is in doubt of the quality of the concrete poured. Lower rates of sampling and
testing, may be allowed by the Company after a consistent quality has been established.
Concrete used in the Works, which fails to comply with specified requirements shall, at the
Company's discretion, be cut out and replaced with new concrete at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall make tests at least once a day on the moisture content of all aggregates
used in the Works and shall keep a record of results. The Contractor shall make all necessary
adjustments to water added to mixes to maintain water/cement ratio at the correct figure.
At least one slump test shall be carried out on the first batch of concrete mixed on the
Worksite each day, to set the standard for the day. The Contractor shall verbally inform the
Company when this slump test is to be carried out. All slump tests shall be carried out as
recommended in BS EN 12350, as well as at change of specified mix if it is considered that
the consistency of the mix is at all different to that already approved.
Slump test shall be carried out on each delivery of ready-mixed concrete delivered to the
Worksite. Any concrete that fails to meet the target slump shall not be used in the Works and
disposed of as instructed by the Company at the Contractors expense.
D2.10 Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

The Contractor shall submit an Inspection Test Plan (ITP) for all tests to be performed. The
ITP shall cover as a minimum of the following Inspection and Testing of:
- Cement
- Aggregates
- Water
- Reinforcement
- Formwork
- Concrete
- Admixtures, Concrete Mortars, Grouts, etc.,
Requirements of the Inspection Test Plan are given in Appendix-A. Additional Testing
Dec 2009 Page 68 SP 1279

D2.11 Supervision
D2.11.1 Contractor’s Supervisor
production and placing of high quality concrete shall be employed by the Contractor on the
Worksite and shall directly supervise all concrete works.
D2.11.2 Company Inspection

The Contractors shall give at least one working day's notice, to the Company Site
Representative, so that he may inspect the following:
- Formwork ready for concrete.
- Reinforcement in position.
- Placing of concrete.
- Striking of formwork.
- Backfill of Foundations
- Checking of conduits or any other provisions for the concealed services
contractor to continue with the next sequence of the work. Such permission will not relief the
contractor in any way from his responsibilities as to carry out the works in accordance with
the contract and specifications.
D2.12 Pouring Records

The Contractor shall maintain accurate and comprehensive records of every concrete pour.
The records shall include the following:
- Extent of each pour
- Quantity and grade of concrete pour
- Slump test results
- Additives used: type, brand and ratio
- Date and time, including commencing and finishing time of pour
- Method of curing
- Ambient temperature
- Concrete temperature
- Concrete test results, where applicable including compressive strength at 7and 28

days
See also Inspection Test Plan in Appendix-D1
SP 1279 Page 69 Dec 2009

D3.0 Appendices
Appendix D1 Inspection Test Plan (ITP)
Dec 2009 Page 70 SP 1279

D3.1 Appendix D1: Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

ITP No: SP-1279-D-001 - Cement
ITP No: SP-1279-D-002 - Aggregates (Coarse & Fine)
ITP No: SP-1279-D-003 - Water
ITP No: SP-1279-D-004 - Reinforcement
ITP No: SP-1279-D-005 - Form Work
ITP No: SP-1279-D-006 - Concrete
ITP No: SP-1279-D-007 - Admixtures, Concrete Mortars, Grouts etc.,
SP 1279 Page 71 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-D-001 - Cement

Materials Controlling Document (min)
Cement Cement tests includes

the following
Visual observation Visual Contractor / Each Consignment / Refer section D2.3.1 See note 1&2
CSR Pour
Strength Tests BS EN 196 / BS EN Third Party Each Consignment Refer section D2.3.1 See note 3
1881-131
Fineness BS EN 196-6 Third Party Each Consignment Refer section D2.3.1 See note 3
Setting time BS EN 196-3 Third Party Each Consignment Refer section D2.3.1 See note 3
Soundness BS EN 196-3 Third Party Each Consignment Refer section D2.3.1 See note 3
Density BS EN 196 Third Party Each Consignment Refer section D2.3.1 See note 3
Note:
1. If the age of Cement is less than three months and satisfies the requirements as stated in section D2.3.1 no further tests are required
2. If the Cement age more than three months or the visual observation not satisfies the section D2.3.1 the particular consignment shall not be used for the
concrete works. In case, the contractor still want to use the consignment, he shall prove that the cement fulfils specification (as stated in section D2.3.1)
with the following substantiate third party test certificate.
3. For the equivalent AASHTO or ASTM test methods, refer SP-1274 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Materials Testing’
Dec 2009 Page 72 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-D-002 - Aggregates (Coarse & Fine)

Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Conducted by Number of Tests Acceptance Remarks
Materials Controlling Document (min) Criteria
Aggregates (Fine Aggregate test includes the

& Coarse) following
Visual Observation Visual and verification of Contractor / Each Consignment / Refer section See note 1
Suppliers Test Certificate CSR Random D2.3.2
Sieve analysis BS 812 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note2 & 3.
D2.3.2
Aggregate (Coarse Physical & Mechanical BS/BSEN/ASTM/ One Complete

& Fine) Properties Tests includes AASHTO analysis
Shell Content BS 812 / BS EN 1367 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
D2.3.2
Shape (Elongation & BS 812 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
Flakiness index) D2.3.2
Particle Density & Moisture BS 812 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
Content D2.3.2
Water absorption BS 812 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
D2.3.2
SP 1279 Page 73 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-D-002 - Aggregates (Coarse & Fine) contd.
Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Controlling Conducted Number of Tests (min) Acceptance Remarks
Materials Document by Criteria
Aggregates Coarse & Physical & BS/BSEN/ASTM/AASHTO

Fine (contd.) Mechanical Properties
Tests (contd.)
Soundness BS 812 / BS EN 1367 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Mg SO 4 < 15% Na 2 SO 4 See note 2 & 3
< 10%
Shrinkage BS 812 / BS EN 1097 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
D2.3.2
10% fines value BS 812 / BS EN 1097 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
D2.3.2
Crushing value (ACV) BS 812 / BS EN 1097 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
D2.3.2
Los angles Abrasion BS 812 / BS EN 1097 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
Test D2.3.2
Dec 2009 Page 74 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-D-002 - Aggregates (Coarse & Fine) contd.
Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Controlling Conducted Number of Tests Acceptance Remarks
Materials Document by (min) Criteria
Aggregates Coarse & Contamination Tests BS/BSEN/ASTM/AASHTO

Fine (contd.) includes
Fines (clay, silt & dust) BS 812 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
D2.3.2
Clay, Lumps and BS 812 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
Friable particles D2.3.2
Organic impurities BS EN 1744-1 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
D2.3.2
Chloride content BS 812 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
D2.3.2
SO 3 content BS 812 Third Party Refer section D2.3.2 Refer section See note 2 & 3
D2.3.2
Note:
1. The Contractor shall submit a test certificate to prove the requirements as stated in section D2.3.2. The test certificate shall cover the complete test
results
2. Company shall instruct a complete or part of the tests in case of any doubt arises about its test results.
SP 1279 Page 75 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-D-003 - Water

Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method Conducted by Number of Tests Acceptance Remarks
Materials / Controlling (min) Criteria
Document
Water Visual observation Visual Contractor / CSR Random Clean and potable See note 1
Water analysis includes the One complete See note 1

following tests analysis
Chlorides BS 1377 Third Party Refer section Refer section See note 2
D2.3.4 D2.3.4
Sulphates BS 1377 Third Party Refer section Refer section See note 2
D2.3.4 D2.3.4
Alkali Carbonates or bicarbonates BS 1377 Third Party Refer section Refer section See note 2
D2.3.4 D2.3.4
Dissolved solids BS 1377 Third Party Refer section Refer section See note 2
D2.3.4 D2.3.4
Suspended solids BS 1377 Third Party Refer section Refer section See note 2
D2.3.4 D2.3.4
Note:
1. Water analysis are not required if the source is approved and supplied by the Company or Municipality. In case, the Contractor want to use the water
from other sources, he shall prove the water specification (as stated in section D2.3.4) with the following substantiate third party test certificates.
Dec 2009 Page 76 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-D-004 - Steel Reinforcement

Materials Controlling (min)
Document
Steel Reinforcement Reinforcement test

includes
Visual Inspection Visual Contractor / CSR Each consignment Refer section D2.3.3 See note 2
Storage / Handling Visual Contractor / CSR Each consignment Refer section D2.3.3 See note 2
Specification for BS 4449 Manufacturers certificate One complete Refer section D2.3.3 See note 1
Carbon Steel analysis
Specification for Cold BS 4482 Manufacturers certificate One complete Refer section D2.3.3 See note 1
Reduced Steel wire analysis
Specification for Steel BS 4483 Manufacturers certificate One complete Refer section D2.3.3 See note 1
Fabric analysis
Note:
2. If the visual observation not meeting the requirements as stated in section D2.3.3, Company shall advise any specific tests of the above stated or any
additional test requirements for a particular project.
SP 1279 Page 77 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-D-005 - Formwork

Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Conducted by Number of Acceptance Criteria Remarks
Materials Controlling Tests (min)
Document
Formwork Formwork inspection

includes
Materials Visual Contractor / CSR Each pour Refer section D2.4 See note1
Installation & Setting Out Visual Contractor / CSR Each pour Refer section D2.4 See note1
Embedded works Visual Contractor / CSR Each pour Contract document See note1
Cleaning, Treatment Visual Contractor / CSR Each pour Refer section D2.4 See note1
Kickers, Joints Visual Contractor / CSR Each pour Contract document See note1
Chamfer Visual Contractor / CSR Each pour Contract document See note1
Formwork approval Visual Contractor / CSR Each pour Contract document See note1
Striking of Formwork Visual Contractor / CSR Each pour Refer section D2.4 or the See note1
Contract document
Note:
1. Formwork verifications are the responsibility of the contractor and shall produce a signed checklist to the CSR for acceptance and random check only.
Dec 2009 Page 78 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-D-006 - Concrete

Concrete Works
Fresh Concrete Fresh Concrete shall

include the following
Tests
Verification of the Verification of records Contractor / Each pour / batch Refer section D2.5 / See note 1
following and visual inspection CSR Contract Document
Mix composition ratio
Date and time of pouring
Ambient Temperature
Concrete Temperature
Slump test
Additives used:
Embedded services
Reinforcement bars
Aggregates test results
Cube records
SP 1279 Page 79 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-D-006 - Concrete (contd.)
Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Controlling Conducted by Number of Tests Acceptance Remarks
Materials Document (min) Criteria
Hardened Concrete Hardened Concrete BS/BSEN/ASTM/AASHTO Refer section D2.9 Refer section D2.5 /
tests shall includes Contract Document
Compression Strength BS EN 12350/ BS EN Third Party Refer section D2.9 Refer section D2.5 /
12390 Contract Document
Water Absorption BS EN 12350/ BS EN Third Party Contract Documents Refer section D2.5 /
Air content BS EN 12350/ BS EN Third Party Contract Documents Refer section D2.5 /
Compaction factor BS EN 12350/ BS EN Third Party Contract Documents Refer section D2.5 /
Density BS EN 12350/ BS EN Third Party Contract Documents Refer section D2.5 /

NOTE:
1. Contractor shall maintain the pour records and shall be verified by CSR.
Dec 2009 Page 80 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-D-007 - Admixtures, Concrete Mortars, Grouts, Etc.,

Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Controlling Conducted Number of Acceptance Criteria Remarks
Materials Document by Tests (min)
Admixtures Verification Manufacturer’s test results CSR Contract Refer section D2.3.7 / See note 1
Documents Contract Document
Concrete Mortars Following Tests are

includes
Setting Time BS EN 480 / BS EN 12350 Third Party Contract Refer section D2.5 & D2.6 / See Note 2
Compressive strength BS EN 480 / BS EN 12350 Third Party Contract Refer section D2.5 & D2.6 / See Note 2
Grouts Verification Manufacturer’s compliance CSR Contract Refer section D2.6 / See Note 1
test results Documents Contract Document
Tanking System Verification Manufacturer’s compliance CSR Contract Contract Document See Note 1
test results Documents
(Generally not used)
Joint Sealants Verification Manufacturer’s compliance CSR Contract Refer section D2.3.10 / See Note 1
test results Documents Contract Document
NOTE:
1. Materials testing are not required, if the manufacturer’s test certificate not satisfying the requirements alternative materials shall be used.
SP 1279 Page 81 Dec 2009

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Block work
Chapter – E
Block work
SP-1279 Page 82 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Block work Version2.0
E1.0 Introduction
E1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes Version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part-E “Civil & Building Construction
Specifications – Blockwork”. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are the
main changes to this document.
- Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes are revised.
For all HSE requirements, the User shall refer the CP-122 ‘Code of Practice for Health, Safety
E1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

This specification shall be used in conjunction with the latest revisions of the following
E1.2.1 Construction Standards

BS5628 : Code of Practice for use of Masonry
BS6100 : Glossary of Building and Civil Engineering Terms (Parts 5

and 6)
E1.2.2 Material Standards
BS EN 197-1 : Cement, Composition, Specifications and Conformity

Criteria for Common Cements
BS EN 771 : Specification for Pre-cast Concrete Masonry Units
BS EN 845 : Metal Ties for Tension straps, |Hangers & Brackets
BS EN 934 : Admixtures for Mortar
BS EN 998 : Specification of Mortar for Masonry
BS EN 1008 : Mixing Water for Concrete
BS EN 12620 : Aggregates for Concrete
BS EN 13139 : Fine Aggregates for Mortar
BS 405 : Expanded Metal (Steel) for General Purposes
BS 4027 : Sulphate-Resisting Portland Cement
BS 6398 : Bitumen Damp Proof Courses for Masonry
BS 6515 : Polyethylene Damp Proof Courses for Masonry
BS 8215 : Code of Practice for Design & Installation of Damp Proof

Course in Masonry
Dec 2009 Page 83 SP-1279

OS I / 1998 : Pre-cast Concrete Blocks (Omani standard)
E1.3 Compliance with Standards

SP-1279 Page 84 Dec 2009

E2.0 Scope
E2.1 Materials
Particulars relating to materials made in accordance with this Specification shall be clearly
indicated on the delivery note, invoice or Supplier's certificate supplied with each consignment
and shall include:
- The name, trademark or other means of identification of the manufacturer.
- Type of block, load bearing, non-load bearing, solid, hollow, perforated or

cellular.
- Strength of blocks in N/mm2.
- Type of cement used.
- Length, height and thickness.
- Date of manufacture.
- Statement of compliance with the relevant specification.
E2.1.1 Concrete Blocks

The Contractor shall supply and lay concrete blocks from a source, approved by the Company,
known to produce concrete blocks, which shall comply with BS EN 771-3.
E2.1.2 Mortar
Cement used for mortar shall be ordinary Portland cement complying with BS EN 197 or
sulphate resisting cement complying with BS 4027 as specified in the Contract Documents.
Sand used for mortar shall comply with BS EN 13139.
Water for mixing shall be clean, fresh and free from organic or inorganic matter in solution or
suspension that will impair the strength or durability of the mortar. Water shall be obtained
from a public supply where possible, and shall be taken from any other source only if
approved by the Company. No seawater or water from excavations shall be used for mixing.
Water for mixing mortar shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 1008. Water storage tanks
shall be painted white and shaded from the sun.
Plasticizers used for mortars shall comply with BS EN 934 and shall only be used with the
written approval of the Company.
E2.2 Mixing Mortar

Ingredients for mortars shall be measured in properly constructed gauge boxes. Mortar shall
be mixed in a mechanical mixer approved by the Company. Mortar shall be used within 30
minutes of mixing. Mortar, which has partially set, shall not be remixed or used in the Works.
Mortars for non-load bearing block work shall consist of 1 part cement to 6 parts sand (1: 6
mix).
Mortar for load bearing block work shall consist of 1 part cement to 4 parts sand (1: 4 mix),
unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents.
Dec 2009 Page 85 SP-1279

E2.3 Blockwork Construction

E2.3.1 Laying
Blocks shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water immediately prior to laying.
Blocks shall be laid in stretcher bond, unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents,
solidly bedded and jointed with mortar. Nominal thickness of mortar-bed and vertical joints
shall be 10 mm.
Blockwork shall be carried up evenly, no portion being raised more than 1600 mm above any
adjacent portion whilst being built and shall be racked back and not toothed.
Courses shall be level with plumb vertical faces.
E2.3.2 Finishes
Walls specified in the Contract Documents as fair faced shall be built with blocks having
unblemished surfaces and with good clean arises. Pointing shall be as specified and continued
as work proceeds. Special attention shall be made to ensure mortar droppings do not deface
the wall.
Walls specified in the Contract Documents to receive in situ finishes of cement and sand
backing should be scrabbled and joints raked out to provide an adequate key.
E2.3.3 Cavity Walls

Cavity walls consisting of two skins of blockwork shall be tied together with stainless steel
butterfly wall ties prescribing to BS EN 845. Wall ties shall be located in the mortar joints at
a horizontal spacing of 800 mm and vertical spacing of 400 mm. Spacing of wall ties shall be
horizontally staggered.
Cavities shall be kept clear of mortar droppings and debris by the use of cavity battens.
Each skin of a cavity wall shall be constructed simultaneously. Where cavities are filled with
insulation, the insulation shall be carefully cut and the tie passed through .
As an alternative to Cavity walls filled with insulation, pre-insulated walls are available in the
local market. The available pre-insulated block is 300 mm thick, consisting 100 mm thick
polystyrene insulation sandwiched in between two 100 mm hollow blocks. The Contractor
shall ensure that the block has specified design ‘U’ value prior to selecting such composite
blocks for construction.
E2.3.4 Reinforced Blockwork

Horizontal reinforcement in mortar beds, where specified in the Contract Documents, shall
consist of a proprietary expanded metal mesh approved by the Company.
Vertical reinforcement in hollow block voids where specified in the Contract Documents shall
consist of reinforcing bars complying with BS 4449. Voids in blocks shall be filled with
concrete complying with BS 8110 as specified in the Contract Documents. Voids in blocks
shall be filled as work proceeds. Reinforcing bars shall not be inserted into green concrete.
E2.3.5 Blockwork at Openings

Voids in hollow blocks adjacent to door, window or other openings shall be filled with
concrete and reinforced as described in E2.3.4. The voids in blocks shall be filled with
concrete as work proceeds.
SP-1279 Page 86 Dec 2009

E2.3.6 Blockwork Below Ground Level

Blockwork below ground level shall be either solid blocks manufactured with sulphate
resisting cement or hollow blocks manufactured with ordinary portland cement . The hollow
blocks shall be reinforced and voids filled with concrete to BS 8110 using ordinary portland
cement unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents.
Backfill shall be brought up and compacted evenly on each side of blockwork and at no time
shall the differential infill levels exceed 300 mm.
The reinforced hollow blockwork below ground shall be protected in the same manner as for
concrete foundations .Refer SP 1275 “Specification and Criteria for Design of Civil &
Building Works.
E2.3.7 Junctions and Connections

Unless described otherwise in the Contract Documents junctions and connections shall be:
- Vertical connections between blockwork walls at changes of direction shall be fully

bonded except where a wall that is built off a ground-bearing slab, joins a wall that is
built off a ground beam or footing in which case a vertical joint shall be formed. The
joints shall be connected with butterfly wall ties complying with BS EN 845 spaced
at 400 mm centres.
- Vertical joints between load bearing and non-load bearing blockwork shall not be
bonded and a joint shall be formed as described above.
- Vertical joints between blockwork and concrete walls or columns shall be connected
with butterfly wall ties complying with BS EN 845 cast into the concrete element at
400 mm centres and subsequently cast into alternate mortar joints.
The Contractor shall submit to the Company, for approval, his intended method of forming
connections and joints between blockwork panels.
E2.3.8 Load Bearing Walls

Load bearing walls shall be constructed with load bearing blocks with a minimum crushing
strength of 10 N/mm2 or as specified in the Contract Documents.
Concrete slabs and beams designed to rest on load bearing walls shall be cast directly onto
load bearing walls. Voids in top course of blockwork shall be filled with 1:4 mortar 24 hours
prior to casting slab or beam.
E2.3.9 Non Load Bearing Walls

Non-load bearing walls shall be constructed with non-load bearing blocks with a minimum
crushing strength of 3.5 N/mm2 or as specified in the Contract Documents.
The top course shall not be laid until the overhead structure has been formed and underside of
overhead structure shall be packed with an approved flexible material.
E2.3.10 Expansion Joint Fillers

Expansion joint filler shall be preformed rigid cane fibre board product containing durable
asphalt (Flexcell or approved equivalent) or as specified in the Contract Documents. Filler
shall be cut to exact widths with all edges neatly trimmed and recessed from external faces to
accommodate the specified depth of joint sealing compound.
E2.3.11 Expansion Joints Sealing Compound

Sealing compound shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions.
Dec 2009 Page 87 SP-1279

Joint sealing compound shall be polysulphide sealant or of the type as specified in the
Contract Documents. It should be suitable for exposure to extreme and prolonged doses of
ultraviolet light and hydrocarbons without premature mechanical or chemical breakdown.
E2.3.12 Damp Proof Course

Damp proof courses shall be installed where specified in the Contract Documents and shall be
bituminous three ply felt complying with BS 6398.
E2.3.13 Builders Works

Where services are required to pass through blockwork walls the Contractor shall provide
either lintels or sleeves to prevent damage to the service.
Where vertical chases are required to be cut into hollow block walls the affected voids shall be
filled with concrete. Horizontal or diagonal chases in hollow block walls shall only be
executed after written approval by the Company.
E2.4 Finished Wall Protection

The Contractor shall ensure that the finished wall is not damaged by any subsequent
construction activities.
The Contractor shall protect new or partially built walling for a minimum period of 4 days
against rapid drying out by the sun or other adverse climatic affects by such means as
approved by the Company. Wetted Hessian sheeting and polythene sheet covering may be
adopted after approval of method statements by Company.
The Contractor shall prop and stabilise walls to resist wind or other loadings prior to erection
of overhead structures to be supported on the walls. Temporary props and supports shall not
be removed without the Company's approval.
E2.5 Termite Protection

Where specified in the Contract Documents, blockwork shall be treated with a spray solution
of Tribute (Fenvalerate) termite protection. The solution shall be mixed in strict accordance
with the manufacturers written instructions and applied at the specified rate.
Completed termite treatment shall carry a guarantee of 10 years against termites from the
Contractor to PDO.
E3.0 Appendices
ITP No: SP-1279-E-001: Concrete Blocks, Joint Fillers, Sealants, Stainless Steel Ties
Refer Chapter D for ITP on Mortars, Reinforcement and Concrete
SP-1279 Page 88 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-E-001: Concrete Blocks, Joint Fillers, Sealants, Stainless Steel Ties
Concrete Blocks Visual observation Visual CSR Each Consignment Chapter E
Verification Manufacturer’s CSR Each Consignment Clause E2.1

compliance certificate
Compressive OS 1 / 1998 Third Party Each Consignment Clause E2.3.8 and Optional at the
Strength Test Clause E 2.3.9 discretion of
CSR
Expansion Joint Fillers Verification Manufacturer ‘s CSR Nil Clause E2.3.10

Expansion Joint Sealant Verification Manufacturer’s CSR Nil Clause E2.3.11

compliance certificates
Stainless Steel Butterfly Verification Manufacturer’s CSR Nil Clause E2.3.7

wall ties compliance certificates
Dec 2009 Page 89 SP-1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Roofing
Chapter – F
Roofing Works
SP-1279 Page 90 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Roofing Version 2.0
F1. Introduction
F1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes Version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part-F ‘Civil & Building Construction
Specifications Roofing’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are the main
changes to this document.
For all HSE requirements, the User should refer the CP-122 ‘Code of Practice for Health,
Safety and Environmental Protection’ and other documents referenced therein.
F1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

F1.2.1 Construction Standards

BS EN 12056-3 : Gravity drainage systems inside buildings , roof drainage,
layout and calculation
BS5241 : Rigid polyurethane(PUR) and polyisocyanurate(PIR) foam

when dispensed or sprayed on a construction site (part
1 and 2 )
BS5427 : Code of practice for the use of profiled sheet for roof and wall
cladding on buildings
BS6100 : Glossary of building and civil engineering terms (Parts 1.3.2)
BS6229 : Code of practice for flat roofs with continuously supported

coverings
BS8217 : Code of practice for built up felt roofing
BS8218 : Code of practice for mastic asphalt roofing
CP 118 : Code of practice for the structural use of aluminium
F1.2.2 Material Standards

BS EN 197-1 : Cement, composition, specifications and conformity criteria
for common cements
BS EN 485 : Aluminium and aluminium alloys : Sheet ,strip and plate (part
1 to 4)
BS EN 1339 : Concrete paving flags. Requirements and test methods
BS EN 1340 : Concrete kerb units. Requirements and test methods.
BS EN 10143 : Continuously hot dip metal coated steel sheet and strip :
Tolerances on dimensions and shape
Dec 2009 Page 91 SP-1279

BS EN 10215 : Continuously hot dip zinc-aluminium(AZ) coated steel strip

and sheet :Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 12620 : Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS EN 13139 : Fine Aggregates for Mortars
BS EN 13164 : Extruded Polystyrene boards
BS 476 : Fire tests on building materials and structures , part 3:

External fire exposure roof test
BS 1305 : Batch type concrete mixers
BS 1449 : Steel plate, sheet and strip (part 1.1, 1.8, and 1.14)
BS 1494 : Fixing accessories for building purposes , Part 1: Fixings for

sheet, roof and wall coverings
BS 3837 : Expanded polystyrene boards (part 1)
BS 4868 : Profiled aluminium sheets for buildings
BS 4904 : External cladding colours for building purpose
F1.3 Compliance with Standards

In all cases the Company determines the adequacy of the design carried out and works
executed by the Contractor in accordance with this Specifications.
SP-1279 Page 92 Dec 2009

F2. Scope
F2.1 Materials
The Contractor shall supply and fix roofing materials from a source, approved by the
Company, known to produce roofing materials as scheduled in the Contract Documents.
Particulars relating to roofing materials shall be clearly indicated on the delivery note, invoice
or suppliers certificate supplied with each consignment and shall include:-
- The name, trade mark or other means of identification of the manufacturer.
- Size, gauge, colour.
- Statement of compliance with relevant specification.
F2.2 Profiled Roof Sheeting & Cladding

Where specified in Contract Documents, trapezoidal profiled aluminium roof sheeting and/or
cladding shall comply with BS 4868.
Corrugated Type 'S" sheeting shall not be used. Galvanised steel trapezoidal profiled
sheeting shall not be used for Company Coastal locations. Galvanised or pre-coated steel
sheets for roofing shall be avoided at any location. Steel sheets may be used in interior
locations only when Aluminium profile sheeting is not available or not suitable for the
application.
Asbestos shall not be used for any roofing material or insulation.
Colours for sheeting, where specified, shall be in accordance with BS 4904 or RAL colour
shades.
Where specified in Contract Documents, hot-dip zinc coated and aluminium zinc alloy coated
steel trapezoidal sheeting and/or cladding shall comply with BS EN 10143.
The Contractor shall supply and fix all flashings, trims, gutters, and accessories as specified in
the contract documents necessary to complete the Works, from the sheeting and/or cladding
Manufacturer, and shall be matching in colour or finish unless otherwise specified.
All roof sheeting materials shall comply with BS 476, Parts 3,4,6 and 7.
The Contractor shall supply and fix all fixings to complete the Works, i.e., hook bolts, nuts,
drive screws, washers, nuts, clips, roofing screws, sheeting clips, etc., complying with BS
1494, Part 1.
All fixings described above to complete the Works shall be obtained from the sheeting
manufacturers and shall be compatible with the roofing and/or cladding materials and purlin
system.
F2.2.1 Minimum Requirements For Sheeting
F2.2.1.1 Galvanised Steel Sheeting

Galvanised Steel sheeting shall :
- have a minimum thickness of metal of 0.5 mm.
- have a profile depth of not less than 26 mm.
Dec 2009 Page 93 SP-1279

- be polyester coated on both sides, with a minimum thickness of 25 microns on the

external face and 12.5 microns on the internal face.
- be fixed with galvanised steel bolts and nuts onto purlins.
F2.2.1.2 Aluminium Sheeting

Aluminium sheeting shall :
- have a minimum thickness of metal of 0.7 mm.
- have a profile depth of not less than 26 mm.
- be painted with a protective coating on the external face, with a minimum thickness
of 25 microns.
- be painted or lacquered with a protective coating on the internal face, with a

minimum thickness of 5 microns.
- be fixed with stainless steel self tapping screws and insulated from the purlins with
PVC barrier tape.
F2.2.2 Storage & Handling

The Contractor should store roof sheeting and/or cladding under cover in their original
packing and in a dry, well-ventilated position, approved by the Company.
The Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer's written instructions for unloading,
storage and handling of all roofing materials.
While handling individual sheets, the Contractor shall take care not to damage edges, corners
or surfaces. Any sheets so damaged shall be removed from the Worksite and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
F2.2.3 Installation
Before commencement of sheeting and/or cladding work the Contractor shall ensure that all
materials required to complete the works are available on the Worksite. Prior to fixing the
Contractor shall ensure that all supporting works, i.e. steelwork, purlins, etc., are plumb and
square and that no protrusions are present that could damage the sheets.
The Contractor shall install roof sheeting and/or cladding in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and BS 5427.
The Contractor shall only cut sheets using a power driven saw or by a steel hacksaw with fine
teeth. Any sheets with deformed profiles due to cutting operation or other shall be removed
from the Worksite and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
All holes for fixings and the like shall be drilled to the size recommended by the sheeting
Manufacturer. All drill cuttings shall be swept away from the hole to avoid localised
superficial corrosion. All areas that have been cut or drilled shall be coated, sealed and
protected.
Care shall be taken to ensure that fixings are not over tightened so as to avoid any damage to
fixings or sheetings.
For both roofing and cladding, sheets should be laid from the end of a building away from the
direction of the prevailing wind, (i.e., direction of laying is into the wind) so that exposed side
laps face away from the prevailing wind.
SP-1279 Page 94 Dec 2009

Single side laps shall be sealed with an approved ribbon sealant and fastened at not more than
300 mm centres. All fasteners shall be sealed with a mastic approved by the Company.
End lapping shall be avoided.
The Contractor shall ensure that frequent checks are performed to ensure that the Work does
not run off square as sheeting progresses and that successive strakes of sheets are correctly
aligned with each other. Fixing should be applied sparingly until it has been established that
the sheet is correctly positioned. Care shall be taken not to leave sheets partially fixed for any
period of time in which high winds might occur.
F2.2.4 Flute Filler Blocks

The Contractor shall fill all cavities formed between sheeting profiles and flashings unless
otherwise specified in the Contract Documents with flute filler blocks supplied by the sheeting
Manufacturer.
F2.2.5 Contact Between Aluminium Sheeting & Other Building Materials

The Contractor shall ensure that direct contact of aluminium sheeting with copper or copper
alloys such as bronze, brass, or gunmetal shall not occur. Care shall be taken to ensure that
run-off water from copper or its alloys shall not fall on aluminium. Copper, brass or bronze
fasteners shall not be used.
The Contractor shall ensure that any iron or steel in contact with aluminium sheeting is
painted with two coats of bituminous, red oxide or zinc chromate paint.
If stainless steel fasteners are used for fixing aluminium sheeting, the Contractor shall ensure
that isolating (e.g., incorporating neoprene) washers, preventing direct contact between the
two metals are used.
The Contractor shall ensure that any aluminium sheeting embedded in concrete is treated with
one coat of bituminous paint.
The Contractor shall ensure that any timber in contact with aluminium sheeting is painted with
two coats aluminium paint on the timber.
F2.2.6 Insulation
Where specified in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall install insulation material to
the specified thicknesses and U-values to the underside of sheeting in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. All joints shall be lapped a minimum of 150 mm.
Where aluminium-faced insulation is specified, the Contractor shall install the insulation to the
specified thicknesses and u values in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
All joints shall be lapped a minimum of 150 mm and sealed with a vapour-impervious
adhesive tape, approved by the Company.
Any damaged insulation shall be removed from the Worksite and replaced at the Contractor's
expense.
F2.2.7 Composite Sheeting

Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall install composite sheeting
(i.e., incorporating factory-applied bonded insulation) in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions.
Transverse joints in insulation shall be positioned immediately behind purlins or sheeting rails.
Longitudinal joints in insulation shall be sealed with jointing strip supplied by the sheeting
manufacturer.
Dec 2009 Page 95 SP-1279

The Contractor shall ensure that fasteners are not over tightened so as not to compress or
damage insulation. Stand-off fasteners supplied by the sheeting manufacturer shall be used to
fix composite panels.
F2.2.8 Cleaning
On completion of each day's work the Contractor shall clean all debris such as swarf, nails,
screws, etc., from the sheeting and guttering. All cement mortar droppings and paint drips
shall be removed immediately from any sheeting.
F2.3 Flat Roofs

The Contractor shall execute flat roof Works in accordance with BS 6229.
F2.3.1 Deck
Where specified as a concrete deck in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall construct
the deck in accordance with Chapter D.
Where specified as a timber deck in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall construct
the deck in accordance with Chapter J.
F2.3.2 Screed & Angle Fillets

Sand, cement and water required for screed and angle fillets including mixing, shall comply
with the requirements of Chapter D .
Materials for screed shall be mixed on the Worksite in a batch mixer of approved size and
design complying with BS 1305 or similar approved, producing a uniform distribution of
materials with mass of uniform colour and consistency.
The screeds shall be formulated of one part OPC (complying with BS EN 197-1-2000), to two
parts of sand (complying with BS EN 13139) to four parts aggregate, 14 mm maximum size
complying with BS EN 12620.
The proportion of materials for angle fillets shall be one part OPC (complying with BS EN
197-1-2000), to three parts sand (complying with BS EN 13139).
The concrete deck to receive screed shall be well brushed to remove laitance. Before laying
screeds the surface of the concrete shall be free from surface dust and dampened with clean
water.
The Contractor shall not proceed with laying screed or angle fillets until the existing concrete
deck surface has been approved by the Company.
The Contractor shall lay screeds to the specified thickness and/or falls as shown in the
Contract Documents and in alternate bays not exceeding 11 m2. Stop-ends shall be vertical
and positioned to coincide with construction joints in the concrete deck. Screed and angle
fillets shall not pass over roof expansion joints in the concrete deck.
Expansion joints shall comprise impregnated fibre joint filler board to the specified width.
Screed and angle fillets shall be finished smooth and even with a wood float finish. Where
specified, a steel trowel shall be applied lightly to present an even dense surface without
laitance occurring. The entire surface shall be protected from premature drying and rapid
temperature change by covering with sand or Hessian or polythene sheeting, and kept
continuously damp for a minimum period of 4 days. Care shall be taken to ensure that any
sheeting is securely fixed during this period to prevent wind blowing under the covering.
SP-1279 Page 96 Dec 2009

F2.3.3 Waterproofing Systems

The Waterproofing System and associated Works, as specified in the Contract Documents,
shall be laid in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
Works associated with waterproofing systems shall include, but not limited to:-
- Primers.
- Vapour Barriers.
- Insulation.
- Flashings.
- Ventilation and Breather Vents.
Waterproofing systems and associated Works should be laid by a specialist nominated

subcontractor, experienced in laying the specified waterproofing system.
Where specified in the Contract Documents, built-up bitumen felt shall be laid in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions and BS 8217.
Where specified in the Contract Documents, mastic asphalt shall be laid in accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions and BS 8218.
F2.3.4 Aluminium Flashings

Where specified in the Contract Documents, aluminium flashings shall be fixed to the
specified sizes, using commercial purity and half hard aluminium flashings. Materials for
flashings shall conform to BS EN 485.
Aluminium flashings shall not be fixed in contact with lime or any corrosive agent.
All aluminium flashings in contact with concrete, blockwork or render shall be painted with
one coat of bitumen paint on the contact surface.
F2.3.5 Loose-Laid Insulation

Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall lay high density, sealed
surface preformed extruded polystyrene insulation to the specified thickness and U-values.
Extruded polystyrene insulation shall be loose laid with staggered joints and edges butted
together.
The Contractor shall protect extruded polystyrene insulation from wind uplift and ultraviolet
degradation prior to laying of the protective tiles or gravel. The Contractor shall take care that
the expanded polystyrene is not damaged by foot traffic, tools, etc. Any damaged panels shall
be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
F2.3.6 Foam-Sprayed Insulation

Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall apply rigid polyurethane
foam spray in accordance with BS 5241.
The Contractor shall take care that the sprayed polyurethane foam is not damaged by foot
traffic, tools, etc. Any damaged area shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
F2.3.7 Protection
Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall lay solar reflective sheets in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
Dec 2009 Page 97 SP-1279

Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall lay precast concrete slabs to
sizes specified on the drawings complying with BS EN 1339. Concrete slabs shall be of a
light colour.
Where specified in the Contract Documents, as stone ballast protection the Contractor shall lay
20 mm diameter washed wadi gravel, free from all sharp stones and any deleterious matter to
the specified thickness.
F2.3.8 Sampling & Testing

The Contractor shall test all flat roofs by damming all water-outlets and flooding the entire
surface with water to a minimum depth of 75 mm for a period of not less than 24 hours. Any
leaks found shall be made good by the Contractor to the approval of the Company at the
Testing shall be conducted prior to laying any protection system. Test sheets shall be provided
and signed by Company site representative.
F2.4 Inspection Test Plans (ITP)

ITP shall cover as a minimum the following:
- Aggregates (Coarse, Fine & Combined)
- Water
- Concrete
- Completed Concrete Works
- Galvanised steel sheeting / Aluminium sheeting
Refer ITPs covered in Chapter D for the four items listed from top. Requirements of the
Inspection Test Plan for the last one item is given in Appendix. Additional Testing
requirements shall be advised by the Company Site Representative whenever is required
SP-1279 Page 98 Dec 2009

F3. Appendix
ITP No: SP-1279-F-001: Galvanised steel sheeting / Aluminium sheeting
Dec 2009 Page 99 SP-1279

ITP No: SP-1279-F-001: Galvanised steel sheeting / Aluminium sheeting
Galvanised steel sheeting Visual observation Visual CSR Each Consignment BS 4868
, Aluminium sheeting for damage, colour
Verification Manufacturer’s CSR Each Consignment Clause F2.1

with relevant
specifications
Size and gauge Field measurement Contractor or Each Consignment Design drawings
Third Party
Galvanised steel Visual observation and CSR Each Consignment BS 1494

bolts and nuts , manufacturers
stainless steel compliance certificate
screws
SP-1279 Page 100 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Structural Steel Works Version 2.0
Chapter – G
Structural Steel Works
Dec 2009 Page 101 SP-1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Structural Steel Works
G1.0 Introduction
G1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes Version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part-G. ‘Civil and Building
Construction Specifications –Structural steel work’. Other than the conversion or
formatting, the following are the main changes to this document.
G1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

G1.2.1 Construction Standards

G1.2.1.1 PDO Standards
SP 2047 : Preparation and content of engineering
drawings
PR-1272 : Standard welding procedure qualification

records for on plot piping
CP 189 : Lifting and Hoisting Code of Practice
G1.2.1.2 SIEP / Shell GSI Standards

DEP 34.28.00.31 : Steel structures
DEP 30.10.60.18 : Welding of metals
DEP.34.19.20.11 Fire Proofing of steel structures

:
G1.2.1.3 International Standards

ASNT-SNT-TC- : Recommended practice –Personnel qualification and
1A certification in Non-destructive testing
AWS QC-1 : American welding society document
AWS D.1.1 : American welding society –Structural welding codes
BS EN 1011-1 : Recommendation for welding of metallic materials –General

guidance for arc welding
BS EN 1011-2 : Recommendation for welding of metallic materials –Arc

welding of ferritic steel
BS EN 1993-1 : Euro code 3. Design of Steel Structures
SP-1279 Page 102 Dec 2009

BS EN 10219-2 : Cold formed welded structural sections of non alloy and fine
grain steels-Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
BS 2853 : Design and testing of steel overhead runway beams
BS 4604 : The use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steel
works
BS 5531 : Code of practice for safety in erecting structural frames
CSWIP-W1-6 : Welding institute document
G1.2.2 Material Standards

BS EN 499 : Welding consumables, covered electrodes for manual metal
arc welding of non alloy and fine grain steels classification
BS EN 10025 : Hot rolled products of non alloy structural steels-

Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10029 : Specifications for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass

for hot rolled steel plates 3mm thick or above
BS EN 10056-1 : Specification for structural steel equal and unequal angles-

Dimensions
BS EN 10067 : Hot rolled bulb flat - Dimensions and tolerances on shape,

dimensions and mass
BS EN 10113 : Hot rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steel (part
1 to 3)
BS EN 10155 : Structural steel with improved atmospheric corrosion

resistance
BS EN 10204 : Metallic products – Types of inspection document
BS EN 10210 : Hot finished structural hollow sections of non alloy and fine
grained structural steel (part 1 and 2)
grain steels- Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
BS EN 14399 : High strength structural bolting for preloading
BS 4 : Structural steel sections
BS 638 : Arc welding power sources, equipment and accessories (part 4,

5, 7 and 9)
BS 3410 : Metal washers for general engineering purposes
BS 3692 : ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4190 : ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4320 : Metal washers for general engineering purposes (metric series)
Dec 2009 Page 103 SP-1279

BS 4933 : ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws
with hexagon nuts
BS 7668 : Specification for weldable structural steels – Hot finished

structural hollow sections in weather resistant steel
G1.3 Compliance with Standards

Any deviations from this part of Specifications shall be subject to Company approval and
shall be advised in writing to the Custodian.
In all cases the Company determine the adequacy of the design carried out and works
executed by the Contractor in accordance with these Specifications.
SP-1279 Page 104 Dec 2009

G2.0 Scope
G2.1 Materials
The Contractor shall supply and fix all materials for structural steelwork from a source,
approved by the Company, known to produce materials complying with this Specification,
and as specified in the Contract Documents.
Particulars relating to materials and structural steelwork fabricated in accordance with this
Specification shall be clearly indicated on the delivery note, invoice or Suppliers certificate
with each consignment and shall include :
- The name, trademark or other means of identification of manufacturer.
- The manufacturer's mill certificate, giving chemical analysis and strength

characteristics of the steel, which can be identified to the supplied items.
- Type of material.
- Compliance with specification specified in the Contract Documents.
G2.1.1 Steelwork
Materials for weldable structural steel shall comply with BS EN 10025, BS EN 10113 and
BS EN 10155 as applicable and as specified in contract document.
Hot finished structural hollow sections shall comply with BS EN 10210 and BS 7668.
Dimensions of hot rolled steel sections and flats shall conform to BS 4, BS EN 10056-1 and
BS EN 10067-1 as applicable. Section sizes and dimensions conforming to other national
standards may be used as specified in contract document.
Cold formed welded structural sections shall comply with BS EN 10219-2.
G2.1.2 Ordinary & High Strength Bolts

Ordinary bolts and high strength bolts shall comply with BS 3692 or BS 4190 for hexagonal
head bolts, or BS 4933 for countersunk or cup head bolts. Nuts shall have a strength grade
equal or greater than the grade of the bolt (or other threaded element) with which they are
used. Plain and tapered washers shall comply with BS 3410 or BS 4320, as appropriate.
G2.1.3 High Strength Friction Grip Bolts

High strength friction grip bolts, if specified, shall comply with BS EN 14399. Nuts shall
have a strength grade equal or greater than the grade of bolt ( or other threaded element)
with which they are used.
The use of high strength friction grip bolts shall comply with BS 4604 Part 1.
G2.2 Testing
The welding examination, inspection and testing are responsibility of the Contractor unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
G2.2.1 Welding Inspection Personnel

Welding Inspection Personnel shall, as a minimum, hold one of the following qualifications,
or equivalent as decided by the Company.
- CSWIP Phase 6 Welding Inspector as specified in Welding Institute Document

SWIP-WI-6, latest edition.
Dec 2009 Page 105 SP-1279

- AWS Certified Welding Inspector as specified in American Welding Society

document QC-1, latest edition.
G2.2.2 Non-Destructive Examination Personnel

Non-Destructive Examination Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum level of ASNT
Level II as specified in ASNT Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A, latest edition, or
equivalent as decided by the Company.
G2.2.3 Requirements
The Contractor shall prepare a non-destructive testing requirements form in accordance with
the Contract and design requirements. This form shall specify the types and extent of non-
destructive testing to be performed and the procedure to be followed. This form shall be
referred in the Quality Control Plan specified in the Contract Quality Assurance schedule or
specification.
The method and extent of inspection and testing in the absence of a relevant application
standard shall be agreed between the Contracting parties.
The acceptance criteria for assessing the quality of welds shall be as specified in the design
code or design specification, or drawing or Contract, as applicable.
The acceptance criteria for welded joints in the absence of a relevant application standard
shall be agreed between the Contracting parties. The following may be used as basis for
discussion and agreement:
- AWS D1.1 para 8.15 for non tubular structures.
- AWS D1.1 para 10.17 for tubular structures.
It shall be noted that in addition to the testing described above the Company may require
further testing of weldments or of any materials used to be carried out by an independent
tester, either in his Workshop or on the Worksite.
The Company may select samples from any stage of the Work for the purpose of chemical
analysis, for impact tests or for any other testing that the Company may require. Samples
taken for the purposes of testing and for welding back the appropriate equivalent material
shall be at the Contractor's expense, but not cost of tests conducted by an independent tester.
G2.3 Fabrication
G2.3.1 Drawings
The Company shall supply the Contractor key plans, sections and elevations showing the
centre lines and/or member sizes and arrangement of all steelwork. Details of some major
connections may also be supplied for guidance.
On receipt of these drawings the Contractor shall examine them and immediately report any
discrepancies to the Company for a decision before proceeding with the workshop drawings
and fabrication Work.
All workshop drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Company,
in duplicate, allowing reasonable time for the Company to approve the drawings.
Fabrication shall not commence until the Workshop Drawings have been approved by The
Company. The Company shall be supplied with two sets of final workshop drawings.
For requirements for the preparation of drawings refer to SP 2047.
SP-1279 Page 106 Dec 2009

G2.3.2 Dimensions
The Contractor shall make his own survey of the Worksite and shall be responsible for
obtaining all dimensions and levels necessary for the fabrication of the steelwork.
The Contractor shall be responsible for every item being fabricated to the correct form and
size notwithstanding any approval by the Company of the Contractor's Workshop drawings.
The Contractor shall carry out Quality Control reports of every fabrication, indicating both
correct form and size of each member.
G2.3.3 Steel Quality Control

All steel sections and fasteners obtained from supplier shall be accompanied by Test reports
or inspection document from the manufacturer as per clause 2.2 of BS EN 10204. The
products shall be suitably identified or marked in order to ensure the traceability between
the product and the inspection documentation. The identification or marking shall be in
accordance with clause 9 of BS EN 10025 for hot rolled products and clause 10 of BS EN
10021 for other steel products.
G2.3.4 Inspection
The Contractor shall inform the Company of the date on which fabrication will commence,
shall keep the Company informed of the fabrication programme and shall permit the
Company full access to the Workshop during working hours, for the purpose of inspecting
the steelwork at any stage in its fabrication. Any material not complying with this
Specification or the Contract Documents shall, upon inspection, whether at the Workshop,
the Worksite, or erected in position, be rejected and it shall be made good or replaced to the
approval of the Company at the Contractors expense.
G2.4 Welding
Welding shall be by the metallic arc process, using electrodes complying with the
requirements of BS EN 499 using equipment, plant and accessories complying with BS
638. The whole of the Works shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 1011.
All operatives employed to perform welding operations in the Works shall be proved to be
competent welders to the approval of the Company, either at the option of the Company, by
the production of appropriate trade certificates or by the performance of welding tests.
Prior to commencement of welding the Contractor shall submit welding procedure

specification for approval. Welding shall not commence until approval has been given by
the Company When approved, the selected welding procedure specification shall be
stamped "Approved for Fabrication" and shall incorporate the Contract No. for which the
procedure is intended.
The welding procedure shall be valid for the specified Contract only and shall not be
transferable.
Any steelwork to be welded at site shall be cleaned back to bare metal in the area to be
affected by the weld, to the approval of the Company, and subsequently repainted in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
Before fabrication commences the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Company full
details of the proposed welding procedures which the Contractor proposes to adopt for the
type of welding in the Works.
G2.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling

Fabricated parts shall be handled and stored so that permanent damage to components shall
not occur. The Contractor shall provide means to minimise damage to protective treatment
on steelwork, and any damage shall be made good at the Contractors expense.
Dec 2009 Page 107 SP-1279

All steelwork shall be protected from damage in transit. Particular care shall be taken to
stiffen free ends to prevent permanent distortion and adequately protect surfaces. All bolts,
nuts, washers, screws, small loose plates and small articles, shall be suitably packed and
identified.
In addition, when steelwork is to be transported by sea, special care should be taken to

protect all Works from damage, contamination and corrosion during transit. The Contractor
shall submit his proposals for protection, handling and storage of steelwork for shipping to
the Company for approval prior to despatch.
G2.6 Erection
The Contractor's proposed erection sequence and procedure shall be submitted to the
Company for approval prior to the erection of any steelwork.
Throughout erection of the structure, steelwork shall be securely bolted or fastened in order
to ensure that it can adequately withstand all loadings liable to be encountered during
erection, including, where necessary, those from erection plant and its operation. Any
temporary bracing shall be left in position until erection is sufficiently advanced to allow for
its safe removal.
All connections for temporary bracing, bolts, members, and the like, shall be provided for
erection purposes shall be made so as not to weaken the permanent structure impair
serviceability.
Details of weight and location of any lifting, erection or other machinery shall be submitted
to the Company for approval prior to such machinery being brought on to the Worksite.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the stability of the structure during erection,
and shall arrange that sufficient tack bolts are used to ensure that the Work will remain rigid
until final bolting is completed.
The Contractor shall supply and fix, without extra charge, any temporary bracing that may
be necessary. Final bolting shall follow on as soon as possible in order to keep the amount
of tack-bolted work to a minimum.
G2.7 Workmanship
Notwithstanding any other clause contained in this Specification, the standard of materials
and workmanship shall be in no way inferior to the recommendations contained in BS EN
1993.
Except as noted below, abutting surfaces depending on contact for the transmission of
compressive loads or forces, shall be machined (together with gussets where present already
welded on) so that the whole area of the abutting surfaces is in direct contact. Faces to be
grouted to a concrete foundation need not be dressed.
Caps, bases and end plates shall be fixed to the member concerned prior to erection. Unless
indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, such caps, bases and end plates shall be
truly at right angles to the member axis.
The ends of all beams shall be accurately cold sawn. End cleats shall not project more than
2.0 mm beyond the end of the beam.
Welding procedures shall be arranged to avoid distortion of the completed member. Work
that is deformed by shrinkage after welding shall be rejected and shall be made good at the
Sheared edges of gussets or other members shall be straightened and dressed where
necessary.
SP-1279 Page 108 Dec 2009

Shop connections shall be either welded or bolted, unless indicated otherwise in the
Contract Documents.
Worksite connections shall be bolted or welded, as, indicated in the Contract Documents.
All holes shall be drilled to template through all thicknesses in one operation, where
possible, and all burrs removed. The diameter of the holes shall comply with BS 5950 : Part
2 Section 3.4.
All bolt shanks shall be solid with heads and lengths sufficient to allow not less than two
clear threads projection beyond the nuts after tightening. The length of the unscrewed
shank or barrel shall be at least equal to the thickness of the members to be connected.
Washers shall be provided under all nuts. On bevelled surfaces, square taper washers of 5
mm mean thickness shall be used under nuts or heads, as appropriate.
G2.8 Composite Flooring

When specified in the Contract Documents composite flooring shall comply with the
requirements of BS 5950, Part 4.
Any damaged surface of profiled steel sheets used in the construction of composite flooring
due to welding, cutting, etc, shall be made good in accordance with the manufacturers
written instructions prior to pouring concrete.
G2.9 Runway Beams

Before any runway beam is taken into use for the first time after erection, re-erection or
having undergone any substantial alteration or repair, a certificate that the runway has been
tested and subsequently thoroughly examined as required by Clause 8 of BS 2853 shall be
produced for approval by the Company. The certificate shall identify the runway beam to
which it refers, quoting its distinguishing number or mark and grades of steel, its size and
length, and state :
(1) The date on which the proof load was applied.
(2) The position and magnitude of the deflection obtained during the traversing of the
maximum safe working load and of the proof load as required by Clause 8 of BS 2853.
(3) The maximum safe working load.
That the runway beam complies in all respects with BS 2853, with a signature of the person
making the test/examination.
The certificate shall also indicate clearly that it applies to the runway beam only and not to
any trolley or lifting appliances travelling thereon.
For formal registration ,the Company shall be advised and copied all documentation
concerning runway beams.
G2.10 Fire proofing of steel structures

Reference is made to DEP 34.19.20.11 –GEN for the requirements and methods of fire
proofing of steel structures.
G3.0 Appendix
ITP No: SP-1279-G-001: Structural steel work
Dec 2009 Page 109 SP-1279

ITP No: SP-1279-G-001: Structural steel work
Rolled steel sections, Visual observation Observation for CSR Samples from Each This specification
fasteners following Consignment
• Corrosion, pitting
& damage
• Straightness of
sections
Verification Non specific inspection Manufacturer Each Consignment This specification

test report Type 2.2
from manufacturer as
per BS EN 10204
Fillet welds and , Butt Verification Test reports of Non- Contractor’s Arbitrary samples or Clause G2.2.3
welds for structural steel destructive testing as Welding location as dictated
work proposed in the Inspector (see by CSR
Contract Quality Plan Cl G2.2.1 and
from the Contractor G2.2.2)
Fabricated and erected Visual observation Linear and angular Contractor All structures This specification and
items and dimensional measurements tolerances as specified
checks in contract drawings
and specifications
SP-1279 Page 110 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Metal works Version 2.0
Chapter – H
Metal Works
Dec 2009 Page 111 SP-1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Metal works
H1.0 Introduction
H1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part-H ‘Civil & Building
Construction Specifications –Metal Works’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the
following are the main changes to this document.
H1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

H1.2.1 Construction Standards

H1.2.1.1 PDO Standards
SP 2047 : Specification for Preparation and content of engineering
drawings
PR-1272 : Standard welding procedure qualification records for on plot

piping
H1.2.1.2 SIPM Standards

S-28011 : General arrangement of cage ladder to columns, steel stacks and
steel structures
S-28012 : Typical details of sliding / fixed connections for ladders
H1.2.1.3 International Standards

BS 4479 : Recommendations for the design of metal articles that are to
be coated
BS 6100 : Glossary of building and civil engineering terms
BS 7773 : Code of practice for cleaning and preparation of metal surface
CP 118 : Structural use of aluminium
H1.2.2 Material Standards

BS EN 499 : Welding consumables, covered electrodes for manual metal
arc welding of non alloy and fine grain steels classification
BS EN 515 : Aluminium and aluminium alloys wrought products –Temper

designation
BS EN 573 : Aluminium and aluminium alloys, chemical composition and

form of wrought products (part 3 & 4)
SP-1279 Page 112 Dec 2009

BS EN 755 : Aluminium and aluminium alloys, extruded rod/bar, tube and

profiles
BS EN 1011 : Welding recommendations for welding of metallic materials

(part 1 to 3)
BS EN 10025 : Hot rolled products of non alloy structural steels- Technical

delivery conditions
BS EN 10029 : Specifications for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass

for hot rolled steel plates 3mm thick or above
BS EN 10056-1 : Specification for structural steel equal and unequal angles-

Dimensions
BS EN 10067 : Hot rolled bulb flat - Dimensions and tolerances on shape,

dimensions and mass
BS EN 10113 : Hot rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steel (part
1 to 3)
BS EN 10155 : Structural steel with improved atmospheric corrosion

resistance
BS EN 10204 : Metallic products –Types of inspection document
BS EN 10210 : Hot finished structural hollow sections of non alloy and fine
grained structural steel (part 1 and 2)
grain steels- Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
BS EN 12020 : Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles

in alloys ENAW-6060 and ENAW-6063 (part 1 &2)
BS EN 60974 : Arc welding Equipment
BS 4 : Structural steel sections
BS 405 : Specification for uncoated expanded metal carbon steel sheets

for general purposes
BS 1161 : Aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes
BS 3410 : Metal washers for general engineering purposes
BS 3692 : ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 3987 : Anodic oxidation coatings on wrought aluminium for external

architectural applications
BS 4190 : ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4211 : Ladders for permanent access to chimneys, other high

structures, silos and bins
BS 4320 : Metal washers for general engineering purposes (metric

series)
Dec 2009 Page 113 SP-1279

BS 4592 : Industrial Type flooring, walkways and stair treads
BS 4620 : Rivets for general engineering purposes
BS 4873 : Aluminium alloy windows
BS 4933 : ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws
with hexagon nuts
BS 6510 : Steel windows, sills, window boards and doors
BS 6722 : Recommendations for dimensions of metallic materials
BS 7668 : Specification for weldable structural steels – Hot finished

structural hollow sections in weather resistant steel
H1.3 Compliance with Standards

SP-1279 Page 114 Dec 2009

H2.0 Scope
H2.1 Fabrication
H2.1.1 Drawings
The Company shall supply the Contractor key plans, sections and elevations showing the
member sizes and arrangement of all metalwork. Details of some major connections may
also be supplied for guidance. The Contractor shall examine the drawings and immediately
report any discrepancies to the Company before proceeding with Workshop drawings and
fabrication Work.
All Workshop drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Company,
in duplicate, allowing reasonable time for the Company to approve the drawings.
Fabrication shall not commence until the Company has approved the Workshop drawings.
The Company shall be supplied with two sets of final workshop drawings.
For requirements for the preparation of drawings refer to SP 2047.
H2.1.2 Dimensions
The Contractor shall survey the Worksite and shall be responsible for obtaining all
dimensions necessary for the fabrication of the metalwork.
The Contractor shall be responsible for every item being fabricated to the correct form and
size notwithstanding any approval of the Contractor's Workshop drawings.
The Contractor shall carry out Quality Control reports of every fabrication, indicating
correct form, size and material.
H2.1.3 Inspection
The Contractor shall inform the Company of the date on which fabrication will commence,
shall keep the Company informed of the fabrication programme and shall permit the
Company full access to the Workshop during working hours, for the purpose of inspecting
the metalwork at any stage in its fabrication. Any material not complying with this
Specification or the Contract Documents shall, upon inspection, whether at the Workshop,
the Worksite, or erected in position, be rejected and it shall be made good or replaced to the
approval of the Company at the Contractor's expense.
H2.2 Welding
H2.2.1 General
Welding shall be by the metallic arc process, using electrodes complying with BS EN 499
and using equipment, plant and accessories complying with BS 638. The whole of the
Works shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 1011.
All welders shall be proved competent to the Company either, at the option of the
Company, by the production of appropriate trade certificates or by the performance of
welding tests.
Prior to commencement of welding the Contractor shall submit welding procedure

specification for approval. . Welding shall not start before Company approval.
When approved, the selected welding procedure specification shall be stamped "Approved
for Fabrication" and shall incorporate the relevant Contract Number. The welding
procedure shall be valid for the specified Contract only and shall not be transferable.
Dec 2009 Page 115 SP-1279

Metalwork to be Worksite welded shall be cleaned back to bare metal in the area to be
affected by the weld, to the approval of the Company, and subsequently repainted in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
Before fabrication commences the Contractor shall submit, in writing to the Company, full
details of the proposed welding procedures, which the Contractor proposes to adopt for the
type of welding in the Works.
H2.2.2 Stainless Steel

Where specified in the Contract Documents stainless steel to be welded shall be by using
double butt welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds and any other measured
deemed necessary to prevent distortion.
Welding of stainless steel shall be by TIG welding as per BS EN 1011 part-3.
H2.3 Delivery, Storage & Handling

Fabricated parts shall be handled and stored to prevent permanent damage. The Contractor
shall minimise damage to metalwork, and any damage shall be made good at the
Contractors expense.
All metalwork shall be protected from damage in transit. Particular care shall be taken to
stiffen free ends to prevent permanent distortion and adequately protect surfaces. All bolts,
nuts, washers, screws and small, loose articles shall be suitably packed and identified.
H2.4 Testing
The Company may select samples from any stage of the Work for the purpose of chemical
analysis, for impact tests or for any other testing that the Company may require. Samples
taken for the purposes of testing and for welding back the appropriate equivalent material
shall be at the Contractors expense, but not cost of tests conducted by an independent tester.
H2.5 Construction
H2.5.1 Materials Generally
The Contractor shall supply and fix all materials for metalwork from a source, approved by
the Company, known to produce materials complying with this Specification, and as
specified in the Contract Documents.
Particulars of materials and metalwork fabricated in accordance with this Specification

shall be clearly indicated on the delivery note, invoice or Suppliers certificate with each
consignment and shall include:
- The name, trademark or other means of identification of manufacturer.
- Type of material.
- Compliance with relevant specification.
H2.5.2 Bolted Connections

Bolted connections using ordinary bolts shall comply with BS 3692 or BS 4190 for
hexagonal head bolts, or BS 4933 for counter sunk or cup head bolts. Nuts shall have
strength equal to or greater than the grade of the bolt (or other threaded element) with
which they are used. Plain and tapered washers shall comply with BS 3410 or BS 4320, as
appropriate.
H2.5.3 Riveted Connections

Riveted connections shall comply with BS 4620.
SP-1279 Page 116 Dec 2009

H2.5.4 Ductwork
Where described in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply and install
ductwork in accordance with SP-1285, 'Building Services Construction Specifications', Part
B 'Air-conditioning Installation'.
H2.5.5 Structural Aluminium

Where described in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply structural
aluminium in accordance with BS 1161 and erect in accordance with BSCP 118.
H2.5.6 Aluminium Doors & Windows

Where described in the contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply and install
aluminium framed sliding glass doors in accordance with BS 5286 and the manufacturers
Where described in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply and install
aluminium windows in accordance with BS 4873 and the manufacturers written
instructions.
Aluminium for doors and windows shall be formed of extruded tempered sections satin
anodised to BS. 3987 for external application 25 microns thickness. Aluminium alloy
extruded profiles shall conform to BS EN 755. All visible anodised surfaces shall be
protected by low tack tape or lacquer before delivery to the Worksite. All aluminium
frames shall have a finish as specified in the Contract Documents.
The backs of all aluminium frames shall be painted with two coats of bituminous paint
before fixing into the Works.
All joints shall be tightly fitted and executed in an inconspicuous manner with hairline
joints.
All protective tape shall be removed on completion of the Works and exposed surfaces left
clear to the approval of the Company.
The Contractor shall ease and adjust all aluminium doors and windows to the Company's
approval.
H2.5.7 Steel Doors & Windows

Where described in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply and install steel
doors, windows and frames in accordance with BS 6510 and the manufacturers written
instructions.
The Contractor shall ease and adjust all steel, doors and windows to the Company's
approval.
H2.5.8 Metal Floors & Stair Treads

Where described in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply and install metal
floors and stair treads in accordance with BS 4592.
H2.5.9 Steel Ladders For Permanent Access

Where described in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply and install steel
ladders for permanent access in accordance with BS 4211 and SIPM Standard Drawings S-
28011 and S-28012.
Dec 2009 Page 117 SP-1279

H2.5.10 Protective Coatings

The Contractor shall apply protective coatings to metalwork as described in the Contract
Documents. For protective coatings including painting or galvanising refer Part N of these
Specifications.
H3.0 Appendix
ITP No: SP-1279-H-001: Metal Works
SP-1279 Page 118 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-H-001: Metal works
Metal sheets (All Visual observation Observation for CSR Samples from Each Chapter H
metallic product following Consignment
inclusive Aluminium),
Fasteners • Corrosion, pitting
& damage
• Straightness of
sections
Verification Certificate of Manufacturer Each Consignment Chapter H

Compliance as Non
specific inspection test
report Type 2.1 from
manufacturer as per BS
EN 10204
Doors, Windows Verification Manufacturer’s CSR Each Consignment 5 years guarantee

Warranties Certificate or item
Fabricated and erected Visual observation Linear and angular Contractor All structures Chapter H and
items and dimensional measurements tolerances as specified
checks in contract drawings
and specifications
Dec 2009 Page 119 SP-1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Carpentry and Joinery
Chapter – J
Carpentry and Joinery Works
SP-1279 Page 120 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Carpentry and Joinery Version 2.0
J1.0 Introduction
J1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes Version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part-J.‘Civil & Building Construction
Specifications -Carpentry and Joinery’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the
J1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

J1.2.1 Construction Standards

BS EN 1026/ : Methods of Testing Windows.
1027
BS EN 1294 : Door leaves. Determination of the Behaviour under humidity
BS 144 : Specification for Coal Tar Creosotes for preservation of timber
BS 373 : Methods of Testing Small Clear Specimens of Timber.
BS 1282 : Guide to the Choice, Use and Application of Wood

Preservatives.
BS 1297 : Tongue & Grooved Softwood Flooring.
BS 1567 : Wood Door Frames and Linings.
BS 4072 : Copper/Chromium/Arsenic preparation for Wood preservation
BS 4261 : Wood Preservation. Vocabulary
BS 5268 : Structural Use of Timber.
BS 5277 : Doors - Measurement of Defects of General Flatness of Door

Leaves
BS 5278 : Doors - Measurement of Dimensions & of Defects of

Squareness of Door Leaves
BS 5707 : Preparation of Wood Preservatives in Organic Solvents.
BS 6100 : Glossary of Building & Civil Engineering Terms.
BS 6375 : Performance of Windows and Doors.
BS 8201 : Code of practice for Flooring of Timber , Timber Products and

Wood based Panel Products .
Dec 2009 Page 121 SP-1279

BS 9999 : Code of practice for Fire Safety in the design, management and
use of buildings
CP 151 : Doors & Windows including Frames & Linings.-Wooden doors
CP 153 : Windows & Roof lights.
J1.2.2 Material Standards

BS EN 212 : Wood Preservatives. General guidance on Sampling.
BS EN 301 : Adhesives, Phenolic and Aminoplastic for Load Bearing Timber

Structure
BS EN 312 : Particleboards. Specifications

(part 1 to 7):
BS EN 316 : Wood fibreboards. Definition, classification and symbols
BS EN 385 : Finger jointed structural timber. Performance requirements and

minimum production requirements
BS EN 386 : Glued laminated timber. Performance requirements and

minimum production requirements
BS EN 391 : Glued laminated timber. Delamination test of glue lines
BS EN 392 : Glued laminated timber. Shear test of glue lines
BS EN 408 : Timber structures. Structural timber and glued laminated timber.

Determination of some physical and mechanical properties
BS EN 636 : Plywood Specifications
BS EN 845 : Specification for Ancillary components for masonry
BS EN 912 : Timber Fasteners, Specifications for Connections for Timber
BS EN 942 : Timber in Joinery. General Classification of Timber Quality.
BS EN : Round and sawn timber. Permitted deviations and preferred sizes.

1313-1 Softwood sawn timber
BS EN : Round and sawn timber. Permitted deviations and preferred sizes.

1313-2 Hardwood sawn timber
BS EN ISO : Additives. Animal Glues

9665
BS EN ISO : Textiles: Determination of fabric propensity to surface fuzzing

12945-1 and to pilling. Pilling box method
BS 459 : Match boarded Wooden Door Leaves for External Use.
BS 585 : Wood Stairs.
BS 644 : Timber Windows.
SP-1279 Page 122 Dec 2009

BS 1088 : Marine Plywood Manufactured from Selected Tropical

Hardwoods.
BS 1186 : Timber for & Workmanship in Joinery.
BS 1187 : Wood Blocks for Floors.
BS 1202 : Nails.
BS 1210 : Wood Screws.
BS 1336 : Knotting.
BS 4050 : Mosaic Parquet Panels.
BS 4255 : Preformed Rubber Gaskets for Weather Exclusion from

Buildings.
BS 4787 : Internal & External Wood Door Sets, Door Leaves & Frames.
BS 4901 : Plastic Colours for Building Purposes.
BS 4965 : Decorative Laminated Plastic Sheet Veneered Boards & Panels.
BS 4978 : Visual Strength Grading of Softwood.
BS 5666 : Methods of Analysis of Wood Preservatives & Treated Timber.
BS 5756 : Visual Strength Grading of Hard Wood.
BS 6446 : Manufacture of Glued Structural Components of Timber & Wood

Board Panel Products
DD ENV : Plywood. Biological durability. Guidance for the assessment of

1099 plywood for use in different hazard classes
J1.3 Compliance with Standards

Dec 2009 Page 123 SP-1279

J2.0 Scope
J2.1 Materials
The Contractor shall supply and fix all timbers, carpentry and joinery items from a source
approved by the Company known to produce materials complying with this Specification
and the Contract Documents.
Particulars of materials supplied in accordance with this Specification shall be clearly

marked on the delivery note, invoice or suppliers certificate provided with each
consignment, and shall include: -
- The name, trademark, or other means of identification to the manufacture or

source of supply.
- Size of material
- Type of material
- Statement of compliance with relevant specification
J2.1.1 Timber
Timber for carpentry and joinery work shall be well seasoned, sound, bright, free from
shakes, large, loose or dead knots, waney edges, warp, incipient decay, stained sapwood,
wormholes, insect infestation or other defects and shall be equal to samples approved by the
Company.
Hardwood for carpentry shall be red meranti or other hardwood to BS 5756 and BS EN.
1313-2 unless stated otherwise in the contract documents.
Hardwood for joinery should be best quality dark red meranti, close grained and free from
all defects, unless stated otherwise in the contract documents.
Structural timber shall be SP2, Grade 50 in accordance with BS 4978.
J2.1.2 Plywood & Particle board

Plywood shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 636. Particle board shall be either
medium density or heavy density as specified in contract documents.
Veneers shall be Grade 1 unless otherwise specified.
J2.1.3 Plastic Laminate

Plastic laminate shall be 1.5 mm minimum thickness complying with the requirements of
BS 4965.Plastic laminate shall be fully bonded with approved adhesive and backing
materials.
Plastic laminate shall be of the colour specified in the Contract Documents in accordance
with BS 4901.
A plastic balance laminate shall be applied to the reverse face of materials, which are
described as being faced on one side with plastic laminate.
J2.1.4 Adhesives
Adhesives for timber shall be based on synthetic resins of phenolic and aminoplastic resin
type complying with the requirements of BS EN 301. Adhesive for external framed
carpentry and joinery shall be type WBP, and for internal framed carpentry and joinery
shall be type BR.
SP-1279 Page 124 Dec 2009

J2.1.5 Timber Moisture Content

Timber shall be air seasoned or kiln dried. The moisture content shall be suitable for the
situation of the finished work. When fixed in position the timber shall remain stable and
free from any expansion or contraction or other movement, which will detract from the
satisfactory performance or required appearance of the element. The timber shall be free
from all drying defects and there shall be no indication of shrinkage.
Softwood shall have a moisture content limit of 12% unless otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents.
Hardwood shall have a moisture content limit of 10% unless otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents and shall have been kiln dried.
J2.2 Storage
The Contractor shall provide weatherproof storage facilities for all timber, carpentry and
joinery items delivered to the Worksites.
J2.3 Preservative Treatment

Timber fixed in the structure, which will not receive a finishing treatment, shall be treated
before fixing in place with one coat of a timber preservative approved by the Company.
Treatment shall be carried out after all cutting and shaping is completed and care shall be
taken to avoid damage to surface of treated timber in subsequent handling. If treated timber
is unavoidably cut or damaged a liberal application of preservative shall be made to the cut
or damaged surfaces.
Treated timber shall be dry before incorporation into the works.
J2.4 Termite Protection

When specified ,timber shall be protected with a solution of Tribune (Fervalerate) or any
other approved equivalent termite protection poison. The solution shall be mixed in strict
accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and applied at the specified rates.
Completed termite treatments shall carry a guarantee of 10 years against termites.
J2.5 Fixing
J2.5.1 Structural Timber
Structural timber should extend in one piece between supports or fixings and shall only be
jointed in a manner approved by the Company.
Where structural timbers are notched over supports the depth of the notch shall not be more
than 40% of the depth of the timber. Where structural timbers are to be cut for the passage
of services then, cuts are to be made as near the neutral axis as possible and are not to
exceed 30% of the depth of the timber. Cuts shall be made as close as possible to the timber
supports.
J2.5.2 Carpentry
Carpentry work shall be fixed with steel nails complying with BS 1202 except where
described as framed where it shall be jointed and held together with glue and brass screws.
J2.5.3 Joinery
Joinery work shall be jointed in accordance with BS EN 942 and BS 1186 Part 2. Joints
shall be glued and screwed or doweled. Any screws appearing on face work shall have the
heads let in and be pellated unless otherwise described. Hardwood joinery shall be put
together and fixed with brass screws.
Dec 2009 Page 125 SP-1279

Joinery shall be worked strictly in accordance with the Contract Documents and finished to
a smooth, wrought face (not machine planed only) with all arrises pencil rounded. Where
joints are not specifically indicated they shall be the same as joints specified in the Contract
Documents for similar positions. Joinery work members shall be prepared, framed up and
put together, and placed in a drying room for as long as possible before being fixed in the
Works. Joinery shall not be delivered to the Worksite until it is required for fixing in the
Work.
Screws used for fixing and jointing shall comply with BS 1210. Cups for fixing hardwood
joinery shall be heavy pressed brass cups with milled edges and shall be neatly recessed
flush with the surface of the Work. Surface cups shall only be used where specified.
J2.6 Doors
J2.6.1 Flush Doors
Flush doors shall comply with the requirements of BS 459.Standard timber doors shall be
solid core flush doors veneered, painted or varnished as specified with hardwood lipping to
all edges. Thickness of flush doors shall not be less than 40mm.
All doors shall be tested against the requirements set out in BS 5277, BS 5278, BS EN 1026
and BS EN 1027.
J2.6.2 Fire Doors

Fire doors shall comply with the requirements of BS 9999, BSCP 151 to meet the specified
fire rating.
J2.6.3 Framed & Panelled Doors

Framed and panelled doors should be of red meranti or other approved hardwood and shall
comply with the requirements of BS 459.
J2.6.4 Matchboard Doors

Matchboard doors should be of red meranti or other approved hardwood and shall comply
with the requirements of BS 459.
J2.6.5 Louvered doors

Louvered doors and windows should be of red meranti or other approved hardwood.
Louvered doors and windows shall be rigid in construction and free from sag and bowing.
J2.6.6 Frames & Linings

Frames and linings shall be of red meranti or other approved hardwood and shall comply
with the requirements of BS 1567.
J2.6.7 Architraves & Mouldings

Architraves and mouldings shall comply with the requirements of BS EN ISO 12945-1.
Architraves and mouldings shall be neatly mitred at intersections.
J2.7 Windows
All timber windows shall conform to the requirements of BS EN 1026, BS EN 1027and BS
6375.
J2.8 Defective Work

Shrinkage, warping or any other defect occurring in the Work either during the course of
the Work or during the maintenance period shall be replaced or made good at the
Contractors expenses to the Company's approval.
SP-1279 Page 126 Dec 2009

J3.0 Appendix
ITP No: SP-1279-J-001: Timber Products , Wooden Doors and Windows
Dec 2009 Page 127 SP-1279

ITP No: SP-1279-J-001: Timber Products , Wooden Doors and Windows
Timber products, Visual observation Visual observation for CSR All items This Chapter
Wooden Doors and defects
windows
Verification Compliance certificates Manufacturer Each Consignment This Chapter

with relevant standards or item
from manufacturer
SP-1279 Page 128 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Ironmongery Version 2.0
Chapter – K
Ironmongery Works
Dec 2009 Page 129 SP-1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Ironmongery
K1.0 Introduction
K1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part-K.‘Civil & Building
Construction Specifications - Ironmongery’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the
K1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

K1.2.1 Construction Standards

BS 9999 : Code of practice for Fire Safety in Design, management and
Use of Buildings.
K1.2.2 Material Standards

BS EN 1125 Building hardware. Panic exit devices operated by a horizontal
bar. Requirements and test methods
BS EN 1154 : Building hardware. Controlled door closing devices.
Requirements and test methods
BS EN 1906 : Building hardware. Lever handles and knob furniture.

Requirements and test methods
BS EN 1935 : Building hardware. Single-axis hinges. Requirements and test
methods
BS EN 12209 : Building Hardware. Locks & Latches.
BS EN 12329 : Corrosion protection of metals. Electrodeposited coatings of

zinc with supplementary treatment on iron or steel

cadmium on iron or steel

nickel, nickel plus chromium, copper plus nickel and copper
plus nickel plus chromium
BS EN 23270 : Method of Tests for Paints.
BS 476 : Fire Tests on Building Materials & Structures.
BS 3621 : Thief Resistant Lock Assemblies.
BS 3987 : Anodic Oxide Coating on Wrought Aluminium for External

Architectural Applications.
BS 5499 : Fire Safety Signs, Notices & Graphic Symbols.
SP-1279 Page 130 Dec 2009

BS 6496 : Powder Organic Coatings for Applications & Stoving to

Aluminium Alloy Extrusions, Sheet & Preformed Sections.
DIN 7140 : Locksmithing & Door Furniture in General.
DIN 1725 : Aluminium G3.
DIN 1745 : Aluminium G1.
DIN 1747/48 : Aluminium S1, 05.
DIN 17006 : Stainless Steel.
DIN 18082 : Hardware for Fire Doors.
DIN 18255 : Handles, Escutcheons & Plates.
DIN 18250-1 : German Locks.
DIN 18252 : German Cylinders.
ANSI A156.7 : Specific Hinge Template Size for Metal Doors/Frames only
K1.3 Compliance with Standards

Dec 2009 Page 131 SP-1279

K2.0 Scope
K2.1 Materials
The Contractor shall supply and fit architectural ironmongery / finish hardware, signs and
nameplates (hereafter called hardware) whether to wood or steel doors, cupboards fittings,
etc, (except standard proprietary units complete with hardware) from a single suite
Unless stated otherwise, ironmongery to aluminium doors and windows shall be supplied
by the aluminium fabricator in accordance with this Specification but with finishes to match
the fabricator's sections. Floor spring units, boxes and cover plates and master keyed
cylinder shall be supplied by the general ironmongery supplier.
Ironmongery shall provide, convenience of use and maintenance of the building security
against unauthorised access (and in some cases exit); escape from fire; protection against
fire; prevention of smoke spread of toxic atmospheres or other hazards and protection to
doors and other surfaces. The Contractor shall ensure that hardware supplied meets with the
Company requirements, and if any item proposed or specified detracts there from the
Company shall be informed.
The Contractor shall check the ironmongery on installation for correct operation, maintain
each item in accordance with the Manufacturers instructions, protect it against damage by
other trades and adjust, clean and lubricate it on completion of the Works.
The Contractor shall supply materials complying with either British Standards, European
Norm or DIN Standards and shall not intermix the three on the Works.
Materials supplied by the Contractor shall meet requirements for fire protection and shall
not be subject to bimetallic corrosion when brought into contact with background materials
or other hardware.
The Contractor shall select suitable metals and alloys for each individual item, graded and
formed to relevant British, European Norm or DIN Standards.
The designs of ironmongery hardware for the Works shall reflect the nature and quality of
the project, with particular attention to entrance and public area doors, doors to areas with
higher standards of finish and doors to areas with particular functions. Finish surfaces of all
items of one material, whether formed as sheet, extrusion, casting or stamping, shall be
selected to match exactly in colour and texture.
Aluminium hardware shall be from HE9-TF (98.5% Al, 0.6% Si, 0.9% Mg) alloy, hand
polished and shall be anodised to a minimum of 15 microns.
Stainless steel hardware shall be fabricated from solid material (as opposed to thin cladding
on a base material) with a satin or hand polished finish. The stainless steel shall be
molybdenum bearing grade EN58J Grade 316 (18% Cr, 10% Ni, 3% Mo) material.
Coloured finishes shall be applied to suitably treated base materials and shall comprise of
an approved, 0.10 mm thick, satin finished, hard, durable, non electrostatic, proprietary
coating, unaffected by ultra-violet light or climatic conditions and shall require no special
maintenance (see BS 6496 and BS EN 23270). Nylon finishes shall not be used.
K2.1.1 Fire Rated Door Assemblies, Doors on Escape Routes & Escape
Doors
Ironmongery to such doors shall be to BS 9999 or DIN 18082, Part 1. .
Ironmongery for fire rated door assemblies shall be of types, sizes and designs, which shall
not reduce the rating of the assembly below the specified level. Fire rated doors, smoke
SP-1279 Page 132 Dec 2009

control doors, doors on escape routes and final exit doors shall be self closing by means of
closers as described in Sections 2.1.3 and 2.1.8.
Aluminium, brass or similar soft alloy hinges shall not be used for fire rated assemblies.
K2.1.2 Hinges
Hinges shall be to the dimensional requirements of BS EN 1935. Hinges to metal doors
and frames shall be drilled to template to ANSI A156.7.
Hinges for fire rated doors shall be stainless steel triple knuckle button tipped with caged
ball bearings and shall be manufactured from 2.5 mm material and shall be a minimum of: -
100 mm x 75 mm - for wood doors with wood frames.
90 mm x 90 mm - for wood or metal doors with metal frames.
On non-fire rated medium duty doors the hinges shall be
100 mm x 75 mm double stainless steel washered triple knuckle aluminium butts, or

stainless steel double-washered hinges.
Cubicle doors shall have aluminium rising butts minimum
100 mm x 75 mm having rust proofed cams.
All hinges shall be supplied with 12g stainless steel screws unless otherwise specified.
K2.1.3 Emergency Exit Devices

Emergency exit devices shall comply with the performance and dimensional requirements
of BS EN 1125 or DIN 7140 and be of the mortice type, with latches and vertical bolts
concealed and with stainless steel exposed surfaces unless otherwise specified.
Keyed emergency exit devices shall be master keyed together with other locks.
The panic bolts and latches shall be of the fully mortice type and shall be suitable for doors
not exceeding 2440 mm x 1220 mm as standard, and shall suit a minimum door thickness
of 44 mm.
K2.1.4 Locks and Latches

Locks and latches for doors shall be in accordance with the performance requirements of
BS EN 12209, DIN 18250, Part 1 or DIN 18252.
Each lock or latch shall be integrally sprung such that separate sprung roses or plates are
not required.
Where knob furniture is specified locks and latches shall be specially soft sprung with 2
way easy action followers. Locks or latches for lever handle operation shall be specially
heavy sprung with one-way action to ensure a firm feel.
Unless otherwise specified, keyed locks shall be of the pin tumbler cylinder type with a
minimum of 6 pins and practicably infinite differs. Cylinders shall be easily removed when
the door is open without dismantling door trim but not removable when door is closed.
Unless otherwise specified, keyed locks shall be master keyed under a system allowing the
use of grand, master, and sub-master key suites and construction keying as required.
Dec 2009 Page 133 SP-1279

Each lock shall be supplied with 5 copies of the keys for each lock, 1 spare servant key
blank for each lock in the works. Also 5 copies of all sub-masters and 2 copies only for
Grand Masters.
The locks and latches shall incorporate 3 part 19 mm throw stainless steel latch bolts and
deadbolts shall incorporate hardened steel rollers.
Where required for security, latch bolts shall be protected by stainless steel anti-thrust bolts.
Latch bolts shall be fully reversible without removing the lock case cover.
Stainless steel for ends and preformed striking plates shall be provided to all locks and
latches. Suitable rebated components shall be provided where appropriate to doors with
rebated meeting stiles.
All dead locks shall be provided with completely boxed keep plates.
K2.1.5 Lever Handles, Roses & Back plates

Lever handles should be of rounded section aluminium.
The levers shall be supplied complete with a corrosion proof stainless steel spindle suitable
for door thickness between 35 mm and 54 mm. Roses and back plates shall be of a 3 mm
material with polished and anodised edges and the former should be capable of being fixed
rigidly to the associated lock case by the use of metal thread screws provided, or fixed to
the door with screws.
Lever handles should have a return section at free end to within 5 mm of door face.
K2.1.6 Pull Handles

Pull handles should be an approved aluminium section. They shall be provided with bolt
through fixings employing countersunk corrosion proofed bolts with cup washers and
locking patches.
Where appropriate, levers and pulls shall be of a type that allows forearm operation in
addition to being suitable for hand operation. Pull handles, with a free end should have a
return at the free end to within 5 mm of door face.
K2.1.7 Protection Plates

The protection plates shall be manufactured from 3 mm material except stainless steel
plates, which shall be from not less than 2 mm material.
Plates shall be fixed with countersunk screws located 5 mm from the plate edge/corner. The
plates should have square edges which have been polished and anodised, or with round
formed edges.
The minimum sizes of plates, unless otherwise specified, shall be: -
Push plates : 150 mm x 300 mm
Kick plates : 150 mm high
Mid rail plates : 150 mm high
Trolley plates : 1000 mm high
Kick plates, trolley plates and mid rail plates shall extend the full door leaf width less
deductions for any door stops or rebated edges on the appropriate faces and further
deduction of 5 mm from each end of the plate for clearance.
SP-1279 Page 134 Dec 2009

The Contractor shall check dimensions on site against doors before ordering.
K2.1.8 Door Closing Devices

Falling butt hinges shall only be utilised for WC or shower cubicles and spring hinges shall
not be utilised unless specified.
Door closing devices shall be of a fully adjustable hydraulic check type incorporating the
following features.
(1) Closing speed shall be fully adjustable from 2 seconds to 30 seconds and shall
incorporate snap action closing to overcome latch resistance with a switch to negate such
action for doors without latches.
(2) Opening and closing from an angle up to 180o, with "check" closing shall be
adjustable to operate from any angle between 135o and closed.
(3) Hydraulic reverse check, or back check action shall be provided to protect the closer
mechanism and negates the need for door stops and stays.
(4) Hydraulic check action shall be fully adjustable for both power and angle of
operation.
Door closers shall be guaranteed for use in local weather conditions including positions of
extreme exposure. The surface mounted door closer shall be of a neat aesthetically pleasing
design.
Door closers shall have all adjustments fully concealed and be provided with suitable
adjustment tools.
Floor mounted door closers shall be of the types suitable for use with either single or double
action wood or metal doors by the use of compatible fittings and shall be complete with
specially reinforced galvanised loose boxes giving adjustment in longitudinal transverse
and vertical directions.
Cover plates shall be manufactured from 3 mm thick stainless steel material, having
concealed fixings. Floor mounted door closers shall hold the door under check control
from 85 degrees to the closed position and shall be supplied with fully interchangeable top
centres and straps which will have stainless steel cover caps.
K2.1.9 Selectors
Where both leaves of a pair of doors are self closing and one leaf must close before the
other because of rebated meeting stiles or the like, a surface mounted selector stay shall be
provided.
K2.1.10 Bolts
At top and bottom of non-active leaves of pairs of doors flush bolts shall be provided
having a 25 mm throw. The flush bolts shall have a 225 mm long body with a dovetail
return to resist damage to the door.
Suitable bolt sockets or keeps shall be provided and shall be the easy clean 'boat' type for
internal use, but of a spring loaded dirt excluding type at external or dirty locations.
K2.1.11 Door Stops

Floor mounted door stops shall be provided except in wet areas and shall be a minimum of
45 mm diameter with a 38 mm projection and rubber buffer. Stops shall be supplied
complete with a 'rawl bolt' fixing device.
Dec 2009 Page 135 SP-1279

Where wall-fixing stops are specified they shall have a projection of at least 63 mm and
shall be provided with a 45 mm long 12g screw.
K2.1.12 Signs & Nameplates

Signs and nameplates shall be in Arabic and English (except for graphic signs) and shall be
ordered in accordance with SP1284, 'Specification for Standard Signs and Signboards'.
Signs and nameplates shall be mechanically fixed to the background material by such
means as approved by the Company. The use of adhesive shall not be permitted without
the written approval of the Company.
K2.1.13 Accessories
The Contractor shall provide suitable proprietary lockable key filing and security cabinets,
suitably located, to hold one key for each lock in the Works, including those to furniture,
fittings, etc, plus 25 percent spare capacity. All keys shall be supplied with plastic key tags
with card inserts for each spare in each cabinet and five card 'key out' tabs for each space in
each cabinet.
Notwithstanding the other requirements hereof the Contractor shall provide such other
items of ironmongery/hardware as may be reasonably required to comply with applicable
regulations and to ensure that doors, windows, fittings, etc, operate properly.
K2.2 Operating Manuals & Spare Parts

The Contractor shall hand over the following items to the Company on completion of the
Works:
- Such hardware spare parts as may be required herein. If no requirements are

stated, provide one of each item used in the Works, together with a minimum
number of 3 fully-labelled spare mortice locks, cylinders and key sets. Such spares
may be drawn by the Contractor for use in the maintenance period but shall be
replaced in full prior to the issue of the maintenance certificate.
- A full set of fixing and operating tools for the hardware to Supplier's
recommendations.
- An operation manual for the hardware, containing 'as built' hardware schedules,
spare parts lists, lists of tools and maintenance equipment, general manufacturers
literature, performance and construction specifications, operation, adjustment and
maintenance instructions and such other information as may be reasonably
required.
- A guarantee that the hardware Supplier shall keep a stock of spare parts for a
period of 15 years.
K2.3 Storage
The Contractor shall provide approved weatherproof storage facilities for all hardware
delivered to the Worksite.
K2.4 Work Incidental to Hardware Systems

The Contractor shall allow for all work incidental to hardware systems including
coordinating with other installations forming holes, mortices, chases, or the like, making
good finishes, protective and decorative painting and the provision of electrical supplies,
accessories, etc.
SP-1279 Page 136 Dec 2009

K2.5 Manufacturers Warranties

The Contractor shall provide, from the Ironmongery Vendor before commencement of
work, warranties for the periods given below covering all ironmongery for each project.
Warranties shall undertake to repair or replace, free of charge, items which are or become
defective due to faulty material or workmanship, unsuitability for intended use or prevailing
external or internal environmental conditions.
Hinges 5 years
Locks 5 years
Panic exit devices 5 years
Floor or overhead surface mounted closers 10 years
Non mechanical items (plates, handles, etc.) 10 years
K3.0 Appendix
ITP No: SP-1279-K-001: Ironmongery
Dec 2009 Page 137 SP-1279

ITP No: SP-1279-K-001: Ironmongery
Ironmongery Visual observation Visual observation for CSR All items This Chapter
defects
Verification Ironmongery should be CSR Each Consignment PGSC (Product Group

from Approved or item Service Codes) List
Vendors as per latest (Latest)
PGSC (Product Group
Service Codes) list
Verification Manufacturers CSR Each Consignment Section K 2.5

Warranties Certificate or item
SP-1279 Page 138 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Glazing Version 2.0
Chapter – L
Glazing Works
Dec 2009 Page 139 SP-1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Glazing
L1.0 Introduction
L1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part-L. ‘Civil & Building Construction
Specifications -Glazing’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are the main
changes to this document.
L1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

L1.2.1 Construction Standards

BS 5357 : Code of Practice for Installation of Security Glazing.
BS 5516 : Code of Practice for Design and Installation of Sloping and Vertical
Patent Glazing
BS 6100 : Glossary of Building & Civil Engineering Terms (Section 1.4)
BS 6262 : Code of Practice for Glazing of Buildings.
BS 8000 : Workmanship on Building Sites. (Part 7 - Glazing).
CP 153 : Code of Practice for Windows & Rooflights.
L1.2.2 Material Standards

BS EN 1026/ 1027 : Methods of Testing Windows and Doors.
BS EN 1063 : 2000 : Glass in building. Security glazing. Testing and classification

of resistance against bullet attack
BS EN 1527 : Building hardware. Hardware for sliding doors and folding

doors
BS EN 13126 : Building hardware. Requirements and test methods for

windows and doors height windows. Requirements common to
(all Parts) all types of hardware
BS 544 : Linseed Oil Putty for Use in Wooden Frames.
BS 952 : Glass for Glazing.
BS 3447 : Glossary of Terms Used in the Glass Industry.
BS 4255 : Preformed Rubber Gaskets for Weather Exclusion from

Buildings.
BS 7956 : Specification for primers for woodwork
SP-1279 Page 140 Dec 2009

BS 5544 : Anti-Bandit Glazing. (Glazing Resistant to Manual Attack).
BS 5713 : Hermetically Sealed Flat Double Glazing Units.
BS 6206 : Impact Performance Requirements for Flat Safety Glass &

Safety Plastics for Use in Buildings
BS 6375 : Performance of Windows and Doors.
BS 6510 : Steel Windows, Sills, Window Board & Doors.
L1.3 Compliance with Standards

by the Contractor in accordance with these Specifications.
Dec 2009 Page 141 SP-1279

L2.0 Scope
L2.1 Materials
The Contractor shall supply and fix all glass, glazing materials, including mirrors from a
source approved by the Company known to produce glass and glazing complying with this
Specification and as specified in the Contract Documents.
Manufacturing technical criteria and unique procurement data of glass and glazing materials
supplied to the Company in accordance with this specification shall be clearly indicated on
delivery notes, invoices or Supplier's certificates supplied with each consignment of glass and
glazing materials, and shall include :
- Manufacturer's name, trade mark or other means of identification.
- Type of glass, including thickness.
- Date of manufacture.
- Compliance with relevant British or International Standards.
- Process batch number.
L2.1.1 Glass
Glass shall comply with BS 952 be free from waves, specks, bubbles, colouration and other
defects, and to the full thickness or weight specified in the Contract Documents.
L2.1.2 Double-Glazing
Double-glazing, where specified in the Contract Documents, shall comply with BS 5713.
Glazing units shall be prefabricated by a manufacturer approved by the Company and be
composed of two glass panels spaced with a cavity of dehydrated air.
Both outer and inner glass panes of each unit shall be fixed to air cavity spacers with
polysulphide adhesive and shall not be provided with channel-shaped metal covers.
In the absence of any particular specification of glazing in the Contract document, the default
option shall be to use double-glazing for all windows and doors
L2.1.3 Laminated Glass

Laminated glass, where specified in the Contract Document, shall comply with the
requirements of BS 6206. Laminated glass shall be purchased, cut to size, from a manufacturer
Laminated glass shall consist of two layers of float glass 3 mm minimum thick each and a
polyvinyl butyral interlayer 1.9 mm thick. All panes shall be marked clearly with the name of
the Manufacturer etched in the glass.
The Contractor shall provide minimum one or 5% (rounded to nearest unit) surplus quantity of
each size of laminated pane required. These extra panes may be utilised by the Contractor
during the maintenance period but shall be replaced in full prior to issue of the maintenance
certificate.
L2.1.4 Toughened Glass

Toughened glass, where specified in the Contract Documents shall comply with BS 952.
The Contractor shall supply toughened glass in predetermined sizes and it shall not be cut on
site.
SP-1279 Page 142 Dec 2009

The Contractor shall provide minimum one or 5% (rounded to nearest unit) to surplus quantity
of each size of toughened glass pane required. These extra panels may be utilised by the
Contractor during the maintenance period but shall be replaced in full prior to issue of the
maintenance certificate.
L2.1.5 Mirrors
Mirror glass where specified in the Contract Documents shall be silvering quality polished
plate glass, silvered on one side, copper-backed varnished and painted, complying with BS
952 ref. 6A (111) and 27. Exposed edges to mirrors shall be ground and polished. Mirrors
shall be delivered to the Worksite cut to size and drilled for fixing, and shall be fixed with
chromium-plated mirror screws unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
L2.2 External Glazing

Glass shall be installed in accordance with BS 6262.
Glass panels shall be fitted from the outside.
Clearance between edge of glass and frame shall be a minimum of 3 mm.
L2.2.1 Timber Frame Glazing

Timber rebates shall be primed with white priming paint complying to BS 7956 and allowed
to dry prior to glazing.
Glazing to timber frames shall be fixed with zinc coated glazing pins bed and back putties
complying to BS 544 with splayed and mitred front edges. Back putties shall be trimmed
level with rebates and front putties finished 3 mm back from line of sight.
Putties shall be capable of being painted, after a 48-hour drying period, with white priming
paint complying to BS 7956, without any lifting or disturbance of its surface.
White priming paint shall dry within 24 hours and shall not show any discolouration,
wrinkling, grittiness or other defect.
L2.2.2 Steel Frame Glazing

Glazing to galvanized metal frames shall be executed in accordance with BS 6510 and the
window manufacturer's written instructions.
Method of fixing shall ensure void-free and weatherproof joints.
L2.2.3 Aluminium Windows & Sliding Doors Glazing

Glazing to aluminium frames (including sliding doors) shall be executed in accordance with
EN 13126 & BS EN 1527 and the aluminium frame manufacturer's written instruction.
Method of fixing shall ensure void-free and weatherproof joints
L2.3 Internal Glazing

L2.3.1 Timber Frame Glazing
Glazing to hardwood timber frames shall be fixed with screwed hardwood beads or as
L2.3.2 Steel Frame Glazing

Glazing shall be fitted in steel frames with an approved mastic compound and proprietary clips
supplied by frame manufacturer.
Dec 2009 Page 143 SP-1279

L2.3.3 Door & Screen Glazing

Glazing to doors, screens and other places subject to vibration shall be bedded in wash leather
and held in place with approved beading.
L2.4 Cleaning Of Glass

The Contractor shall, on completion of the Works, clean and polish all glass to the Company's
approval.
L3.0 Appendix
ITP No: SP-1279-L-001: Glass and Glazing material
SP-1279 Page 144 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-L-001: Glazing
Glass and Glazing Visual observation Visual observation for CSR All items This Chapter
materials defects
Verification Glazing should be CSR Each Consignment PGSC (Product Group

from Approved or item Service Codes) List
Vendors as per latest (Latest)
PGSC (Product Group
Service Codes) list
Glazing and glass items Visual Visual observation for CSR All items This Chapter
erected in position damage and fixing
methods
Dec 2009 Page 145 SP-1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Finishes
Chapter – M
Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishing Works
SP-1279 Page 146 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Finishes Version 2.0
M1.0 Introduction
M1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes Version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part-M. ‘Civil & Building Construction
Specifications – Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishes’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the
M1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

Standards.
M1.2.1 Construction Standards

BS EN 13914-1 : Design and Application of ExternalRendering.
BS EN 13914-2 : Design and Application of Internal Plastering.
BS EN 13964 : Suspended Ceilings
BS 5325 : Code of Practice for the Installation of Textile Floor

Coverings.
BS 5385 : Wall & Floor Tiling. (Parts 3 & 5)
BS 6100 : Glossary of Terms Applicable to Internal Flooring, External

Rendering and Floor Screeding. (Sections 1.3, 6.1,6.6.2)
BS 6263 : Code of Practice for Care and Maintenance of Floor Surfaces
BS 8000 : Workmanship on Building Sites.
BS 8201 : Code of Practice for Timber Flooring.
BS 8203 : Code of Practice for the Installation of Sheet and Tile

Flooring
BS 8204 : In-situ Floor Finishes. (Parts 1 , 2 , 4 & 5).
M1.2.2 Material Standards

Materials specified and equipment used for floor, wall and ceiling finishings shall comply
with the following standards:
BS EN 197-1 : Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria

for common cements
BS EN 316 : Wood fibreboards. Definition, classification and symbols
BS EN 413 : Masonry Cement.
Dec 2009 Page 147 SP-1279

BS EN 459 : Building Lime.
BS EN 520 : Gypsum Plasterboard.
BS EN 622 : Fibreboards. Specifications. General requirements
BS EN 649 : Resilient floor coverings. Homogeneous and heterogeneous

polyvinyl chloride floor coverings. Specification
BS EN 650 : Resilient floor coverings. Polyvinyl chloride floor coverings

on jute backing or on polyester felt backing or on polyester
felt with polyvinyl chloride backing. Specification
BS EN 651 : Resilient floor coverings. Polyvinyl chloride floor coverings

with foam layer. Specification
BS EN 654 : Resilient floor coverings. Semi-flexible polyvinyl chloride

tiles. Specification
BS EN 934 : Admixtures for Concrete, Mortars and Grouts.
BS EN 998 : Specification for Mortar for Masonry.
BS EN 1015 : Methods of Testing Mortars, Screeds and Plasters.
BS EN 12004 : Adhesives for Tiles.
BS EN 12104 : Resilient floor coverings. Cork floor tiles. Specification
BS EN 13139 : Fine aggregates for Mortar.
BS EN 13279 : Gypsum Binders and Gypsum Plasters.
BS EN 13658 - : Metal Lath and Beads – Internal, External Plastering

1,2
BS EN 13748 : Terrazzo Tiles.
BS EN 14499 : Textile Floor Covering. Carpet underlays
BS EN ISO 2424 : Textile for Floor Covering: Vocabulary.
BS EN ISO : Ceramic Floor & Wall Tiles.

10545
BS EN ISO : Jointing Products. Classification and requirements of

11600 Sealants.
BS 1187 : Wood Blocks for Floors.
BS 1297 : Tongue & Grooved Softwood Flooring.
BS 1305 : Batch Type Concrete Mixers.
BS 1711 : Solid Rubber Flooring.
BS 4050 : Mosaic Parquet Panels.
SP-1279 Page 148 Dec 2009

BS 5270 : Polyvinyl Acetate (PVAC) Indoor Emulsion Bonding Agents

for Use with Gypsum Building Plasters.
PSA-MOB 01 : Platform Floors & Elevated Pedestal Flooring.

801
M1.3 Compliance with Standards

Dec 2009 Page 149 SP-1279

M2.0 Scope
M2.1 Materials
The Contractor shall supply and fix materials for floor, wall and ceiling finishing from a
source, approved by the Company, known to produce materials complying with this
Specification, and as specified in the Contract Documents.
Particulars relating to materials complying with this Specification shall be clearly indicated on
the delivery note, invoice, or Suppliers' certificate supplied with each consignment of
materials, and shall include:
- Name, trademark or other means of identification of the Manufacturer.
- Statement of Compliance with the relevant Specification(s).
The Contractor shall submit to the Company two samples of each dry material to be used in
the Works and retained on the Worksite until completion of the Works.
M2.2 Testing
The Contractor shall select and execute a surface of approximately 5 m2 as a test panel as part
of the Works. The Contractor shall not continue with the remainder of the finishing until the
Company has approved the test panel.
M2.3 Floor Finishing

M2.3.1 Floor Screeds
M2.3.1.1 Materials
Sand, cement and water required for screeds shall comply with the requirements of Chapter D
of this Specification.
M2.3.1.2 Mixing and Laying

Material for screed shall be mixed on the Worksite in a batch mixer of approved size and
design, complying with BS 1305 or equal and approved by the Company, producing a uniform
distribution of materials with mass of uniform colour and consistency.
The mix proportions of materials for floor screeds shall be one part OPC complying to BS EN
197-1 to four parts sand complying to BS EN 13139 measured by volume in an approved
batch or gauge box.
Concrete surfaces to receive screed shall be well brushed to remove laitance before the
concrete sets. Before laying screeds the surface of the concrete shall be lightly damped with
clean water to remove surface dust.
The Contractor shall lay screeds to the specified thickness and/or falls as shown in the
Contract Documents and in alternate bays not exceeding 4.5 m or 18 m2. Screeds shall not be
laid less than 35 mm thick. Stop-ends shall be vertical and positioned to coincide with
construction joints in the sub-base concrete. Screed shall not pass over expansion joints in the
sub-base concrete. Expansion joints through the screed shall comprise impregnated fibre joint
filler board to the specified width.
Screed shall be finished smooth and even with a wood float finish. Where specified, a steel
trowel finish shall be applied lightly to present an even dense surface without laitance
occurring. The entire surface shall be protected from premature drying and rapid temperature
change by covering with sand or hessian and polythene sheeting, and kept continuously damp
for a minimum period of 4 days.
SP-1279 Page 150 Dec 2009

M2.3.2 Terrazzo Tiles & Skirting

Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply terrazzo tiles
complying with BS EN 13748-1 and BS EN 13748-2. Terrazzo tiles shall be laid in
accordance with the recommendations of BS 5385. Tiles shall be polished, hard, durable and
non-absorbent, of exact shape and even thickness, and shall have sharp arises. Tiles shall be
bedded and jointed in cement mortar (1: 4 mix). Joints shall be 2 mm maximum width and
surplus mortar shall be wiped off immediately after laying. Grouting of tiles should take place
as soon as tiles are firmly set and before any dirt or contamination can enter the joints. The
tiles shall be laid such that the surface tolerance before polishing shall not be more than 2 mm
between adjacent tiles when checked with a straight edge .
The tiles shall be laid so that cutting is kept to a minimum, and cut tiles should not be less than
20% of tile width and be adjacent to skirting or walls. Tiles shall be set out from the centre
lines, in each direction, of room or area so that any cut tiles are of equal width at opposite
perimeters. Cut edges of tiles shall be ground and rubbed smooth. Aluminium, brass or
ebonite dividing strips as specified in the Contract Documents shall be fitted between terrazzo
tiles and other floor finishing.
After laying the Contractor shall wet polish the terrazzo surface by means of an approved
grinding machine using a No. 140 carborundum wheel. Any area too small for convenient
machine grinding may be wet polished, by hand, using a No. 140 carborundum stone and
water.
On completion of wet polishing the Contractor shall thoroughly wash the terrazzo surface with
and acid and alkali free soap followed by rinsing with hot water.
Once the terrazzo surface is thoroughly rinsed and cleaned the Contractor shall apply an
approved, proprietary floor sealer in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.
M2.3.3 Ceramic Floor Tiles

Where specified in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall supply ceramic floor tiles
complying with BS EN ISO 10545. Ceramic floor tiles shall be laid in accordance with BS
5385 using an approved ceramic tile adhesive complying with BS EN 12004. All joints shall
be kept narrow and of regular width.
Tiles shall be laid so that cutting is kept to a minimum and cut tiles should not be less than
20% of tile width and be adjacent to skirtings or walls. Tiles shall be set out from the centre
perimeters. Cut edges of tiles shall be ground and rubbed smooth.
All tiles shall be grouted upon completion, care being taken to completely fill all joints. Any
surplus grout shall be cleaned off the face of tiling and surrounding surfaces immediately after
laying.
Ceramic floor tiles shall not be polished but left in a clean condition to the Company's
approval. Aluminium, brass or ebonite, as specified in the Contract Documents, dividing
strips shall be fitted between ceramic floor tiles and other floor finishes.
M2.3.4 Clay Floor Tiles & Skirting

Where specified in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall obtain clay floor tiles, non-
slip class 1, complying with BS EN ISO 10545.
Clay floor tiles shall be laid in accordance with the recommendations of BS 5385. Tiles shall
be bedded in cement/sand mortar (1:4 mix). All joints shall be kept narrow and of regular
width. Tiles shall be laid so that cutting is kept to a minimum and cut tiles should not be less
than 20% of width and be adjacent to skirting or walls. Tiles shall be set out from the centre
perimeters.
Dec 2009 Page 151 SP-1279

The Contractor shall supply acid resistant tiles where specified in the Contract Documents
with a Manufacturer's guarantee that the tiles are resistant to the acid they are to resist. Acid-
resistant tiles shall be grouted with an approved grout in accordance with the tile
Manufacturer's written instructions.
Cut edges of tiles shall be ground and rubbed smooth. All tiles shall be grouted on
completion, care being taken to completely fill all joints. Any surplus grout shall be cleaned-
off the face of tiling and surrounding surfaces immediately after laying.
Clay floor tiles shall not be polished but left in a clean condition, to the approval of the
Company.
Aluminium, brass or ebonite dividing strips, as specified in the Contract Documents, shall be
fitted between clay floor tiles and other floor finishes.
M2.3.5 Movement Joints In Terrazzo, Ceramic & Clay Tiled Areas

Movement joints in terrazzo, ceramic and clay tiled areas shall comprise impregnated fibre
joint filler board to the specified width. Movement joints in tiled area shall be placed:
- Over existing joints.
- At perimeters of floors, abutments etc.
- At 4.5 m maximum spacing both ways across uninterrupted floors
- With additional joints over supporting walls and columns.
Exposed edges shall be pointed with an approved sealant in accordance with the
Manufacturer's written instructions. Reference should be made to BS 6213 for selection of
appropriate sealant.
M2.3.6 PVC Floor Tiles & Skirting

When specified in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall supply PVC floor tiles and
skirting complying with BS EN 649 and BS EN 654.
PVC floor tiles and skirting shall be laid in accordance with the recommendations of BS 8203,
using an approved bituminous adhesive.
Tiles shall be laid so that cutting is kept to a minimum, and cut tiles should not be less than
20% of tile width and be adjacent to skirting or walls. Tiles shall be set out from the centre
line, in each direction, of the room or area, so that any cut tiles are of equal width at opposite
perimeters. The Contractor shall clean all tiled areas and surrounds of surplus adhesive, and
clean and polish all PVC tiled areas in accordance with BS 6263 on completion of the Works,
to the approval of the Company.
M2.3.7 In Situ Floor Finishing

Where specified in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall lay in situ floor finishing in
accordance with the recommendations of BS 8204. In situ floor finishing shall include:
- Concrete (including granolithic).
- Terrazzo.
- Mastic Asphalt.
- Pitch Mastic.
- Cement, rubber latex.
SP-1279 Page 152 Dec 2009

- Magnesium Oxychloride.
- Epoxy
M2.3.8 Carpet Tiles

The Contractor shall supply carpet tiles as described in the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall lay carpet tiles loose on a smooth clean surface. Adhesives shall not be
used to fix carpet tiles unless otherwise specified by the Company.
Carpet tiles shall be laid so that cutting is kept to a minimum, and cut tiles shall not exceed
20% tile width, and be adjacent to skirting or walls. Tiles shall be set out from the centre line,
of the room or area, in each direction, so that any cut tiles are of equal width at opposite
perimeters.
Carpet tiles not terminating at walls, i.e., across door openings, shall be trimmed with a
proprietary nap lock or gripping bar mechanically fixed to the floor.
M2.3.9 Elevated Pedestal Flooring

Where specified in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall supply elevated pedestal
flooring complying with PSA Specification
MOB 01 801 'Specification for Platform Floors, Elevated Pedestal Flooring and shall be
installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
On completion of the Works, the Contractor shall ensure that the void under elevated pedestal
flooring is thoroughly cleaned of any rubbish, surplus material and the like.
On completion of the Works the Contractor shall supply and hand to the Company two sets of
proprietary panel-lifters necessary to remove elevated pedestal flooring panels.
M2.3.10 Wood Block & Parquet Mosaic Flooring

Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply wood block and/or
parquet mosaic flooring complying with BS 1187 or BS 4050. Such floors shall be laid in
accordance with the recommendations of BS 8201 and maintained in accordance with the
recommendations of BS 6263.
NOTE: For special wooden flooring, eg, sprung squash court flooring, the Contractor should obtain
the services of a specialised Subcontractor experienced in the applicable flooring.
M2.3.11 Hardwood Skirting

Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply wrot hardwood to full
lengths and of sections shown in the Contract Documents. Hardwood skirting shall be fixed to
softwood grounds with countersunk screws so as to mask plaster edges. Screw heads shall be
pelleted with round pellets ensuring grain direction and texture is matched. Hardwood
skirting shall be neatly mitred at external angles and accurately scribed at internal angles and
to adjacent surfaces. Intermediate joints shall be kept to a minimum, in unobtrusive positions,
and shall not be scarfed.
M2.4 Wall Finishing

M2.4.1 Internal Rendering
M2.4.1.1 Materials
Sand, cement and water required for rendering, including mixing, shall comply with the
requirements of Chapter D of this Specification.
Dec 2009 Page 153 SP-1279

M2.4.1.2 Mixing and Application

Materials for rendering shall be mixed on the Worksite in a batch mixer of approved size and
design complying with BS 1305 or equal and approved by the Company, producing a uniform
distribution of materials with mass of uniform colour and consistency.
Proportions of materials for rendering shall be one part OPC, complying with -BS EN 197-1,
to four parts sand complying with BS EN 13139, measured by volume, in an approved batch
or gauge box.
The Contractor shall prepare walls for rendering as follows:
(1) Hack or scarify all concrete surfaces to provide adequate key.
(2) Rake out all joints in block work to 15 mm below block face to provide key.
(3) Secure all joints of concrete to block work, except where joints are incorporated for
expansion, with a single layer of galvanised expanded metal lathing, complying with
BS EN 13658, 400 mm wide, stapled to surface at 500 mm centres.
(4) Secure all chases with a single layer of lathing, as above, to extend 150 mm either side
of chase (300 mm total width).
(5) Hand throw a 2 mm thickness of cement/sand slurry, consisting of one part OPC to
three parts sand mixed volume with water to a thin slurry, to provide a roughened
surface. Allow drying for 24 hours before commencement of rendering.
Rendering on walls shall be 15 mm thick, finished with a wood skimming float and traversed
with a floating rule to a true and even surface.
Plasticising agents may be used subject to the written approval of the Company.
Rendering shall be kept damp by lightly spraying with fresh, clean water for a minimum
period of 7 days after application.
Rendering to receive tiles shall be crosshatched or combed before setting, to provide an

adequate key.
Rendering shall be left undecorated for a minimum period of 4 weeks after application.
M2.4.2 External Rendering

Materials and mixing of materials for external rendering shall be as described in section
D2.3.1 of this Specification, including surface preparation, with the additional stipulation that
galvanised expanded metal lathing shall be fixed to external corners and extend a minimum of
150 mm each side of corners, and held in place with 1:4 mortar dabs.
External rendering shall be as described in the Contract Documents and executed in

accordance with the recommendations of BS EN 13914-1.
M2.4.3 Internal Gypsum Plastering

Where specified in the Contract Documents, internal plastering shall be executed in
accordance with BS EN 13914-2 using gypsum plaster complying with BS EN 13279.
Where specified in the Contract Documents, projection plasters shall be applied using
proprietary machines to mix and spray the plaster.
Projection plastering shall be executed in accordance with the recommendations of BS EN

13914-2.
SP-1279 Page 154 Dec 2009

M2.4.4 Squash Court Walls

Internal plastering to squash court walls shall be executed using an approved proprietary
plaster applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.
M2.4.5 Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles & Fittings

Where specified in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall supply glazed ceramic wall
tiles and fittings with cushioned edges complying with BS EN ISO 10545.
Tiles shall be fixed in accordance with the recommendations of BS 5385, using an approved
adhesive, complying to BS EN 12004, to rendered surfaces, and neatly pointed in white or
coloured cement, as specified.
Tiles shall be fixed so that cutting is kept to a minimum and cut tiles should not be less than
20% of tile width and adjacent to edges and corners. Tiles shall be set out from the centre line
of the area so that any cut tiles are equal in width at opposite perimeters.
Cut edges of tiles shall be ground and rubbed smooth.
Particular care shall be taken to keep all courses horizontal and all perpends vertical.
Round edged tiles and fittings shall be used on all external corners and edges of tiled areas.
Tile joints shall be grouted with a proprietary filling, as recommended by the tile
Manufacturer and approved by the Company, with special care taken to ensure all joints are
completely filled.
Internal corners shall be sealed with an approved one-part, gun-applied, polysulphide-based

sealant or silicone-based sealant, complying with BS EN ISO 11600.
The Contractor shall clean all tiled areas and surrounds of surplus adhesive and grout to the
Company's approval.
Where applicable, angle and stop beads, complying with BS EN 13658, shall be fitted at all
external corners and at either side of expansion joints.
M2.5 Ceiling Finishing

M2.5.1 Rendered Ceilings
Where specified in the Contract Documents, ceilings to be rendered with cement sand plaster
or any other material as specified in the Contract. Material and mixing of material for ceiling
rendering shall be in accordance with section M2.3.1. Thickness of render shall be 6 mm.
M2.5.2 Textured Paint

Where specified in the Contract Documents, concrete soffits to receive textured paint shall be
fair-faced and thoroughly cleaned of all laitance, foreign matter and blemishes.
Textured paint, including primer, shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
M2.5.3 Suspended Ceilings

Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall supply and install suspended
ceilings in accordance with BS EN 13964.
Suspended ceiling tiles shall be set out to each room so that equal borders are obtained at
opposite walls. Edge trimming channels shall be plugged and fixed to walls at all junctions
with ceiling tiles.
Dec 2009 Page 155 SP-1279

All suspension and fixing details shall be executed in accordance with the manufacturer's
M2.6 Swimming-Pool Tiles

The Contractor shall supply 10 mm minimum thickness glazed ceramic tiles, approved by the
Company and suitable for installation in and around swimming pools. Swimming-pool tiles
include, but are not limited to:
- Wall and floor tiles.
- Skirting edge tiles.
- Marking tiles.
- Vitrified ceramic non-slip pool surround tiles.
- Non-slip butt-nosed edge tiles.
- Non-standard tiles for skimmer inlet, outlets, etc.
M2.6.1 Preparation, Render & Screed of Swimming Pool Shell Surfaces

At least 4 weeks shall elapse between completion of the swimming pool shell and the
commencement of rendering and screeding.
The swimming pool shell surface shall be 100% mechanically keyed to form a sound, keyed
base, free of all oils and laitance. This shall be executed by scrabbling or bush hammering of
the concrete surface. All high spots shall be removed.
The swimming pool shell surface shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dust and loose
particles prior to commencing rendering.
The Contractor shall not proceed with the rendering of walls or screeding of floors until the
Company has approved the prepared surfaces.
A bonding slurry consisting of one part OPC to three parts sand by volume mixed with water
to provide a thin slurry, shall be hand-thrown on to the surface and allowed to dry for 24 hours
before rendering.
Rendering of walls shall consist of OPC and sand in proportion not richer than 1: 3 by volume,
and not weaker than 1:4 by volume, when based on dry sand, as described in Clause 17,
Section 3 of BS 5385, Part 1. If the thickness needed is greater than 13 mm it shall be built-up
in two or more coats, and each coat shall be allowed to harden and dry-out, to prevent
shrinkage taking place before the following coat is applied.
When tiles are to be fixed with thin-bed adhesive, the trueness of the render surface should be
such that when checked with a 2 m straightedge, any gap under the straight edge does not
exceed 3 mm. The floated coat should be left with a wood float finish, and at least 14 days
shall elapse between completion of rendering and commencement of tiling.
Rendering shall be kept damp by lightly spraying with fresh, clean water for a minimum
period of 7 days following application.
The swimming pool floor screed shall be well bonded to the surface of the concrete by the
application of a bonding slurry, as described above, over the concrete before the screed is laid
or by mechanical keying. The Accuracy of the concrete base should allow a screed thickness
of 30-40 mm to be maintained over the whole area.
SP-1279 Page 156 Dec 2009

The mix proportions of cement and sand for the screed should be between 1:3 and 1:4 by
volume, and the water content kept as low as possible compatible with sufficient workability
to ensure full compaction. Curing shall start immediately the screed is compacted and
finished, and to ensure this, each completed area shall be covered without delay, using wet
hessian and polythene sheets well lapped and weighted around the edges to prevent wind
blowing underneath. Curing shall continue for 4-5 days and a further drying-out period of 10
days allowed to elapse before the application of tiling begins.
Screed shall be left with a wood float finish.
Rendering shall be left for a minimum period of 4 weeks before tiles are fixed.
M2.6.2 Fixing of Tiles

Tiles shall be fixed so that cutting is kept to a minimum, and cut tiles shall be not less than
20% of full tile width and be adjacent to corners. Cut tiles at inlet gratings, outlets, etc, shall
be cut with a mechanical saw to ensure neat and precise cut edges.
M2.6.2.1 Tile Bedding to Walls

Bedding of tiles to the swimming pool walls shall be by the 'float coat method using (1:3)
cement/sand bedding mortar. Bedding mortar shall be floated on to the wall, covering an area
of 4 to 6 m2 to a thickness of 10 mm, and left with a wood float finish. Bedding mortar shall
be left to set and horizontal and vertical course lines marked with chalk.
Tiles shall be clean and dry, and a thin coat of (1:3) cement/sand, in the form of a stiff slurry
applied to reverse faces of tiles, fully filling the key to provide 100% adhesion to the bedding
coat. Each tile shall be placed on the prepared bed and firmly tapped into place.
M2.6.2.2 Tile Bedding to Floor

Tiles to swimming-pool floors shall be laid on a semi-dry bed, consisting of (1:3)
cement/sand, mechanically mixed, before adding just sufficient water to make a crumbly
consistency that retains shape when squeezed in the hand. Bedding shall be 40 mm thick, and
after the bedding is thoroughly compacted, a fine sand/cement slurry (1:1) mix of creamy
consistency shall be poured over bedding and trowelled to a thickness of 2 mm. Tiles shall be
placed in position and firmly tamped into the bedding. Where steep slopes occur, the floating
coat method of fixing as described in Section M2.6.2.1.
M2.6.2.3 Tile Adhesives

Tile adhesives conforming to BS EN 12004 shall be used for fixing swimming pool tiles only
with the written approval of the Company and the tile Manufacturer. Tiles fixed with adhesive
shall have backs fully filled with adhesive, in addition to the adhesive being applied to the
rendered surface, to ensure 100% adhesion. Use of adhesive shall be executed in accordance
with the tile manufacturer's written instructions.
M2.6.2.4 Grouting
Tile joints shall be grouted with a proprietary filling as recommended by the tile manufacturer
and approved by the Company, with special care taken to ensure all joints are completely
filled.
White grouting shall not be used.
Tiles shall have been fixed for at least 3 days before grouting, and during this time the tiling
shall be protected from water or dirt penetration.
M2.6.2.5 Movement Joints

Movement joints shall be incorporated in tiling on pool walls and pool bottoms, in accordance
with BS 5385. Movement joints shall be incorporated at internal corners, around the
perimeter, at the junction of the pool bottom and sides, and at 3-4.5 m intervals down the
Dec 2009 Page 157 SP-1279

poolside, across the bottom and up the opposite sides in continuous loops. Where the pool
bottom drops to a diving pit, a movement joint shall be installed at both peak and base of the
ramp. All movement joints shall be at least 6 mm wide and in depth shall pass from the face of
the tiling to the structural concrete of the pool tank. Any movement joints already
incorporated in the structure shall not be tiled over but carried through to the face of the tiling.
Joints shall be kept free from dirt, adhesive droppings, etc.
Movement joints shall be filled completely with a suitable sealant, approved by the Company,
in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
M2.6.2.6 Cleaning Down

All faces of tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar droppings as work proceeds, and
upon completion of tiling the whole shall be washed-down, leaving the face of the tiles
completely clean, to the Company's approval.
M2.6.2.7 Pool Surrounds

Pool surrounds shall comprise non-slip vitrified ceramic tiles and bull nosed vitrified edge
tiles, and shall be laid using the semi-dry method of bedding as described in M2.3.3.
M2.6.2.8 Pool Filling

Pools shall not be filled with water for at least 3 weeks following completion of all fixing and
grouting.
M3.0 Appendix
ITP No: SP-1279-M-001: Floor Tiles, Wall Tiles and Materials for Special Surfaces
Refer Chapter D for ITP on Cement, Aggregate , Water and Mortars,
SP-1279 Page 158 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-M-001: Floor Tiles, Wall Tiles, Materials for Special Surfaces
Test Description Test Method / Conducted Number of Acceptance Remarks

Specimen of Test Controlling by Tests (min) Criteria
/ Document
Materials
Floor Visual Visual CSR Sample from This Chapter,

Tiles and observation observation for Consignment Project
Wall Colour, Specifications
Tiles, dimensions, and Drawings
Materials defects
for
special Verification Tiles should be CSR Each PGSC
Surfaces from Consignment (Product
Approved or item Group Service
Vendors as per Codes) List
latest PGSC (Latest)
(Product
Group Service
Codes) list
Verification Manufacturer’s CSR Each This Chapter,

for special Test Consignment Project
requirement Certificate Specifications
s like and Drawings
chemical
resistant
property,
Load
bearing
capacity
etc.
Dec 2009 Page 159 SP-1279

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Painting and Decorating
Chapter – N
Building Painting & Decorating Works
SP-1279 Page 160 Dec 2009

N1.0 Introduction
N1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes Version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part-N ”Civil & Building Construction
Specifications – Painting & Decorating” . Other than the conversion or formatting, the
N1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

Standards.
N1.2.1 Construction Standards

N1.2.1.1 PDO Standards
SP-1246 : Specification for Painting and Coating of Oil & Gas
Production Facilities (Part 1 ,2 ,3 and 5)
N1.2.1.2 International Standards

BS EN ISO 1461: : Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Fabricated Iron and Steel
Articles. Specifications and Test Methods
BS EN ISO 4618: : Paint and Varnishes
BS EN ISO 2063: : Thermal Spraying : Metallic and other inorganic coatings.

Zinc, aluminium and their alloys.
BS 4800 : Schedule of Paint Colours for Building Purposes.
BS 5252 : Framework for Colour Co-ordination for Building Purposes.
SIS 05.5900 : Pictorial Surface Preparation for Painting Steel Surfaces.
N1.2.2 Material Standards

Materials specified for painting and decorating shall comply with the following standards:
BS 1336 : Knotting
BS 3046 : Adhesives for Hanging Flexible Wall coverings
BS 4764 : Powder Cement Paints
Dec 2009 Page 161 SP-1279

N1.3 Compliance with Standards

SP-1279 Page 162 Dec 2009

N2.0 Scope
The scope of this specification is limited to all plant and non plant buildings. For all structural
steel painting within any plant area shall conform to SP 1246.
N2.1 Materials
The Contractor shall supply all materials for painting and decorating from a source approved
by the Company, known to produce materials complying with this Specification and as
Particulars relating to materials shall be clearly indicated on the delivery note, invoice, or
suppliers' certificates supplied with each consignment, and shall include:
- Name, trademark or other means of identification of the manufacturer.
- Statement of compliance with the relevant Specification.
- Date of manufacturer.
Paint shall be used within twelve months of manufacture and used in chronological order of
manufacture. Paint that has passed its expiry date shall not be used, and it shall be removed
from the Worksite at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall ensure that all paints and other coating materials are delivered to the
Worksite in the Manufacturer's original unopened containers, durably and legibly marked with
the description of the contents.
This description of contents shall include:
- Specification Number.
- Colour Reference Number.
- Method of Application for which it is intended.
- Date of Manufacture.
- Manufacturers name, initial or recognised trademark.
N2.2 Storage
The Contractor shall provide a suitable, lockable, well-ventilated paint store, located
separately from other stores, to protect paint and associated materials from deterioration due to
sunlight and wind. This store shall be equipped with suitable and sufficient fire extinguishers
N2.3 Environmental Conditions

All internal painting shall be executed in a well-ventilated dust-free environment.
The Company shall have the right to stop all cleaning, surface preparation or coating work in
unsuitable environmental conditions, including, but not limited to:
- High wind speeds.
- Airborne dust or sand.
- Rains, fog or mist.
Dec 2009 Page 163 SP-1279

- Surface temperature over 50o C or under 5o C.
- Surface temperature less than 3o C above dew point.
- Relative humidity greater than 85 %.
- Deposition on surfaces of moisture in the form of rain or condensation.
The likelihood of an unfavourable change in environmental conditions within 2 hours such

that the above conditions may apply.
Where environmental circumstances and/ or the Contractor's programme and/ or construction

methods require an environmental protection of all or part of the Works to be painted, the
Contractor shall then provide plant and equipment such as tents, heating, ventilation or
equipment for dehumidification, scaffolding, screening, etc. at the Contractor’s expense.
N2.4 Equipment & Tools

The Contractor shall provide and ensure that all equipment and tools required for painting and
decorating are kept clean and fit for use. Any items considered by the Company, as not fit for
use shall be removed from the Worksite and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
N2.5 Protection
The Contractor shall take particular care during painting work to ensure that surrounding areas
and surfaces are protected by the use of dustsheets or masking tape.
Should paint droppings occur on surrounding surfaces, they shall immediately be cleaned off
whilst still wet.
The Contractor shall remove all existing items fixed to the surface to be painted and place
them to one side in a safe position. Such items include, but are not limited to:
- Handles.
- Push plates.
- Kick plate.
- Door closers.
- Escutcheon plates.
- Grilles
- Electrical socket cover plates
- Electrical switch cover plates
- Roses
- Signs
Items removed shall not be fixed back into place until the background surface is dry.
SP-1279 Page 164 Dec 2009

N2.6 Painting of Timber

N2.6.1 Surface Preparation
Timber shall be treated with shop-applied timber preservative approved by the Company to
prevent conditions under which organisms are likely to damage the timber. This preservative
treatment shall not have any adverse effect on the subsequent paintwork (For timber
preservative and treatment refer to Part J of these Specifications).
Timber shall be brought to an even silky finish by the use of fine sandpaper. Holes or
unevenness in the timber shall be filled with stopping putty or paste filler approved by the
Company. Timber shall be knotted with a resin-free knotting compound complying with BS
1336, and resinous spots removed. Loose knots shall be removed and replaced with solid
wood, glued firmly into position with a timber adhesive approved by the Company.
N2.6.2 Paint Systems

Unless specified in the Contract Documents, the following paint systems shall be applied.
N2.6.2.1 Shop Priming

Timber shall be shop-primed with one coat of an approved lead-free white wood primer.
Surfaces to be built against other materials and inaccessible following incorporation into the
Works shall receive two coats of primer. This second coat of primer shall not be applied until
the first coat has dried.
N2.6.2.2 Site Painting

Prior to building into the Works any damaged surfaces shall be made good at the Worksite as
described under N2.6.1.
Immediately prior to painting the Contractor shall obtain the Company's approval of the
prepared surface before proceeding with the paint system.
Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, the following paint systems shall
be applied.
Internal Works
- 2 coats of approved alkyd undercoat.
- 1 coat of approved alkyd gloss paint.
External Works
- 2 coat of approved alkyd undercoat.
- 1 coat of approved alkyd gloss paint.
Before applying a subsequent coat the previous coat shall be dry. Any drips, runs and the like
shall be rubbed-down with fine sandpaper and the edges feathered into the surrounding sound
paint. Rubbed-down areas shall be prepared and repainted as described above.
The Company shall approve each coat of paint before the next coat is applied.
Finished surfaces shall be clean, evenly coloured, of constant thickness and free from drips,
runs, bubbles, chips or any other defects, to the Company's approval.
NOTE: The final coat shall be applied when all other construction activities and trades have
been completed and immediately prior to handing over.
Dec 2009 Page 165 SP-1279

N2.7 Staining & Lacquering Of Timber

Timber shall be treated with shop-applied colourless timber preservatives, approved by the
Company, to prevent conditions under which organisms are likely to damage the timber. This
preservative treatment shall not have any adverse effect on the subsequent stain or lacquer.
(For timber preservative and treatment refer to Part J of these Specifications).
Timber shall be brought to an even, silky finish by the use of fine sandpaper. Holes or
unevenness in timber shall be filled with a colour matching filler approved by the Company.
Timber shall be knotted with a resin free knotting compound complying with BS 1336 and
resinous spots removed. Loose knots shall be removed and replaced with solid wood glued
firmly into position with an approved timber adhesive.
Immediately prior to staining or lacquering the Contractor shall obtain the Company's
approval of the prepared surface before proceeding with the staining or lacquering systems.
N2.7.2 Stain & Lacquer Systems

Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, the following stain or lacquer
systems shall be applied.
Internal Works
- 2 coats of approved tinted stain.
- 1 coat of approved lacquer to specified finish.
External Works
- 3 coats of approved tinted stain.
The first coat of stain should be applied in the Workshop and allowed to dry before delivery to
the Worksite.
Any drips, runs and the like shall be rubbed-down with fine sandpaper and the edges feathered
into the surrounding sound surface.
Rubbed-down areas shall be prepared and re-stained or lacquered as described above.
The Company shall approve each coat of lacquer or stain before the next coat is applied.
Finished surfaces shall be clean, evenly textured, of constant thickness and free from drips,
runs, bubbles, chips or any defect to the Company's approval.
NOTE: The final layer of stain or lacquer should be applied when all other construction
activities and trades have been completed and immediately prior to handing over.
N2.8 Painting of Glazing Putty

The surface of glazing putty shall be hard, clean and smooth, and free from any ripples or
indentations.
Immediately prior to painting the Contractor shall obtain the Company's approval of the
prepared surface before proceeding with the painting system.
SP-1279 Page 166 Dec 2009

N2.8.2 Paint System

Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, glazing putty shall be painted with
2 coats of alkyd enamel.
Care shall be taken not to disturb new, soft putty.
N2.9 Painting of Structural Steelwork

All surface preparation, application and inspection methods for painting and coating of
steelwork shall be in accordance with SP 1246. Thickness of paint is given in Dry Film
Thickness (DFT).

Surface to be painted shall be dry and free from burrs, weld spatter, dirt, grease, oil and any
foreign matter, before any paint is applied.
Structural steelwork shall be blast cleaned to SIS 05 5900 Sa 2.5.
Surface preparation shall be executed immediately prior to shop priming and no longer than 4
hours after cleaning. The Contractor shall obtain the Company's approval of the prepared
surface before proceeding with the paint system.
N2.9.2 Paint System
N2.9.2.1 Shop Priming

Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, structural steelwork shall be shop
primed with:
- 1 coat of two component epoxy primer, minimum 50 um DFT.
- 1 intermediate coat of two component epoxy high build, 100 um DFT.
- 1 top coat of two-pack high build aliphatic polyurethane, 50 um DFT.
Application should be by airless spray. If applied by brush, more coats may be required to
obtain the specified thickness.
NOTE
(1) For steelwork that is to be fireproofed, both undercoat and subsequent finishing coats
may be omitted or replaced by a suitable tie coat, as recommended by the Manufacturer
of the fireproofing material.
(2) Galvanised steelwork should not be painted. If galvanised steelwork is specified in the
Contract Document to be painted, then treatment shall be in accordance with Section
N2.10.
(3) Steelwork not exposed to the atmosphere because it will be embedded in concrete shall
not be primed or painted.
Primers exposed longer than 6 months to the atmosphere shall be removed by blast cleaning
before application of the chosen paint system, unless otherwise agreed by the Company.
N2.9.2.2 Site Painting

Any structural steelwork that has not been shop-primed shall be treated as specified in Section
N2.9.2.1. This may be done before or after erection, with the exception of surfaces
inaccessible after erection.
Dec 2009 Page 167 SP-1279

Shop-primed surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned with a degreasing agent and clean fresh
water, and allowed to dry before any further paint is applied.
After erection, any damaged primer coat shall be made good, ensuring overall DFT is
achieved using epoxy based coatings.
The Contractor shall obtain the Company's approval of the primed surface before proceeding
with the finishing coats.
Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, additional coats applied shall
consist of two coats of two component epoxy polyurethane enamel, each a minimum of 30 um
DFT.
Surfaces of steelwork in contact with brick, concrete, plaster, etc, shall not receive additional
coats of epoxy enamel.
The previous coat shall be dry before application of a subsequent coat.
The finished surface shall be clean, evenly coloured, of constant thickness and free from drips,
bubbles, chips or any other defects, to the Company's approval.
N2.9.3 Galvanizing
Galvanising of steel shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. Galvanized surfaces shall
be thoroughly and evenly coated and shall be free from pinholes, lumps of surface galvanizing
materials and other defects.
Minimum weight of zinc shall be 610 g/m2.
Any cutting, drilling and welding after galvanizing shall be allowed only with the approval of
the Company.
All damaged galvanized surfaces and all edges exposed by cutting after galvanizing shall be
treated with two coats of zinc, sprayed in accordance with BS EN ISO 2063. Ends of metal
sections not exceeding 100 mm in length exposed by cutting after galvanizing shall be treated
with two coats of zinc-rich epoxy paints.
N2.10 Painting of Exposed Copper Pipe work & Galvanized Steel

Galvanized steel and copper pipes, including saddles, supports and spacers, shall be cleaned to
remove all grease and foreign matter.
The Contractor shall obtain the Company's approval of the prepared surface before proceeding
with the paint system.
N2.10.2 Paint System

Surfaces shall be primed with:
- 1 coat of two component etch primer (with polyvinyl butryl base) 10 um DFT.
- 1 coat of two component epoxy primer minimum 50 um DFT. (Not required for
Galvanised Steel)
- 1 intermediate coat of two component epoxy high build minimum 50 um DFT.
- 1 coat of two component high build aliphatic polyurethane enamel minimum 50 um

DFT.
SP-1279 Page 168 Dec 2009

N2.11 Coatings For Marine Structures

Unless specified otherwise, coatings for marine structures shall be in accordance with SP-
1246.
N2.12 Painting of Internal Gypsum-Plastered Walls

Plastered walls, to be painted, shall be smooth, clean, dry, and structurally sound, of adequate
strength and free from laitance. Holes shall be filled with an approved filler and rubbed-down
smooth with fine sandpaper.
Plastered surfaces shall not be painted until 4 weeks have elapsed following plaster
application.
The Contractor shall obtain the Company's written approval of the surface before proceeding
with the paint system.

Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, gypsum plastered walls shall be
primed and painted with 2 coats PVA emulsion.
NOTE :In areas subject to condensation, i.e., bathrooms and Kitchens, the emulsion shall be of
a washable moisture-proof quality.
N2.13 Painting of Concrete & Rendered Surfaces

Concrete and rendered surfaces shall be rubbed-down to remove all loose particles. Holes
shall be filled with approved filler. Concrete and rendered surfaces shall be clean, dry, and
structurally sound, of adequate strength and free from laitance.
Rendered surfaces shall not be painted until 4 weeks have elapsed following render
applications.
The Contractor shall obtain Company's written approval of the prepared surface before
proceeding with the paint system.
N2.13.2.1 Internal
Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, internal concrete and rendered
surfaces shall be primed and painted with 2 coats vinyl matt emulsion.
Finished surfaces shall be clear, evenly coloured, of constant thickness and free from drips,
runs, bubbles, chips or any other defect, to the Company's approval.
N2.13.2.2 External
Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, external concrete and rendered
surfaces shall be primed with 1 coat of texture primer and 1 coat of medium textured paint
complying with BS 4764.
Dec 2009 Page 169 SP-1279

Finished surfaces shall be clean, evenly coloured, of constant thickness and free from drips,
N2.14 Application of Flexible Wall Coverings

Plastered walls to receive flexible wall coverings, such as wallpaper, shall be smooth, clean,
dry, and structurally sound, of adequate strength and free from laitance. Holes shall be filled
with an approved filler and rubbed-down smooth with fine sandpaper.
New plasterwork shall be primed and painted with one coat PVA emulsion prior to hanging
flexible wall coverings.
The Contractor shall obtain the Company's approval of the prepared surface prior to
application of the flexible wall covering.
Flexible wall coverings shall not be hung until 4 weeks have elapsed following application of
background surface for gypsum plaster and six months for cement and sand render.
N2.14.2 Application
Flexible wall hangings shall be applied using an adhesive complying with BS 3046.
Manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly adhered to regarding mixing to suit the weight of
the material to be hung.
Hangings shall be applied true and vertical, with edges neatly butted and pattern match
maintained. Tops, bottoms and edges shall be neatly trimmed to adjacent surfaces.
Existing fittings, as described in Section N2.5, shall be removed and the flexible wall hanging
neatly tucked behind fittings.
Finished Work shall be clean, free from surface glue, air bubbles or any other defects
detrimental to the finished appearance, to the approval of the Company.
N2.15 Repainting & Maintenance Of Existing Works

The following Sections relating to repainting and maintenance Works apply to repainting with
paint of same colour and type as that existing. If repainting with a different colour, further
finishing coats may be required to prevent existing paint showing through new paint.
For other general conditions relating to painting and decorating, refer to Sections N2.1 to
N2.12.
N2.15.1 Repainting Timber

Existing interior and exterior works shall be cleaned of all grease, dirt and foreign matter, and
lightly rubbed-down with fine sandpaper.
Loose or flaky paint shall be removed and exposed areas feathered into surrounding sound
paint. Where timber is exposed by rubbing-down procedures, the exposed area shall be
primed then painted with 2 coats alkyd undercoat as specified in Section N2.
Rotten or decayed timber shall be cut away to sound material and new timber glued in place.
This new timber shall be planed and sandpapered flush with surrounding surface and shall be
trimmed, then painted with 2 coats alkyd undercoat.
Holes and cracks shall be filled and rubbed-down with filler approved by the Company.
SP-1279 Page 170 Dec 2009

with the finishing coat.
Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, finish shall comprise of 1 coat of
approved alkyd gloss paint.
Finished surface shall be clean, evenly coloured, of constant thickness and free from drips,
N2.15.2 Re-staining & Re-lacquering Timber

Existing interior and exterior Works shall be cleaned of all grease, dirt and foreign matter and
lightly rubbed-down with fine sandpaper.
Loose or flaky material shall be removed and the exposed areas feathered into the surrounding
sound material.
Where timber is exposed by rubbing-down procedures, exposed areas shall be coated with two
coats of tinted stain approved by the Company.
Rotten or decayed timber shall be cut away to sound material and new timber, of same species
and grade, glued in place. This new timber shall be planed and sandpapered flush with
surrounding surfaces and shall be coated with 2 coats of approved tinted stain.
with the finishing coat.
Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, the finish shall comprise of 1 coat
of approved matt lacquer for interior Works, or 1 coat of approved tinted stain for exterior
Works.
N2.15.3 Repainting Structural Steelwork

Existing steelwork shall be cleaned of all grease dirt and foreign matter.
Loose or flaky paint shall be removed by scraping and exposed areas feathered into the
surrounding sound paint.
Rust shall be removed by scraping, chipping and wire brushing. Grit blasting may be
considered as a suitable alternative only if adequate protection of the surrounding steelwork is
ensured. Surface preparation standard shall meet Sa 1 for hand prepared surfaces and Sa 2.5
for blasted surfaces (SIS 05.5900).
Where the existing paint has not been completely removed, the Contractor shall ensure that
subsequent coats are compatible with the existing coat. It should be noted that an epoxy based
painting system is not compatible with an alkyd based painting system.
For over-coating of inorganic zinc or other porous coatings, a suitable tie or sealer coat shall
be applied.
Where major repainting work is required and the existing paint is alkyd based, then the alkyd-
based system shall be completely removed and the paint system set out in Section N2.9.2
shall be followed.
Exposed steel surfaces shall be primed with 1 coat of two-component epoxy primer, 50 um
DFT.
All primed surfaces and surfaces where top coating has been removed shall be coated with 1
intermediate coat two-component epoxy high build, 100 um DFT.
Dec 2009 Page 171 SP-1279

Unless specified in the Contract Documents to the contrary, the finish coat shall comprise 1
coat two-component epoxy polyurethane enamel, 50 um DFT.
with the subsequent coats.
Finished surfaces shall be clean, evenly coloured and free from drips, bubbles, chips or any
other defects, to the Company's approval.
N2.15.4 Repainting Rendered, Concrete Or Gypsum-Plastered Walls

Exterior surfaces exposed by rubbing-down procedures shall be primed and painted with 1
coat vinyl matt emulsion, complying with BS 4764.
Unless specified in the Contract Document to the contrary, exterior finish coat shall comprise
1 coat vinyl matt emulsion, complying with BS 4764.
Finish surface shall be clean, evenly coloured, of even thickness and free from drips, runs,
bubbles, chips or any other defect, to the Company's approval.
N2.16 Inspection & Records

For paint inspection methods refer to SP 1246 part 4.
Inspection during painting and coating work generally shall consist of, but not be limited to
- Testing environmental conditions.
- Checking paint supplies, storage and use.
- Visual inspection of surface preparation.
- Visual inspection of coating finish and appearances.
- Measuring coating DFTs.
- Checking safety standards.
The Contractor shall keep records of conditions and work progress, as required, according to
SP 1246 Part 4, and submit the relevant sheets to the Company.
N3.0 Appendix
ITP No: SP-1279-N-001: Paint Material and Paint Application
SP-1279 Page 172 Dec 2009

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Painting and Decorating Version 1.0
ITP No: SP-1279-N-001: Paint Material and Paint Application
Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Controlling Conducte Number of Tests Acceptance Criteria Remarks
Materials Document d by (min)
Paint material Visual observation for Delivery Notes/ Invoices OR CSR Each This Chapter
Content description Suppliers’ certificate , Content Consignment
Description on containers
Verification for Delivery Notes/ Invoices OR CSR Each Should match with paint system
Applicability for Suppliers’ certificate , Content Consignment described in relevant clause in this
specific purpose Description on containers Chapter OR design drawings and project
specifications
Verification Paints should be from Approved CSR Each PGSC (Product Group Service Code)
Vendors as per latest PGSC Consignment List (Latest)
(Product Group Service Code) list
Surface Visual Observation Comparison with standard surface Contractor Random Sample Relevant surface preparation clause in
Preparation and touch for Surface preparation description in 1279N & CSR surfaces this Chapter
preparation
For structural steel surface finish should
be Sa 2.5 or equivalent as per 7.3 table 1
of SP 1246 Part 4
Paint Visual Observation Visual observation Contractor All surfaces Finish surface shall be clean, evenly
Application & CSR coloured, of constant thickness and free
from drips, runs, bubbles, chips or any
other defects
Verification Contractor’s daily painting record as Contractor Measurment of SP-1279-N Cl 2.3 and Cl 2.16
per Appendix B SP 1246 Part 4 & CSR Temperature , Rel
Humidity at 3 hrs
interval for record
Dec2009 Page 173 SP-1279-N

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Fencing & Gates
Chapter – P
Fencing & Gates
Dec 2009 Page 174 SP-1279

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Fencing & Gates Version 2.0
P1.0 Introduction
P1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes the Version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part P Civil & Building
Construction Specifications – ‘Fencing & Gates’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the
P1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

P1.2.1 PDO Standards

SP-1231 : Health, Safety & Environmental Specification (Occupational
Health).
SP-1273 : Specification for Civil & Buildings – Standard Drawings Index
SP-1275 : Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
PGSC(Product : List of Approved Vendors for Materials & Equipments for Civil
Group Service Products.
Code)
CP-122 : Code of Practice for Health, Safety and Environmental Protection
P1.2.2 International Standards

BS EN ISO 1461 : Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings on Fabricated Iron and Steel
Articles. Fabrication & Test Methods
BS EN 10025 : Hot Rolled products of Non-Alloy Structural Steels. Technical

Delivery Conditions.
BS EN 10029 : Specification for Tolerance on Dimensions, Shape & Mass for Hot
Rolled Steel Plates 3mm thick or above.
BS EN 10056 : Specification for Structural Steel Equal & Un-Equal Angles.
BS EN 10067 : Hot Rolled Bulb Flats. Dimension & Tolerance on Shape,

Dimensions and Mass.
BS EN 10113 : Hot Rolled Products in Weldable Fine Grain Structural Steels.
BS EN 10137 : Plates & Wide Flats made on High Yield Strength Structural
Steels in the Quenched & Tempered or Precipitation Hardened
conditions. General Delivery conditions.
BS EN 10155 : Structural Steels with improved atmospheric Corrosion resistance.

Technical delivery conditions.
SP 1279 Page 175 Dec 2009

BS EN 10210 : Hot Finished Structural Hollow Sections of Non Alloy & Fine
Grain Structural Steels. .
BS EN 10219 : Cold Formed Welded Structural Sections of Non-Alloy & Fine

Grain Steels.
BS EN 10223 : Steel wire and wire products for fences.
BS 1722 : Specification for Fences
BS 4102 : Steel Wire for Fences.
BS 7668 : Specification for Weldable Structural Steels. Hot Finished

Structural Hollow Sections in Weather Resistant Steels.
ASTM F567 : Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence
ASTM F626 : Standard Specification for Fence Fittings
ASTM F668 : Standard Specification for PVC and other organic polymer coated
steel chain-link fence fabric.
ASTM F1043 : Standard Specification for Strength & Protective Coatings on

metal industrial Chain-Link fence frame work
P1.2.3 SIEP / Shell GSI Standards

DEP 34.13.20.31-Gen. : Technical Specification – Roads, Paving, Surfacing, Slope
Protection & Fencing
P1.3 Compliance with Standards

P1.4 Product / Asset Warranty

The entire Fencing & Gate Works, executed under a particular contract, shall be guaranteed to
meet the specified technical specifications and its referred standards & specifications.
Any defects, identified within the maintenance period (maintenance period may be, as per the
contract or a minimum of one year), have to be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his
own cost.
Dec 2009 Page 176 SP-1279

P2.0 Scope
P2.1 General
This specification contains the minimum requirements for design and installation of
permanent Fencing & Gates. This specification does not cover the special security measures
like cameras, special fencing system, security guards etc. The design of temporary fencing &
site hoardings are not included and shall be agreed with the requirements of Company for a
particular contract.
This specification shall be read in conjunction with particular specifications of a particular

contract.
P2.2 Materials
The Contractor shall supply and fix all materials for fencing and gates from a source, approved
by the Company, known to produce materials complying with this Specification and the
Contract documents.
Particulars relating to materials complying with this Specification shall be clearly indicated on
the delivery note, invoice, or Supplier’s certificate supplied with each consignment of
materials, and shall include:
- Name, trademark or other means of identification of the Manufacturer.
- Statement of Compliance with the relevant Specification and test results.
The material selection shall be based on local availability, minimum maintenance and
economic. Materials shall be durable in view of the climatic conditions, soil conditions. Etc.
P2.3 Fencing System

A system of fencing and gates shall be installed to protect the facilities and to prevent the
unauthorised entries in to the site. The system may consist of single or double fences as
required.
The fencing system shall consist of the following components.
- Fence Posts
- Chain Link Fencing Mesh
- Tension or Stirrup Wire
- Tying Wire
- Barbed Wire
- Fittings
- Gates
General details of the Fencing System are shown in Figure 1.
SP 1279 Page 177 Dec 2009

Figure 1: General Fencing Details
P2.4 Fencing Components

Fencing components shall comply with the relevant standards and specifications as detailed
below:
P2.4.1 Fence Posts

Where specified in the Contract documents as high or medium security fencing, fence posts
shall consist of mild steel angles complying with BS EN 10056 Specification for Structural
Steel Equal & Unequal Angles and other appropriate documents listed in section P1.2.2.
Holes to receive tension wires, barbed wire and fittings shall be drilled to the specified
diameters and painted in accordance with Chapter N of this Specification. Heating to form
holes and cutting shall not be permitted.
Where specified in the Contract documents residential or for general use, fence posts shall
consist of mild steel circular hollow sections that shall comply with BS EN 10219 Cold
formed welded structural section of non-alloy and fine grain steels and other appropriate
documents listed in section P1.2.2. Exposed ends of tubular hollow sections shall be capped
with press-fit galvanised steel caps.
All fence posts shall be in continuous un spliced lengths to specified heights, except for
cranked top that shall be welded with a 6 mm continuous fillet weld.
All fence posts shall be painted or galvanised, as specified in the Contract documents, in
accordance with Chapter N of this Specification.
Dec 2009 Page 178 SP-1279

P2.4.2 Chain Link Fencing Mesh

Where specified, in the Contract documents, as high security fencing, chain link fencing mesh
shall consist of 3.55 mm mild steel wire mesh, olive green plastic, coated to 4.75 mm overall
diameter, of standard mesh size 50 x 50 mm, to specified height, and complying to BS 1722
and BS 4102 or BS EN 10223 as listed in section 1.2.2.
Where specified, in the Contract documents, as medium security fencing, chain link fencing
mesh shall consist of 3.00 mm mild steel wire mesh, olive green plastic, coated to 4.00 mm
overall diameter, of standard mesh size 50 x 50 mm, to specified height, and complying to BS
1722 and BS 4102/ BS EN 10223 as listed in section 1.2.2.
Where specified, in the Contract documents, as residential or for general use fencing, chain
link fencing shall consist of 2.5 mm mild steel wire mesh, olive green plastic coated to 3.55
mm overall diameter, of standard mesh size 50 x 50 mm, to specified height, and complying to
BS 1722 and BS 4102/ BS EN 10223 as listed in section 1.2.2.
P2.4.3 Tension or Stirrup Wires

Where specified in the Contract documents as high or medium security fencing, tension or
stirrup wires shall consist of 3.55 mm mild steel wire, olive green plastic coated to 4.75 mm
overall diameter, and complying to BS 4102/ BS EN 10223.
Where specified in the Contract documents as residential or for general use, tension or stirrup
wires shall consist of 2.5 mm mild steel wire, olive green plastic coated to 3.55 mm overall
diameter, and complying to BS 4102/ BS EN 10223.
Where specified in the Contract documents as lagoon fencing, tension or stirrup wire shall
consist of 2.25 mm mild steel wire, olive green plastic coated to 3.15 mm diameter and
complying with to BS 4102/ BS EN 10223.
P2.4.4 Tying Wire

Tying wire, the wire that ties the chain link fencing mesh to the tension/stirrup wires, shall
consist of 1.4 mm mild steel wire, olive green plastic coated to 2 mm overall diameter, and
complying with to BS 4102/ BS EN 10223.
P2.4.5 Barbed Wire

Barbed wire shall consist of 3 strings of 12 SWG double strand barbed wire, with 4 point-
barbs set at 75 mm spacing, and complying with to BS 4102/ BS EN 10223.
P2.4.6 Fittings
Fittings, such as bolts, nuts, screws, washers, eyebolts, strainers, ring nuts, stretcher bars,
staples, droppers, hook bolts, etc, shall be galvanised in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461 Hot
Dip Galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles – Specification and test methods.
Bolts, nuts and screws shall comply with BS 4190.
P2.5 Fence Types

Standard Fence types and its usages for the Company facilities are listed below in Table P1.
The selection of fencing system (other than the specified) shall be based on the security risk
for a particular site.
SP 1279 Page 179 Dec 2009

Table P1: Standard Fences
Standard Fence Usage

Drawing No. Type
STD 2 1600 001 A High Security Perimeter Fencing.
STD 2 1601 001 B Medium Security Fencing or compound Fencing

within High Security Fencing.
STD 2 1602 001 C Residential Compounds and General Use.
STD 2 1603 001 D Airstrip Perimeter Fencing.
STD 2 1604 001 E Removable Wellhead Fencing.
STD 2 1605 001 F Isotope Storage Pit Fencing
STD 2 1606 01 G Lagoon and Sewage Pond Fencing
P2.6 Gates
Standard gates and its details are available for the Company facilities. Standard Gate types,
appropriate fence type for these gates and its usages are listed in Table P2:
Gate frames and post shall be of welded construction and fabricated from MS tubular hollow
sections complying with BS EN 10219. Mesh covering shall comply with BS 1722 and to BS
4102/ BS EN 10223. Barbed wire shall comply with to BS 4102/ BS EN 10223.
P2.7 Functional & Design Requirements

Fence design shall comply with BS 1722 and other appropriate standards referenced therein.
The Fencing system shall be designed to withstand any loads like strong wind storm wind
loads, thermal movements from the climatic conditions etc. The vertical part of the fence, the
gap between the fence and the ground, foundation for the fence post, wind-bracing
requirements etc for all types of fences shall be in accordance with the relevant standard
details as listed in Table P1.
Gate shall be an integral part of the fence and shall be designed similar like fences, e.g.,
height, strength etc. The number of gates shall be minimum.
Graded surface shall have a minimum shoulder of 1m from the centre line of fencing or 0.5 m
from the fence foundation to the edge of the graded surface.
Metal parts except the chain link fabric, shall not be in contact with the soil.
Refer Table P2 for Standard Gates, and suitable fencing types.
Dec 2009 Page 180 SP-1279

Table P2: Standard Gates
Standard Gate Usage Fence

Drawing No. Type Type
STD 2 1625 001 1 9 m wide double perimeter gates to high security areas A
with road width in excess of 5 m.
STD 2 1625 003 3 9 m wide double perimeter gates to medium security areas B
with road widths in excess of 5 m.
STD 2 1625 005 5 6 m wide double perimeter gates to high security areas A
with road widths up to 5 m.
STD 2 1625 007 7 6 m wide double perimeter gates to medium security areas B
with road widths up to 5 m.
STD 2 1625 008 8 3 m wide double perimeter gates. G
STD 2 1625 009 9 9 m wide double perimeter gates (incorporating personnel A

wicket gate) to high security areas with road width in
excess of 5 m.
STD 2 1625 010 10 9 m wide double perimeter gates (incorporating personnel B

wicket gate) to medium security areas with widths in
excess of 5 m.
STD 2 1625 011 11 Wicket gate with outside lock. For use with Gate Type 9. A
STD 2 1625 012 12 Wicket gate with outside lock. For use with Gate Type 10. B
STD 2 1625 015 15 Wicket gate with inside lock. For use with Gate Type 9. A
STD 2 1625 016 16 Wicket gate with inside lock. For use with Gate Type 10. B
STD 2 1625 017 17 Personnel gate with inside lock. A
STD 2 1625 018 18 Personnel gate with inside lock B
STD 2 1625 019 19 Personnel gate with outside lock A
STD 2 1625 020 20 Personnel gate with outside lock B
STD 2 1625 021 21 Personnel escape gate For use in sour gas areas. A
STD 2 1625 022 22 Personnel escape gate For use in sour gas areas. B
STD 2 1625 023 23 Personnel gate with lock accessible both sides. C
STD 2 1625 024 24 Personnel gate with lock accessible both sides. G
STD 2 1625 025 25 6 m wide double perimeter gate. D
STD 2 1625 026 26 1 m wide single perimeter gate D
SP 1279 Page 181 Dec 2009

P2.8 Installation
P2.8.1 Setting Out
The Contractor shall mark-out on the ground positions of all fence and gateposts for the
Company's approval prior to commencing excavation.
Survey pins, benchmarks, etc, coinciding with the fence line, shall not be disturbed. When
such a situation occurs where the fence line coincides with a survey pin or benchmark, the
Contractor shall move the fence line after obtaining the Company's approval for the new line.
P2.8.2 Excavation & Buried Services

Before commencing excavation work the Contractor shall obtain a compulsory Excavation
Permit, from the Company. Having ascertained the existence or possible existence of live
services, the Contractor shall be held liable for any damage caused during the course of the
excavation Works.
Instructions on the Excavation Permit shall be strictly adhered to.
The Contractor shall keep the Excavation Permit securely on the Worksite for inspection by
the Company.
The Contractor shall excavate, by hand, any trial excavations deemed necessary for locating
the position of existing under ground buried services.
When in the course of excavation the Contractor encounters existing buried services or any
other obstructions he shall immediately seek instruction from the Company as to his course of
action. Services or other obstruction shall be physically and visibly marked at surface level.
Positions of existing buried services or other obstructions, where specified in the Contract
Documents, are not guaranteed as to accuracy and/or completeness, and the Contractor shall
verify their positions by careful hand excavation before commencing the Works.
The Contractor shall maintain and protect buried services affected by the excavations.
P2.8.3 Foundations
Concrete foundations with surface protection shall be cast to the size and specification shown
in the Contract Documents. Where the concrete type is not specified in the Contract
Documents, Grade 35 should be used. For concrete works refer to Chapter D of this
Specification.
P2.8.4 Erection
Fencing shall be erected in accordance with the recommendations of BS 1722 and to details
shown on PDO Standard Drawings listed in Tables P1 & P2.
Straining posts shall be installed at every change in direction of fence line at fence posts
adjacent to gateposts and at maximum spacing of 30 m in straight fences. Intermediate posts
shall not exceed 3 m spacing.
P2.9 Workmanship
Work of erecting fencing and gates shall be carried out to present on completion the fence is
true, aligned with vertical posts and with correctly tensioned and attached mesh.
P2.10 Protection
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect fences and gates from damage
due to subsequent construction activities.
Dec 2009 Page 182 SP-1279

Any damage caused due to such activities shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's
expense and to the Company's approval.
P2.11 Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

ITP shall cover as a minimum the following:
- Fences & Gates
Requirements of the Inspection Test Plan are given in Appendix. Additional Testing
P3.0 Appendix
ITP No: SP-1279-P-001 – Fencing & Gates
SP 1279 Page 183 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-P-001 – Fencing & Gates

Materials & Workmanship
Fencing Mesh, Wires, Visual Verification of Records Contractor/ CSR Each Consignment Section P2.2 See note 1
Fittings, Fence Posts
& Gates Corrosion & Straightness Contractor/ CSR Each Consignment Section P2.4 & P2.5 See note 1
Setting Out Work Visual Survey Contractor/CSR Each side Section P2.8.1
Excavation & Excavation Permit Contractor / CSR Every day Section P2.8.2
Underground Services
Earth Works Chapter C for ITP
Foundation Concrete Chapter D for ITP
Erection Verification of Straining & BS 1722 & to BS 4102/ Contractor/CSR Random Section P2.8.4 & See note 3
Intermediate Post BS EN 10223 Contract document
Alignment & Tensioning BS 1722 & to BS 4102/ Contractor/CSR Random Section P2.8.4 &
of mesh BS EN 10223 Contract document
Note: 1. Contractor shall submit a test certificate from the Manufacturer / Supplier to prove the requirements as stated in section P2.4.1 to P2.4.6. The
test certificate shall cover the complete test results.
2. Company shall instruct a complete or part of the tests in case of doubt arises about its test results or may reject the consignment.
3. Refer Section P1.2.2 for the equivalent ASTM standards.
Dec 2009 Page 184 SP-1279

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Landscaping Works Version 2.0
Chapter – Q
Landscaping Works
SP 1279 Page 185 Dec 2009

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Landscaping Works
Q1.0 Introduction
Q1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes the Version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part Q Civil & Building
Construction Specifications – Landscaping’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the
The user may refer the schedule of plants as given in Appendix-A for the plant selection.
Q1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

Q1.2.1 PDO Standards

SP-1285 Chapter C : Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – ‘Plumbing
Works’
PGSC (Product : List of Approved Vendors for Materials & Equipments

Group Service
Code)
SP-1231 : Health, Safety & Environment Specification (Occupational

Health)

Protection
Q1.2.2 International Standards

BS EN 771 : Specification for masonry units
BS EN 772 : Methods of test for masonry unit
BS EN 12579 : Soil Improvers & Growing Media – Sampling
BS EN 12580 : Soil Improvers & Growing Media – Determination of a

Quantity
BS EN 13037 : Soil Improvers & Growing Media – Determination of PH
BS EN 13038 : Soil Improvers & Growing Media – Determination of

Electrical Conductivity
BS EN 13039 : Soil Improvers & Growing Media - Determination of organic

matter content & ash
BS EN 13040 : Soil Improvers & Growing Media – Sampling preparation for

chemical & physical tests.
Dec 2009 Page 186 SP 1279

BS EN 13041 : Soil Improvers & Growing Media – Determination of

physical properties
BS EN 13535 : Fertilizers
BS 3882 : Recommendations and Classification for Top Soil
BS 3936 : Nursery Stock
BS 3998 : Recommendations for Tree Work.
BS 4428 : Recommendations for General Landscape Operations

(Excluding Hard Surfaces).
BS 4043 : Recommendations for transplanting root balled trees.
Q1.3 Compliance with Standards

be advised in writing to the custodian.
Q1.4 Product / Asset Warranty

The entire Landscaping Works, executed under a particular contract, shall be guaranteed to
meet the specified technical specifications and its referred standards & specifications.
Any defects, identified within the maintenance period (as per the contract), have to be
replaced or replanted by the Contractor at his own cost.
SP 1279 Page 187 Dec 2009

Q2.0 Scope
Q2.1 General
This document contains specification and Recommendations for the planting materials and
landscaping soils. This Specification shall also brief the testing requirements, Schedule of
Plants etc., for the Landscaping works.
Q2.2 Schedule & Method

The Contractor shall submit, in writing, to the Company, full details of construction plant,
methods of working and schedule proposals prior to commencement of the Work. Work shall
not commence until the Company has approved the submissions.
The Company shall be afforded access during working hours of plant manufacturing materials
for hard landscaping and to the nursery supplying plants for soft landscaping.
Q2.3 Materials & Plants for Landscaping

The Contractor shall supply materials and plants for landscaping from a source, approved by
the Company, known to produce materials and plants complying with this Specification, and
as specified in the Contract documents.
Particulars relating to materials and plants supplied in accordance with this Specification shall
be clearly marked on the delivery note, invoice or Supplier’s certificates provided with each
consignment, and shall include:
- Name, trademark or other means of identification of manufacturer or source of

material / plants.
- Genus or species of plant.
- Size of material.
- Type of material.
- Statement of compliance with relevant specification.
Q2.4 Testing
The Contractor shall arrange for physical and chemical testing of the existing soil in proposed
planting areas and of the sweet soil, all by an independent analyst approved by the Company.
The analyst shall make a report, including any recommendations for fertilizers, organic
additives etc, necessary to give a soil mix capable of supporting good plant growth, assuming
the existing soil and imported sweet soil are mixed in equal proportions.
The Contractor shall submit all reports, to the Company, at least 4 working days before
commencing planting works.
Q2.5 Excavation
Q2.5.1 Excavation Permits
All Earthworks shall be carried out in accordance with the Chapter C of this specification.
Before commencing excavation work the Contractor shall obtain a compulsory Excavation
Dec 2009 Page 188 SP 1279

Permit from the Company. Having ascertained the existence or possible existence of live
services, the Contractor shall be held liable for any damage caused during the course of the
excavation Works.
Instructions on the Excavation Permit shall be strictly adhered to.
The Contractor shall keep the Excavation Permit securely on the Worksite for inspection by
the Company.
Q2.5.2 Buried Services

The Contractor shall excavate, by hand, any trial excavations deemed necessary for locating
the position of existing under ground buried services.
When in the course of excavation the Contractor encounters existing buried services or any
other obstructions he shall immediately seek instruction from the Company as to his course of
action. Services or other obstruction shall be physically and visibly marked at surface level.
Positions of existing buried services or other obstructions, where specified in the Contract
documents, are not guaranteed as to accuracy and/or completeness, and the Contractor shall
verify their positions by careful hand excavation before commencing the Works.
The Contractor shall maintain and protect buried services affected by the excavations.
Q2.6 Hard Landscaping

Q2.6.1 Paved Areas
Where specified in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall lay paved areas to the
specified length, width and thickness.
Paved areas include but are not limited to :-
- Pre-cast Concrete Paving and Kerbstones.
- In-situ Concrete Paving.
- Brick Paving.
- Asphalt Paving.
For paved areas refer to Chapter R of this Specification.
Q2.6.2 Dwarf Walls & Planters

Where specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall construct dwarf walls,
(including planters) to the specified lengths, widths and height.
Where specified in the Contract Documents as block work walls, the blocks should be non-
load bearing.
Blocks shall be laid in stretcher bond solidly bedded and jointed with mortar.
For block work refer to Chapter E of this specification.
For wall finishing refer to Chapter M of this specification.
Block work walls shall be constructed on mass concrete foundations to the size and depth
specified on the Contract Drawings.
SP 1279 Page 189 Dec 2009

For Concrete works refer to Chapter D of this specification
Where specified in the Contract documents, random stonewalling shall be constructed on a

mass concrete foundation. Random stonewall shall comprise of blast-rock or selected wadi
stone approved by the Company of between 100 mm to 300 mm diameter solidly bedded in
mortar. Cement/sand 1:6 mix for pointing shall be recessed 10 mm from finished stone face.
Inside faces of planters shall be sealed with a waterproofing membrane approved by the
Company. Drainage holes shall be provided in base of walls to permit egress of water.
Planters shall not be constructed against walls of buildings.
Where specified in the Contract documents, copings shall be manufactured in accordance with
BS EN 771 & BS EN 772 with drip mouldings formed on the underside. Copings shall be
fixed to the wall with concealed galvanised steel cramps and bedded in mortar. The
Contractor shall propose method of fixing for the Company's approval prior to commencing
the Works.
Q2.6.3 Gravel Mulch

Where specified in the Contract Documents, gravel mulch shall be crushed stone, clean and
free from sand, clay and foreign matter. Gravel mulch shall be spread evenly over all planted
area to a depth of 75 mm. The stones shall be grey in colour, angular and graded as follows.
15 mm diameter : 10%
15 - 25 mm diameter : 40%
Q2.6.4 Wadi Boulders

Where specified in the Contract documents, wadi boulders shall be laid to give informal
mounds of stones, to the approval of the Company. All wadi boulders shall be well-rounded,
clean and cover a colour range from white to sandy with a few darker shades. Where
specified, small wadi boulders shall be graded as follows.
80 - 115 mm diameter : 40%
110 - 140 mm diameter : 30%
Where specified in the Contract documents, large wadi boulders shall be graded as follows.
140 - 300 mm diameter: : 40%
300 - 600 mm diameter : 40%
600 mm diameter : 20%
Q2.6.5 Individual Boulders

Where specified in the Contract documents, individual boulders shall be well-rounded, clean
and of attractive shape and colour, to the Company's approval.
Dec 2009 Page 190 SP 1279

Q2.6.6 Rip Rap

Where specified in the Contract documents, rip rap for embankment protection shall be single-
size stone, comprising crushed rock or boulders of nominal size 450 mm, 250 mm or 150 mm.
Grouted rip-rap shall be a single layer of such stones set in and surrounded with mass
concrete.
Q2.7 Soft Landscaping

Q2.7.1 Site Clearance
Prior to planting the Contractor shall remove all wind-blown and fly-tipped refuse off the
Worksite and remove to a tip approved by the Company.
Surplus soil from all excavations should be spread and levelled on the Worksite, as directed by
the Company. Any material not required for spreading on the Worksite shall be removed to a
tip approved by the Company.
Q2.7.2 Existing Vegetation
Q2.7.2.1 Replanting
WARNING: IT IS AN OFFENCE UNDER THE LAWS OF THE SULTANATE OF
OMAN TO UPROOT OR DESTROY ANY MATURE TREES.
The Contractor shall excavate any plants or bushes and replant on the Worksite or elsewhere
as directed by the Company. Excavation shall be performed so as not to damage root
formations. Plants and bushes shall be replanted in sweet soil and kept adequately watered and
protected for the Contract period.
Q2.7.2.2 Plant Protection

The Contractor shall protect, against damage, any plants, trees or bushes on the Worksite for
the Contract period, which shall also include watering.
Any plants, trees or bushes damaged due to subsequent construction activities shall be
replaced at Contractor's expense.
Q2.7.3 Site Preparation

The Contractor shall excavate to specified depth and dispose of subsoil. Bottoms of
excavations shall be broken-up to a minimum depth of 150 mm.
Unless stated otherwise, minimum size of excavation shall be as follows.
Tree Stations : 1000 mm dia. x 600 mm deep below finished ground level
Shrub Beds : 1000 mm dia. x 450 mm deep
Ground Cover Beds : 300 mm deep
Q2.7.4 Soil Preparation

Excavated material required for backfilling round plants and trees shall be passed through a 13
mm sieve. Any material retained on 13mm sieve shall not be used for backfill.
Sieved excavated material shall be mixed with sweet sand in proportions of 1:1
After the sieved excavated material and sweet sand have been thoroughly mixed, additives,
approved by the Company, shall be incorporated in the mix.
SP 1279 Page 191 Dec 2009

Q2.7.5 Plants
Plants shall be both genus/species and sizes specified in the Contract documents. Substitution
shall not be made without the Company's approval.
Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions substantially similar to those prevailing at the
Worksite. Plants originating from outside the Sultanate of Oman shall be delivered to the
Worksite as soon as possible after arrival in the Sultanate.
The Contractor shall ensure that all plants imported into the Sultanate of Oman that are to be
used in the Works have passed the quarantine regulations of the Sultanate, and the Contractor
shall furnish the Company with the appropriate certificates of quarantine.
Plants shall have been grown in suitable pots, incorporating drainage holes. Compost used in
pots shall contain 75% local sweet sand. Container-grown plants shall not be root-bound.
All plants shall have fibrous root systems, carefully preserved in good condition and protected
in transit. On delivery to the Worksite, trees, plants and shrubs shall be free from pests and
disease, and shall be materially undamaged.
Palms shall be of sufficient hardiness, with a well-developed root system and healthy fronds.
Height of palms shall be measured from ground level to the base of the first frond.
Palms shall be root-pruned one year before removal, the pruning trench backfilled with wet
peat and the tree sprayed with anti-desiccant. Before transporting, palm trees shall be tied with
burlap to cover upper trunk and growing tip.
All plants, trees and shrubs shall be clearly labelled with plastic labels stating genus and
species, securely fixed to each plant before delivery to the Worksite.
Upon arrival at the Worksite all trees and shrubs shall be planted in their respective positions
without delay. On no account shall roots be exposed to wind or sun, except during actual
planting operations.
All pots shall be removed prior to planting.
Unless otherwise agreed, planting shall take place only during the months of October through
to February.
Q2.7.6 Tree Stakes, Ties & Guys

Tree stakes shall be best quality redwood free of knots, shakes, splits or warps, 50 mm x 50
mm x 3000 mm long, pointed at one end, and driven 800 mm into the ground. The lower
1000 mm shall be immersed in a non-toxic fungicide/insecticide two weeks prior to
installation.
Backfill material shall be thoroughly watered two days before installation of stakes and
planting.
Stakes shall be slightly off-centre and positioned prior to tree planting. They shall be securely
driven into the ground to avoid any damage to roots.
Pins for trailing stems shall be 2 mm gauge galvanised wire, 200 mm long and bent to a
hairpin pattern.
Ties, complete with spacers, shall be of an approved plastic or rubber type, with a minimum of
three ties to each stake.
Guys for palms shall be 3 in number for each plant galvanised steel 10 gauge 7- strand wire
ropes, set out at 120o around the stem, 1200 mm above ground level. The wire shall be
Dec 2009 Page 192 SP 1279

looped around the stem, which shall be protected by a neoprene tube. Wires shall be connected
via a galvanised steel turnbuckle to a 10 mm diameter mild steel rod ground anchor, 1000 mm
long. The ground anchor shall be driven in at an angle of 45o and flush with the ground
surface, at 1000 mm from the trunk.
Q2.7.7 General Planting

At each backfilled area a central hole shall be carefully excavated, using an appropriate hand
trowel. Holes shall be of the same overall dimensions as the pots for the plants.
Plants and shrubs shall be removed from their pots with minimum disturbance. This can be
best accomplished by watering one hour before removal.
Immediately following planting light, careful consolidation, by trampling, should be applied to

backfilled material to ensure contact with plant and shrub roots and their soil.
Organic mulch shall be applied to all areas of planting within one month of planting.
The Contractor shall execute all planting in accordance with good accepted practice, and shall
be deemed to have included for any specialist planting requirements, including spraying with
anti desiccant, special protection of root ball and foliage, over and above those outlined in this
Specification and as necessary for the plant species specified in the Contract Documents.
Q2.7.8 Replacement Plants

The Contractor shall replace, at his own expense, any tree, plant or shrub that dies, or is not in
a healthy condition during the maintenance period.
Trees, plants or shrubs vandalised, or that die for any reason outside the control of the
Contractor, shall be replaced by the Contractor at the rates agreed in the Contract, at the
earliest favourable planting conditions, on receipt of a written agreement from the Company
that the extra cost will be allowed.
Q2.7.9 Watering
The irrigation system should be installed and commissioned before the execution of planting
Works. If the irrigation system is not in operation, or not called for in the Contract documents,
then the Contractor shall ensure that each tree, plant or shrub receives sufficient fresh water,
within two hours of planting, followed by watering every day for a period of one week.
After initial watering the Contractor shall ensure that adequate watering is supplied to plants
until the irrigation system is commissioned and operated on a regular basis.
Q2.7.10 Tree Planting

Planting work shall not be executed until the position, has been approved by the Company.
Trees shall not be planted within a minimum distance of 4 m from a building.
The Contractor shall supply and plant trees as specified in the Contract documents from
advanced nursery stock within the prepared soil.
Within the tree planting station, trees shall be planted in excavated pits to dimensions 400 mm
greater in diameter and 200 mm greater in depth than the spread of the roots. In no case shall
pits be less than 600 mm in depth.
Trees shall be positioned upright in the centre of the pit close to the lee side of the stake, so
that the nursery mark is at finished ground level. The prepared backfill soil shall be carefully
packed around and below roots, so that all voids are filled. The Contractor shall supply and
incorporate an approved compound fertiliser for each tree pit and carefully compact soil.
SP 1279 Page 193 Dec 2009

The Contractor shall secure each tree to its stake. Ties shall be spaced 400 mm above ground
level, at mid-height and 150 mm below the top of each stake.
Palms shall be stabilised with guys.
Trunk burlap, frond wrapping and dead fronds shall be removed from palm trees after fronds
become turgid or when new growth indicates recovery.
The Contractor shall prune-back to stem any damaged branches, treating cuts with an organic
sealing compound approved by the Company.
Q2.7.11 Shrub & Ground Cover

The Contractor shall supply and plant shrubs and ground cover plants as specified in the
Contract documents, within the prepared soil. When firmed, the nursery mark shall be level
with the finished soil level. Any roots accidentally broken-off or frayed shall be cleanly cut
from the plant and the cut face shall be coated with an organic sealing compound approved by
the Company. Shrub roots shall be thoroughly soaked with fresh water prior to planting.
Fertiliser shall be added to the soil during backfilling of shrub pits.
Q2.7.12 Climbers
The Contractor shall supply and plant climbing plants as described in the Contract documents
within the prepared soil.
Climbing plants, adjacent to walls, shall be provided with a framework of securely-fixed

supporting wires, extending horizontally to a width of 1200 mm (i.e., 600 mm either side of
the plant), and vertically from 200 mm above soil level to 200 mm below the top of the
supporting wall.
Q2.7.13 Planting Beds Adjacent to Buildings

Planting beds shall not be laid adjacent to buildings where the existing ground soil report
indicates a high proportion of silts.
Sweet sand, gravel mulch and the like shall not be laid higher than 100 mm below the damp-
proof course in the wall.
Q2.8 Irrigation System

Where specified in the Contract documents the Contractor shall supply and install a complete
drip-feed irrigation system.
The irrigation system should be installed and commissioned before execution of planting
Works. For irrigation work refer to SP 1285 Chapter C of Specification for Civil & Buildings
Services.
Q2.9 Maintenance
The Contractor shall maintain all plants and planted areas when the Works, has been approved
by the Company. Maintenance shall continue for a period as specified in the Contract
documents, during which time the operations that shall be performed at regular intervals by
the Contractor are, but not limited to:
- Stakes and ties inspected monthly, and ties adjusted as necessary. Damaged stakes or
ties replaced.
- Trees firmed up, re-staked and retied, as necessary.
- Monthly clearing of all weeds and unwanted growth within the planted area.
Dec 2009 Page 194 SP 1279

- All trees, plants, shrubs and climbers inspected monthly for damaged branches and
such damage cut away. At the same time all pruning required to maintain or
encourage growth, slopes and spreading, trailing or climbing habit, as necessary.
- All debris arising from pruning, weeding, etc, shall be cleaned from the Worksite to
a tip approved by the Company.
- Three months after planting all plant shrubs and planting areas shall receive a liberal
dressing of slow release granular fertiliser.
- Eight months after planting, all trees, plants and shrubs shall be mulched with dried
sewage sludge applied at the rate of 2 kg for each plant.
On completion of the Works and prior to the maintenance period the Contractor shall submit
to he Company a programme of maintenance work for approval.
The Contractor shall give the Company 2 working days notice of his proposed visit to the
Worksite to execute maintenance during the maintenance period.
Q2.10 Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

ITP shall cover as a minimum of the following Inspection and Testing of:
- Earthwork for Hard & Soft Landscaping
- Verification of Plants & seeds origin, Growth, defects if any,
- Verification of planting methods etc.,
Requirements of the Inspection Test Plan are given in Appendix-B. Additional Testing
Q2.11 Supervision
Q2.11.1 Contractor’s Supervisor
Landscaping Works shall be employed by the Contractor on the Worksite and shall directly
supervise all Landscaping works.
Q2.11.2 Company Inspection

The Contractors shall give at least one working day's notice, to the Company Site
Representative, so that he may inspect the following:
- Underground services
- Backfill of Foundations, Completed earthworks for landscaping, etc.,
- Hard &soft landscaping works
Contractor to continue with the next sequence of the work. Such permission will not relief the
the Contract and Specifications.
See also Inspection Test Plan in Appendix-B
SP 1279 Page 195 Dec 2009

Q3.0 Appendices
Appendix Q1: Tables - Schedules of Plants
Appendix Q2: Inspection Test Plan (ITP)
Dec 2009 Page 196 SP 1279

Q3.1 Appendix Q1: Tables - Schedules of Plants

The following Tables indicate sizes of plants together with guidelines for planting.
Table Q1 : Large Trees
Table Q2 : Medium and Small Trees
Table Q3 : Palm Trees
Table Q4 : Large Shrubs
Table Q5 : Medium & Small Shrubs
Table Q6 : Climbers & Ground Cover
Note: The following trees and plants shall not be planted:-
Eucalyptus
Ficus Religiosa
Ficus Bengalensis
Lantana Var
Parkinsonia Aculenta
SP 1279 Page 197 Dec 2009

Table Q1: Large Trees

Species Name Foliage Flowering Fruit Minimum Planting Support Mature Saline Wind Site Location Water Remarks
Bearing Plant Ht. Density Height Tolerance Resistance Requirements
Latin Common Coast Interior
Albizzia Parrot Tree Dec Yes No 2m 5 m apart Stake and 18 m to Good Fair Suitable Not Regular Spreading crown.
lebbec wind 24 m suitable watering during Suitable for large open
shield establishment. spaces. Shall not be
Regular planted near roads or
intervals after. buildings as branches
are brittle. Drought
tolerant. Use sparingly.
Casuarina Beef Wood Fil No No 5m 3 m apart Stake 15 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Not Regular Quick growing, tall,
Tree 18 m suitable watering during graceful tree. Thrives
establishment in dry conditions.
Light watering Suitable for avenue,
if and when background planting,
required after. screening or specimen
planting.
Casuarina She Oak or Dec No No 5m 3 m apart Stake 15 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Suitable Regular Quick growing lofty
equisetifolia Australian 21 m watering tree.Thrives in dry
Pine during conditions. Tend to
establishment, become untidy with
occasional age. Tolerates cutting
watering during back to form hedge or
hot summer wind break. Suitable
months if for avenue planting and
required open spaces.
(Contd.)
Where Dec : Deciduous Eve : Evergreen Fil : Filliform branches instead of leaves
Dec2009 Page 198 SP 1279

Table Q1: Large Trees (contd.)
Delonixregia Flame Tree Dec Yes No 2m 5m Stake 12m Tolerant Fair Suitable Not Regular watering Fairly large tree with
apart and to Suitable during first two spreading umbrella
wind 15m years of crown. Quick growing.
shield establishment, Suitable for parks,
light watering at avenue and background
regular intervals planting. Requires a
after. sheltered location.
Pithecolobium Madras Eve No Yes 2m 5m Stake 13 m to Tolerant Excellent Suitable Suitable Regular Fairly large bushy,
dulce Thorn apart 15 m watering if quick growing tree.
growth is to be Eminently suitable for
maintained. dry, sandy areas. If cut
back regularly, forms an
impenetrable hedge.
Suitable for roadside,
background, shade and
screen planting.
Populusalba Poplar Dec No No 2m 5m Stake 15 m to Fair Fair Suitable Not Regular Large, hardy, quick
apart 21 m Suitable watering during growing. Prefers a
establishment, fairly moist situation.
light watering Suitable for avenue,
after. windbreak, screen or
specimen planting.
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 199 Dec 2009

Populus Euphrates Dec No No 1m 5m Stake 18m to Good Good Suita Not Regular Large, hardy, quick
euphratica Popular apart 24 m ble Suitable watering during growing. Prefers a fairly
establishment. moist situation. Suitable
Light watering for avenue, windbreaks,
after. screen or specimen
planting.
Spathodea African Dec Yes No 1m 5m Stake 12 m to Fair Poor Suita Not Regular Upright tree with heavy
Campanulata Tulip apart and 18 m ble Suitable watering at all crown and shallow
wind times. roots. Tends to be
shield blown over in high
winds. Shall not be
planted near buildings.
Suitable for specimen
planting in sheltered
locations. Use sparingly.
(Contd.)
Dec2009 Page 200 SP 1279

Tamar-indus - Eve Yes No 2m 5m Stake 15 m to Tolerant Good Suita Suitable Regular Large, dense tree with
indica apart 18 m ble watering during symmetrical crown.
establishment. Does well in dry areas.
Light watering Suitable for road side
after. planting or where large,
attractive trees are
required as a
background. Shade
relatively light.
Terminalia Indian Dec Yes Yes 2m 5m Stake 18 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Suitable Regular Fairly tall tree with
catappa almond apart 21 m watering during large leaves branching
establishment, in whorls. Suitable for
light watering roadside, screening and
after. large open spaces.
SP 1279 Page 201 Dec 2009

Table Q2: Medium & Small Trees

Acacia arabica Wattle Eve Yes No 1m 3m Stake 7 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Medium sized with
apart 10 m watering during rounded crown. Hardy,
establishment. does well under desert
Light watering conditions. Prefers a dry,
during first well-drained situation.
summer after. Suitable as a specimen
tree, as background or
screen planting.
Acacia Wattle Eve Yes No 1m 2m Stake 6 m to Fair Good Suita Not Regular Small to medium sized
decurrens apart and ble Suitable watering during tree. Comparatively
dealbata wind 9m establishment, delicate under local
shield light watering conditions. Suitable for
after. grouping or background
planting.
Azad-irachta Neem Eve Yes No 1m 3m Stake 6 m to Tolerant Good Suita Suitable Regular Small to medium tree with
indica apart and 8m ble watering during straight stem. Drought
wind establishment, resistant preferring a well
shield light watering drained situation. Suitable
after, for avenue or background
planting.
(Contd.)
Dec2009 Page 202 SP 1279

Table Q2: Medium & Small Trees (contd.)
Bauhinia alba Camel's Eve Yes No 1m 2m Stake 3 m to Fair Fair Suita Not Regular Small tree or large bush.
var candida foot apart and 4m ble Suitable watering at all Prefers a well-drained
wind times. situation. Suitable for
shield massing or background
planting. Use sparingly.
Butea frondosa Flame-of- Eve Yes No 1m 2m Stake 6 m to Tolerant Excellent Suita Ideal Regular Erect tree resistant to
the forest apart and 9m ble watering in first drought preferring well
wind year of drained situation.
shield establishment, as Suitable for background
required after. planting.
Callis-temon Bottle Eve Yes No 2m 3m Stake 2 m to Fair Fair Suita Suitable Regular Hardy, slow growing,
lanceolatus bush apart 6m ble watering at all preferring dry, well-
times. drained open situation.
Suitable for
specimen,and roadside
planting . Use
sparingly.
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 203 Dec 2009

Ceratonia Carob Eve No Yes 2 m 4m Stake 7 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Slow growing,
siliqua bean apart 9m watering during spreading tree of great
establishment. longevity. Prefers open,
Light watering well drained situation.
after till mature. Suitable for specimen
planting.
Cordia Geiger Eve Yes No 2m 3m Stake 5 m to Good Fair Ideal Not Regular Small ornamental tree.
abyssinica tree - apart 6m Suitable watering during Suitable for
white establishment. background, massing or
Light after. selective planting.
Erythrina indica Coral tree Eve Yes No 2m 3m Stake 9 m to Fair Fair Suita Not Regular Very fast growing.
apart and 10 m ble Suitable watering to Suitable for background
wind attain rapid planting.
shield development.
Ficus retusa Malayan Eve Yes Yes 2m 5m Stake 8 m to Tolerant Good Suita Suitable Regular Good shade tree.
Banyan or apart 10 m ble watering at all Drought tolerant.
Laurel fig times. Suitable for roadside
planting and screening.
Use sparingly.
(Contd.)
Dec2009 Page 204 SP 1279

Gifricidia Madera Dec Yes No 1 m 2m 3 m to Fair Good Suita Not Regular Small, quick growing.
maculata apart 4m ble Suitable watering during Used as shade tree for
establishment. smaller plants.
Light after. Withstands topping at
Regular 1.5 - 2.5 m. Lappings
watering if form an excellent mulch
topping is or green manure.
required for Suitable for background
mulch. planting or screening.
Melia azaderach Persian Eve Yes No 1 m 3m Stake 9 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Ornamental tree.
lilac apart 12 m watering during Suitable for avenue,
establishment. background and screen
Light after. planting.
Moringa Horse- Eve Yes No 1 m 2m Stake 7 m to Fair Fair Suita Not Regular Slender tree. Prefers a
pterygosperma radish apart and 9m ble Suitable watering at all dry well-drained
tree wind times. situation. Suitable for
shield specimen, background
Pistacia atlantica Pistacia Eve No No 1 m 3m Stake 6 m to Good Excellent Suita Suitable Regular Hardy, upright tree.
apart 10 m ble watering during Grows well in rocky
establishment. soils in hills. Suitable
Light after. for specimen and
background planting.
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 205 Dec 2009

Pongamia glabra Indian Eve Yes No 1 m 3m Stake 6 m to Poor Fair Suita Not Regular Handsome tree
Beech apart 9m ble Suitable watering at all preferring a dry well-
times. drained situation.
Suitable for background
and street planting or
massing in depth. Use
sparingly.
Prosepis Mesquite Eve No No 1m 2m Stake 4 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Small leguminous tree.
juliflora apart 6m watering during Leaves, pods and shoots
establishment, can be used for
little or no water feedstock. Branches
after. brittle. Suitable for
screening or
windbreaks.
Schinus molle Pepper Eve No No 1m 3m Stake 6 m to Excellent Good Ideal Suitable Regular Spreading tree of
tree apart 9m watering during ornamental habit.
establishment, Eminently suitable for
Light watering background , screening
after. or specimen planting.
(Contd.)
Dec2009 Page 206 SP 1279

Tamarix var Tamarix Yes No 1m 3m Stake 2 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Large bush or small tree
apart 6m watering during with slender, leafless
establishment. twiggy branches.
Light watering Eminently suitable for
as required after. arid, sandy locations,
for beach and desert
planting.
Thespesia Aden Eve Yes No 1m 3m Stake 2 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Small hardy tree.
populnea apple apart 3m watering during Drought resistant.
establishment. Suitable for narrow
Light watering parkway, roadside and
as required after. background planting.
Thevetia Yellow Eve Yes No 1m 3m Stake 4 m to Good Fair Suita Suitable Regular Small, quick growing
nerefolia Oleander apart 6m ble watering during hardy tree. Suitable for
establishment. use in groups or singly.
Light after.
Zizyphus spina- Crown of Eve Yes Yes 1m 3m Stake 4 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Small thorny tree.
christi Thorns apart 6m watering during Suitable for windbreaks
establishment. and screening.
Light watering
after.
SP 1279 Page 207 Dec 2009

Table Q3: Palm Trees

Arecastrum Queen's Eve No No 2m 5m Guy 20 m Tolerant Good Suita Not Regular Spreading top. Good
roman-zofianum Palm apart ble Suitable watering at all avenue tree. Drought
times tolerant.
Caryota mitis Fishtail Eve No 1m 2m Guy 3m Tolerant Good Suita Suitable Regular Suitable
Palm apart ble watering at all
times.
Cycao revoluta Eve No No 1m 4m N/A 2m Tolerant Good Suita Suitable Regular Almost spherical spray
apart ble watering at all of fronds from base.
times. Drought tolerant.
Cocus nucifera Coconut Eve No Yes 2m 5m Guy 15 m Good Good Suita Not Regular Extensively cultivated
Palm apart ble Suitable watering at all for its fruit (coconuts).
times if Suitable for avenue,
cultivated for background planting or
fruit. planting in depth
(groves).
Hyphaene Toddy Eve No No 2m 5m Guy 10 m Tolerant Good Suita Not Regular Branching habit.
Hiebaica Palm apart ble Suitable watering at all Drought tolerant.
times.
(Contd.)
Dec2009 Page 208 SP 1279

Table Q3: Palm Trees (contd.)
Oreodoxa regia Royal Eve No No 2m 5m Guy 20 m Tolerant Good Suita Suitable Regular Sculptural trunk-like
Palm apart ble watering at all grey marble. Good
times. avenue tree. Drought
tolerant.
Phoenix Canary Eve No No 2m 5m Guy 20 m Tolerant Good Suita Suitable Regular Very stout textured
Canarienis Palm apart ble watering at all trunk. Good avenue
times. tree. Drought tolerant.
Phoenix Date Eve No Yes 2.m 5m Guy 20 m Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Extensively cultivated
dactylifera Palm apart watering at all for its fruit (dates).
times if Suitable for avenue,
cultivated for background planting or
fruit. planting in depth
(groves).
Washingtonia Fan Palm Eve No No 1m 5m N/A 15 m Tolerant Good Ideal Suitable Regular Palmate leaves with
filifera apart watering at all pendulus filaments.
times. Ideal for specimen tree.
Washingtonia Fan Palm Eve No No 1m 5m N/A 15 m Tolerant Good Ideal Suitable Regular Palmate leaves. Ideal
robusta apart watering at all for specimen tree.
times.
SP 1279 Page 209 Dec 2009

Table Q4: Large Shrubs

Acacia Cassie Eve Yes No 0.5 m 0.5 m N/A 2.5 m Tolerant Good Suita Not Regular Thorny, arboresient
farnesiana apart to 3 m ble Suitable watering during shrub. Suitable for
establishment. screening, background
Light watering if or group planting.
and when
required after.
Acalypha Acalypha Eve No 0.5 m 1m N/A 1 m to Tolerant Good Suita Not Regular Bushy, ornamental
wilkesiana apart 3m ble Suitable watering at all shrub. Hardy and
times. drought resistant, quick
growing. Suitable for
borders, hedges and
background planting.
Use sparingly.
Caesalpina Peacock Eve Yes No 0.5 m 0.5 m N/A 2 m to Good Fair Suita Suitable Regular An unbranched
pulcherrima tree apart 4.5 m ble watering at all arborescent rapid
times. growing shrub.
Responds well to
pruning. Suitable for
ornamental hedges,
background and
specimen planting. Use
sparingly.
(Contd.)
Dec2009 Page 210 SP 1279

Table Q4: Large Shrubs (contd.)
Bearing Plant Ht. Density Height Tolerance Resistance Requirement
Latin Common Coast Interior s
Dodonaea Dodonaea Eve Yes No 0.5 m 1m N/A 3 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Bushy shrub, drought
viscose apart 3.5 m watering resistant. Responds to
during pruning. Suitable for
establishment, hedging and screening.
light watering
if and when
required after.
Hibiscus rosa- Hibiscus Eve Yes No 0.5 m 1.0 m N/A 2 m to Tolerant Poor Suita Not Regular Attractive shapely shrub.
sinensis apart 3.5 m ble Suitable watering at all Requires a dry, well
times. Requires a dry, well
drained, sunny situation
with some wind protection.
Suitable for beds, borders,
ornamental hedge or
specimen plant. Shall not
be used in high water table
areas. Use sparingly.
Lawsonia Henna Eve Yes No 0.5 m 2m N/A 2 m to Excellent Good Ideal Suitable Regular Large slope growing shrub
inermis apart 2.5 m watering with slender branches.
during Hardy, quick-growing,
establishment, prefers an open situation.
light watering Suitable for hedges and
after. group planting.
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 211 Dec 2009

Table Q4: Large Shrubs (contd.)
Myrtus Morning Eve Yes No 0.5 m 2m N/A 2 m to Excellent Good Ideal Suitable Regular Large, close-growing,
communis Glory apart 2.5 m watering during hardy shrub. Prefers a
establishment. dry, well drained
Light watering situation. Eminently
after. suitable for borders,
hedges or grouping.
Nerium oleander Oleander Eve Yes No 0.5 m 2m N/A 2 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal High, regular Large, attractive shrub.
apart 3m watering at all Prefers dry well drained
times. situation. Responds
well to pruning.
Suitable for back of
borders, beds, screening
or avenue planting when
grown as a standard.
Use sparingly.
Dec2009 Page 212 SP 1279

Table Q5: Medium & Small Shrubs

Agave Century Eve Yes No 0.5 m 0.5 m N/A 1 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Robust, slow growing
americana plant apart 2m watering during stemless plant. Prefers
establishment. open situation.
planting, bedding,
borders and
boundaries.
Atriplex halimus Salt bush Eve No No 0.3 m 0.5 m N/A 1 m to Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Light watering Small perennial, salt
apart 1.5 m during bush. Thrives in arid
establishment. areas on dry, sandy
Very occasional soils, hardy, drought
watering after in resistant. Suitable for
exceptionally low hedges, border
dry weather. planting or massing in
depth.
Bougain-villia Bougain- Eve Yes No 0.5 m 0.5 m N/A 1.5 m Fair Poor Suita Not Regular Very attractive shrub
formosa villia apart to 2 m ble Suitable watering at all grown on a support .
times. Prefers well drained
situation, sunny
position sheltered from
wind.
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 213 Dec 2009

Table Q5: Medium & Small Shrubs (contd.)
Punica granatum Pome- Eve Yes Yes 0.5 m 0.5 m N/A 2.5 m to Good Excellent Ideal Suitable Regular Small ornamental tree
granate apart 3.5 m watering at all or shrub. Drought
times. resistant. Suitable for
specimen planting,
background or
screening.
Tecomaria Cape Eve Yes No 0.5 m 1.5 m N/A 1 m to Poor Fair Suita Not Regular Delicate, shrub or
capensis honey- apart 3m ble Suitable watering at all climber. Requires a dry,
suckle times. well drained, open or
semi-shaded situation,
sheltered from wind.
planting or hedging on a
support.
Dec2009 Page 214 SP 1279

Table Q6: Climbers & Ground Cover

Bearing Plant Ht. Density Height Tolerance Resistance Require
Latin Common Coast Interior ments
Antigonon Coral Eve Yes No 1.0 m 1.0 m Frame 9 m to Fair Fair Suitable Not Regular Ornamental, profuse bloomer.
leptopus vine apart 12 m Suitable watering Prefers dry, well-drained,
corallita at all fairly open situation with
times. some wind protection.
Suitable for growing on
banks, trellises, fences and
arbours.
Asparagus Asparagus Eve Yes No 0.3 m 0.2 m N/A 1 m to Good Fair Suitable Not Regular Relatively small climber.
plumose apart 2m Suitable watering Prefers a rich well drained
at all soil, semo-shaded, protected
times. situation.Suitable for pots and
hanging baskets.
Bougain - Bougain Eve Yes No 1.0 m 3m Frame - Fair Poor Suitable Not Regular Straggly, spiny, robust
villia var villia apart Suitable waterin climber. Prefers a rich
g at all well-drained soil and a
times. sunny protected situation.
Should be cut back
regularly to obtain
abundant flowers. Suitable
for walls, trellises, pillars,
buildings and hedges.
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 215 Dec 2009

Table Q6: Climbers & Ground Cover (contd.)
Clero-dendron Clero- Eve Yes No 1m 3m Frame - Excellent Good Ideal Ideal Regular Robust, quick growing,
indica dendron apart watering hardy climber.
during Eminently suitable for
establishment. hedges, windbreaks,
Light watering screening or walls.
after. Requires regular
maintenance as tends to
take over. Should not
be planted close to trees
or shrubs as it is a
coarse and voracious
feeder.
Ipomoea pes Aden Eve Yes No 0.5 m 3m Frame - Excellent Excellent Ideal Ideal Regular Robust, straggling vine
caprea creeper, apart watering with a tangled mass or
Goat's during wiry stems. Very
foot establishment. hardy, forms excellent
Camels Light watering ground cover on banks.
foot if and when Tends to take over and
creeper required after. requires regular
maintenance.
Dec2009 Page 216 SP 1279

Q3.2 Appendix Q2: Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

ITP No: SP-1279-Q-001 – Landscaping Works
SP1279 P AGE 217 DEC 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-Q-001 – Landscaping Works

Earthworks Refer SP-1279-C Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Earthworks for ITP
Landscaping Works
Plants Plant Types Verification of Records Contractor / CSR Each Consignment Section Q2.7 & Q2.8 Refer its
subsections
Verification of plant Visual Contractor / CSR Each Consignment Good Practice as

genus/ species, size etc listed in section
Q1.2.2
Planting Works Planting methods Verification of method Contractor / CSR Each type of Good Practice as Refer Section
statement planting works listed in Q1.2.2 Q2.7 & Q2.8
Watering Visual Visual Contractor / CSR Random check Section Q2.7.9 Good practice
as listed in
section Q1.2.2
Maintenance works Verification of stays, Good Practice Contractor / CSR Random check Section Q2.7.13 Good Practice
stakes, ties, etc.,
Note:
1. Plant types shall be selected from the tables as given in Appendix-A.
2. For the appropriate standards for the materials, plants, irrigation system, watering, maintenance, fertilizers for plants etc, refer section 1.2.
Dec 2009 Page 218 SP 1279

Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Roads & Paving Works Version 2.0
Chapter – R
Roads & Paving Works
(Including Graded Roads)
SP 1279 Page 219 Dec 2009

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Roads & Paving Works
R1.0 Introduction
R1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes the Version 1.0 of SP 1279 Part R Civil & Building
Construction Specifications – Roads & Paving’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the
- Specification of graded roads included into this chapter
R1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

R1.2.1 PDO Standards

SP-1274 : Specification for Civil & Building Construction – Guideline to
Materials Testing
SP-1275 : Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
SP-1282 : Specification for Reinforced Concrete – Production & Construction

Guidelines
SP-1284 : Specification for Signs & Signboards – Standard Signs Catalogue
R1.2.2 Omani Standards

Highway Design Manual : Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of
Communications
General Specification for Roads : Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of

Communications
Royal Oman Police : Bye-Laws & Ordinances
R1.2.3 International Standards

AASHTO : Appropriate Standards for Asphaltic & Bituminous
materials testing and pavement structure design
ASTM : Appropriate standards for materials testing methods and

specifications
BS EN ISO : Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Fabricated Iron & Steel

1461 articles – Specifications and Test methods
BS EN 196 : Methods of Testing Cement
Dec 2009 Page 220 SP 1279

BS EN 197 : Cement, Composition, Specifications and Conformity

criteria for common cements
BS EN 206 : Concrete Specification, Performance, Production and

Conformity
BS EN 480 : Concrete Admixtures
BS EN 932 : Tests for general properties of Aggregates.
BS EN 1008 : Mixing water for Concrete
BS EN 1097 : Test for Thermal & Physical Properties of Aggregates
BS EN 1338 : Concrete Paving Blocks
BS EN 1339 : Concrete Kerbs
BS EN 1367 : Test for Thermal & Weathering Properties of Aggregates
BS EN 1436 : Road Marking Materials
BS EN 1871 : Road Marking Materials – Physical Properties
BS EN 12350 : Testing of Fresh Concrete
BS EN 12390 : Testing of Hardened Concrete
BS EN 12504 : Testing Concrete in Structures
BS EN 12620 : Specification for Aggregates from Natural Sources for

Concrete
BS EN 12878 : Specification for Pigments for colouring materials based on

cement and or lime – Specification and Methods of test.
BS EN 13036 : Road and air field surface characteristics. Test methods.
BS EN 13139 : Aggregates for Mortar
BS EN ISO 591 : Titanium Dioxide Pigments for Paints – Specifications and

Methods of Test
BS 381C : Specification for Colours for identification, coding and

special purposes
BS 1377 : Methods of Test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes
BS 3262 : Hot applied Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials
BS 4027 : Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement
BS 4449 : Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete
BS 4483 : Steel Fabric for the Reinforcement of Concrete
SP 1279 Page 221 Dec 2009

BS 4987 : Coated Macadam for Roads and other Paved Areas
BS 5212 : Cold poured joint sealants for Concrete Pavements
BS 594987 : Asphalt (Hot Process) for roads and other paved areas –
Specification for Materials, Mix, Transporting, Laying and
Compaction Works
R1.2.4 SIEP / Shell GSI Standards

DEP 34.11.00.12-Gen. : Geo Technical Foundation Engineering
DEP 34.13.20.31-Gen. : Roads, Paving, Surfacing, Slope Protection and

Fencing
R1.3 Compliance with Standards

In all cases the Company shall determine the adequacy of the design carried out and Works
executed by the Contractor in accordance with this Specifications.
R1.4 Quality Control

R1.4.1 Quality Plan
requirements and or in accordance with the contract requirements of a particular contract. The
Quality plan shall cover quality assurance and control and shall be divided into detailed design
and production/execution plan. The quality plan shall be subject to audit by Company.
R1.4.2 Reporting system

R1.4.3 Records
contract period or a minimum of one year.
Dec 2009 Page 222 SP 1279

The records shall include the following:
- Method of Curing
See also Inspection Test Plan in Appendix-A
R1.5 Supervision
R1.5.1 Contractor’s Supervisor
production and placing of high quality Asphalt and Concrete shall be employed by the
Contractor on the Worksite and shall directly supervise all Asphalt and Concrete works.
R1.5.2 Company Inspection

the contract and specifications.
R1.6 Product / Asset Warranty

The entire Works, executed under a particular contract, shall be guaranteed to meet the
Any defects, identified within the maintenance period (as per the contract or a minimum of
one year), have to be repaired by the Contractor at his own cost.
In the event of defect of any part of the works or item being of such a nature that the
Specification requirements cannot be fulfilled by repair, such part of the Work or item shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Company.
The Company shall not approve the repaired work, unless the Contractor guarantees in writing
that the repaired work will have a service lifetime from the original year of construction.
SP 1279 Page 223 Dec 2009

R2.0 Scope
R2.1 General
describes the minimum requirement for Roads, Paving and other Structures related to these
Works. This Specification shall also define the type of testing requirements, frequency of
each test and number of samples for the materials, mixes and paving works.
R2.2 Plant, Schedule & Method

R2.3 Materials
All materials shall be obtained from a source approved by the Company known to produce
materials for the Roads and Paving Works. Contractor shall get approval for all materials
prior to the delivery to worksite.
The Contractor shall locate all borrow pits and quarries and other sources of necessary
materials.
Particulars of materials shall be clearly marked on the delivery note, invoice or supplier's
certificate supplied with each consignment and shall include:
- Quantity, Type and Size of Material
F2.3.1 Granular Fill

Granular Fill material shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel.
Table R1 classifies and specifies types of materials used by the Company for granular fill.
Materials specified are in accordance with AASHTO, ASTM and or BS Standards. Particle
size distribution (maximum and min) limits of granular fill are shown Figure R1 & R2.
Dec 2009 Page 224 SP 1279

Table R1: Granular Fill Materials
PDO PDO PDO PDO PDO PDO PDO
Material Specification Type A Type B Type B1 Type C Type D Type E Type F
4-day soaked CBR value: 80 80-60 60-45 40 40 40 -
When compacted to the following % max dry density :- 98% 98-95% 98-95% 95% 95% 95% -
Gradation Requirements to ASTM D1241 Type I-B Type I-D - Type II-F - - -
AASHTO (ASTM E11/BS 410) Sieve Size % Passing by Weight
2 inch 50 mm 100 - - - 100 100 100
1 inch 25 mm 75 - 95 100 100 100 55 - 85 55 - 95 75-95
¾ inch 19 mm - - - - - 50 - 90 -
3/8 inch 9.5 mm 40 - 75 60 - 100 60-100 100 40 - 70 40 - 80 40-70
No.4 4.75 mm 30 - 60 50 - 85 50-85 70 - 100 30 - 60 30 - 65 25-45
No.10 2.0 mm 20 - 45 40 - 70 40-70 55 - 100 20 - 50 20 - 50 -
No.40 425 µm 15 - 30 25 - 45 25-45 30 - 70 10 - 30 10 - 30 5-20
No.200 75 µm 5 - 15 8 - 15 8-15 8 - 15 5 - 15 5 - 15 0-2
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 225 Dec 2009

Table R1: Granular Fill Materials (contd.)
PDO PDO PDO PDO PDO PDO PDO
Material Specification Type A Type B Type B1 Type C Type D Type E Type F
Liquid Limit AASHTO T89 ASTM D4318 25% max 35% max 40% max 40% max 25% max 25% max -
Plasticity Index AASHTO T90 ASTM D4318 6% max 9% max 12% max 12% max 7% max 7% max -
Sand Equivalent AASHTO T176 ASTM D2419 - - - - 25% min 25% min -
Loss by Abrasion AASHTO T96 ASTM C131 50% max 50% max 50% max - 50% max 50% max -
Required % Compaction As specified
Moisture Content Should be between 2% below and 1% above optimum
Dec 2009 Page 226 SP 1279

Figure R1: Soil Particle Size Distribution Envelopes – Granular Fill
SP 1279 Page 227 Dec 2009

Figure R2: Soil Particle Size Distribution Envelopes – Granular Fill
Dec 2009 Page 228 SP 1279

Table R1: Granular Fill Materials (contd.)
Note 1: Coarse aggregates, retained on No.10 sieve, shall comprise hard, durable particle
or fragments of stone or gravel. Materials shall not break up when wetted and
dried and shall wear not more than 50%, based on the Los Angeles Rattler Test.
Fine aggregate, passing No.10 sieve, shall comprise natural or crushed sand, and
fine mineral particles passing No. 200 sieve. The composite soil-aggregate
mixture shall be free from vegetable matter or lumps of clay.
Note 2: Grading is based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity and the percentages
passing the various sieves are subject to correction, to approval of the Company,
when aggregates of varying specific gravities are used. Grading curves represent
the grading requirements after compaction.
Note 3: All fill materials incorporated in the Works shall comply with the above
requirements when delivered to the fill area. Fill shall not be hand picked or
sorted.
Note 4: All material shall be incorporated in an approved sequence of operations,

including the dumping of materials, spreading, watering, mixing and compacting.
Delays between consecutive operations shall be kept to a minimum.
Note 5: Fill material used within 5 m of concrete structures shall have a soluble sulphate
content not exceeding 2.5 g/l tested in accordance with BS 1377.
Note 6: Fill material shall not contain any deleterious or organic material or excessive
lumps of salts or large clunks of gypsum. It shall be the discretion of the
Company to reject such fill should it be deemed unsuitable.
F2.3.2 Rock Fill

Materials consisting predominantly of rock fragments of such a size that it cannot be placed in
layers of the thickness allowed without crushing, or further breaking down, may be placed in
the embankment in layers not exceeding twice the average size of the larger fragments.
However, no layer of rock fill shall exceed 450 mm loose thickness.
F2.3.3 Mineral Aggregates

Mineral aggregate for use in asphalt concrete base course, wearing course and single course
shall comprise coarse aggregates, fine aggregates and filler material (if required) complying
with the following requirements.
1. Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate material retained on an AASHTO No 4 (4.75 mm) sieve and shall comprise
crushed rock or crushed gravel. It shall be clean, hard, tough, durable and sound, shall be of
uniform quality and free from decomposed stone, organic matter, shale, clay, lumps and other
deleterious substances. Coarse aggregate shall be free from excess of flat elongated pieces
(10% maximum) which, when coated with asphalt, shall pass a stripping test performed in
accordance with AASHTO T182.
Crushed gravel for use as coarse aggregate shall be obtained by crushing material so that not
less than 90% of material to be crushed is retained on a standard AASHTO No 3/8" (9.5 mm)
sieve. Crushing of gravel shall be regulated so that at least 90% by weight of the material
retained on an AASHTO No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve, shall consist of pieces with at least one
mechanically fractured face and when tested for stability of bituminous mix show satisfactory
stability.
SP 1279 Page 229 Dec 2009

2. Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall consist of that portion of the total aggregate that passes a standard
AASHTO No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve. Fine aggregate obtained by crushing gravel shall be
produced as specified for course aggregates and after crushing at least 85% by weight of
material passing an AASHTO No.4 (4.75 mm) sieve and retained on an AASHTO No.8 (2.36
mm) sieve, shall consist of pieces having at least one mechanical fractured face. Should
natural material passing an AASHTO No.4 (4.75 mm) sieve be included in the mixture, the
material shall be fed to the dryer as a separate aggregate and the amount used shall be so
limited that the mixture of fine aggregates will contain not less than 25% by weight of crushed
aggregates.
3. Mineral Fill
When the combined grading of coarse and fine aggregates is deficient in material passing an
AASHTO No.200 (0.075 mm) sieve, mineral filler shall be added, as approved by the
Company. Mineral filler shall comprise finely divided mineral matter, such as rock dust,
including limestone dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement or other approved
mineral matter. At the time of use, mineral filler shall be sufficiently dry to flow freely and be
essentially free from agglomerations. Filler material shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M-17. Table R2 provides the Gradation requirements for the Mineral Fill.
Table R2: Mineral Fill - Gradation Requirements
AASHTO (ASTM E11/BS 410) Sieve % Passing by

Weight
No.30 0.600 mm 100
No.50 0.300 mm 95-100
No.200 0.075 mm 70-100
4. Combined Mineral Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete - Base-Course and Single

Course
Combined mineral aggregate for asphaltic concrete base course and single course shall
conform to the following physical requirements:
Sand equivalent (AASHTO T 176) determined after all processing 45 min

except for addition of asphalt binder
Plasticity index (AASHTO T 90) 6 max
Loss of Marshall Stability by submerging specimens in water at 60oC 25 max

for 24 h as compared to stability measured after submersion in water
at 60oC for 30 min
When tested according to AASHTO T11 and AASHTO T27, the combined mineral
aggregates grading shall be as follows:
Dec 2009 Page 230 SP 1279

Table R3: Combined Mineral Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete – Gradation

Requirements for Base Course & Single Course
AASHTO (ASTM E11/BS 410) Sieve % Passing by Weight
1 inch 25.0 mm 100
3/4 inch 19.0 mm 80-100
3/8 inch 9.5 mm 60-80
No. 4 4.75 mm 45-65
No. 10 2.00 mm 30-50
No. 40 0.425 mm 15-32
No. 200 0.075 mm 3-10
Grading limits specified in Table R3 are based on materials of uniform specific gravity and
shall be adjusted to compensate for variations in specific gravity of individual sizes to the
approval of the Company. Grading may be varies, subject to approval by the Company, on
the basis of Marshall Tests to obtain optimum stability and life of the completed "Asphalt
Concrete Base Course" and "Asphalt Concrete Single Course" mixes.
5. Combined Mineral Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete – Wearing Course and

Single Course
The combined mineral aggregate for asphaltic concrete wearing course and single course shall
conform to the following physical requirements:
Sand equivalent (AASHTO T 176) determined after all processing 45 min

except for addition of asphalt binder
Plasticity index (AASHTO T 90) 3 max
Loss of Marshall Stability by submerging specimens in water at 25 max

60oC for 24 h as compared to stability measured after submersion in
water at 60oC for 30 min
When tested according to AASHTO T11 and AASHTO T27, the combined mineral aggregate
grading shall be as follows.
SP 1279 Page 231 Dec 2009

Table R4: Combined Mineral Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete - Gradation

Requirements for Wearing Course & Single Course
AASHTO (ASTM E11/BS 410) Sieve % Passing by Weight
3/4 inch 19.0 mm 100
1/2 inch 12.5 mm 80-100
No. 4 4.75 mm 50-70
No. 10 2.00 mm 32-47
No. 40 0.425 mm 16-26
No. 80 0.180 mm 10-18
No. 200 0.075 mm 4-10
Grading limits specified in Table R4 are based on materials of uniform specific gravity and
shall be adjusted to compensate for any variations in specific gravity of individual sizes to the
approval of the Company. Grading may be varied, subject to approval by the Company, on
the basis of Marshall Tests to obtain optimum stability and life of the completed "Asphalt
Concrete Wearing Course" mix.
F2.3.4 Aggregates for Cover Material

Aggregate for cover material shall be screenings of crushed stone, which are clean, tough,
durable and free from dirt and other objectionable matter. Wear shall not be more than 40%
as determined by AASHTO T96. When subjected to 5 cycles of sodium-sulphate soundness
testing, as determined by AASHTO T104, weight loss shall not be greater than 10%.
Aggregate shall conform the gradations shown in the Tables R5 & R6 and shall be subject to
approval by the Company.
Table R5 – Aggregates for Cover Material - Gradation Requirements for Single
Asphalt Surface Treatment
Application Rate % Passing Sieve Size by Weight

RC-800 (RC-4)
l/m2
1.59 - 2.04
Dec 2009 Page 232 SP 1279

2.04 - 2.54
Table R6 – Aggregates for Cover Material - Gradation for Double Asphalt

Surface Treatment
Application % Passing Sieve Size by Weight
First Course
Second Course
F2.3.5 Water
Water used in the work shall be clean and free from organic matter, sulphates, waste matters
and other harmful or deleterious substances and shall be obtained from a source approved by
the Company. Refer Chapter D for the specification and other requirements.
F2.3.6 Concrete
The Specification for Concrete Works associated with concrete paving areas shall comply
with the Chapter D and the referred standards and documents. Further requirements are
detailed in section R2.11 to R 2.14 of this Chapter.
F2.3.7 Medium Curing Cutback Asphalt

Medium curing cutback asphalt shall consist of an asphaltic base fluxed with suitable
petroleum distillates. The product shall be free of water, show no separation prior to use and
shall conform to the requirements as given in Table R7.
SP 1279 Page 233 Dec 2009

Table R7: Medium Curing Cutback Asphalt (Liquid Asphalt)
Material Specification MC-30 MC-70 MC-250 MC-800 MC-3000
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
Kinematic viscosity at 60°C (See Note 1) 30 60 70 140 250 500 800 1600 3000 6000
centistokes
Flash point (tag open-cup) °C 38 38 66 66 66
Water Percent 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
Distillation test – Distillate percentage

by volume of total distillate to 360°C
Distillate percentage by volume of total - 25 0 20 0 10 - - - -

distillate to 225°C
Distillate percentage by volume of total 40 70 20 60 15 55 0 35 0 15

Distillate percentage by volume of total 75 93 65 90 60 87 45 80 15 75

Residue from distillation to 360°C 50 - 55 - 67 - 75 - 80 -
(Contd.)
Dec 2009 Page 234 SP 1279

Table R7: Medium Curing Cutback Asphalt (Liquid Asphalt) Contd.
Material Specification MC-30 MC-70 MC-250 MC-800 MC-3000
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
Volume percentage of sample by

difference
Tests on residue from distillation.
Absolute viscosity at 60°C (See Note 4) 300 1200 300 1200 300 1200 300 1200 300 1200
poises
Ductility, 5 cm/cm.cm (see Note 2) 100 - 100 - 100 - 100 - 100 -
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 99 99 99 99 99
Temperature for application by spraying
°C (See Note 6) 30+ 50+ 95+ 110+
Spot test (See Note 3) with:
Standard Naptha Negative for all grades
Naptha / Xylene sovevent-%xylene Negative for all grades
Heptane / xylene sovent-%xylene Negative for all grades
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 235 Dec 2009

Table R7: Medium Curing Cutback Asphalt (Liquid Asphalt) Contd.
Note 1: As an alternative, Saybolt-Furol viscosities may be specified as follows:
Grade MC-70 : Furol viscosity at 50 oC : 60 to 120 sec
Grade MC-800 : Furol viscosity at 82.2 : 100 to 200 sec

o
C
Grade MC-3000 : Furol viscosity at 82.2 : 300 to 600 sec.

o
C
Note 2: If the penetration of residue is more than 200 and its ductility at 25 oC is less than
100, the material will be acceptable, if its ductility at 15.5 oC is more than 100.
Note 3: The use of the spot test is optional. When specified, the Company shall indicate
whether the standard naphtha solvent, the naphtha xylene solvent or the heptane
xylene solvent shall be used in determining compliance with the requirement, and
also, in the case of the xylene solvents, the percentage of xylene to be used.
Note 4: In lieu of viscosity of the residue, the specifying agency, at its option, may specify
penetration at 100 g; 5s at 25 oC of 120 to 250 for grades MC-30, MC-70, MC-
250, MC-800 and MC-3000. However, in no case will both be required.
Note 5: Methods of Sampling and Testing of cut-back asphalt (medium curing type) shall
be in accordance with the following standard methods of the American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:
Sampling T40 Distillation T78
Solubility in trichloroethylene T44 Flash point T79
Penetration T49 Spot test T102
Ductility T51 Kinematic viscosity T201
Water T55 Absolute viscosity T202
Saybolt Furol viscosity T72
Note 6: a) Application temperature may, in some cases, be above the flash point of the
material. Caution must therefore be exercised to prevent fire or explosion.
b) The maximum temperature shall be below that at which fogging occurs.

Temperatures given are guides only.
F2.3.8 Rapid Curing Liquid Asphalt (Cutback Asphalt)

Rapid curing cutback asphalt shall conform to the requirements as given in Table R8.
DEC 2009 P AGE 236 SP 1279

Table R8 – Rapid Curing Cutback Asphalt (Liquid Asphalt)
Material Specification RC-70 RC-250 RC-800 RC-3000
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
Kinematic viscosity at 60°C (See Note 70 140 250 500 800 1600 3000 6000
1) centistokes
Flash point (tag open-cup) °C -- -- 27 -- 27 -- 27 --
Water Percent 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
Distillation test – Distillate percentage

by volume of total distillate to 360°C
to 190°C 10
to 225°C 50 35 15 25
to 260°C 70 60 45 70
to 315 °C 85 80 75
Residue from distillation to 360°C 55 -- 65 -- 75 -- 80 --
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 237 Dec 2009

Table R8 – Rapid Curing Cutback Asphalt (Liquid Asphalt) Contd.
Material Specification RC-70 RC-250 RC-800 RC-3000
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
Volume percentage of sample by

difference
Tests on residue from distillation
Absolute viscosity at 60°C (See Note 3) 600 2400 600 2400 600 2400 600 2400
poises
Ductility, 5 cm/min. at 25°C cm 100 -- 100 -- 100 -- 100 --
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 99 -- 99 -- 99 -- 99 --
Temperature for application by spraying
°C (See Note 5) 50+ 75+ 95+ 110+
Spot test (See Note 2) with:
Standard naphtha Negative for all grades
Naphtha / xylene solvent – % xylene Negative for all grades
Heptane / xylene solvent –% xylene Negative for all grades
(Contd.)
Dec 2009 Page 238 SP 1279

Table R8: Rapid Curing Liquid Asphalt (Cut-back Asphalt) Contd.
Note 1: As an alternative, Saybolt-Furol viscosities may be specified as follows:
Grade RC-70 : Furol viscosity at 50 oC : 60 to 120 sec
Grade RC-250 : Furol viscosity at 60 oC : 125 to 250 sec
Grade RC-800 : Furol viscosity at 82.2 oC : 100 to 200 sec
Grade RC-3000 : Furol viscosity at 82.2 oC : 300 to 600

sec.
Note 2: The use of the spot test is optional. When specified, the Company shall indicate
whether the standard naphtha solvent, the naphtha solvent, naphtha xylene
solvent or the heptane xylene solvent shall be used in determining compliance
with the requirement, and also, in the case of the xylene solvents, the
percentage of xylene to be used.
Note 3: In lieu of viscosity of the residue, the specifying agency, at its option, may
specify penetration at 100 g; 5s at 25 oC of 80 to 120 for grades RC-70, RC-
250, RC-800 and RC-3000. However, in no case will both be required.
Note 4: Methods of Sampling and Testing
Sampling and testing cut-back asphalt (rapid curing type) shall be in accordance with the
following standard methods of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials: (AASHTO)
Sampling T40 Distillation T78
Solubility in trichloroethylene T44 Flash point T79
Penetration T49 Spot test T102
Ductility T51 Kinematic viscosity T201
Water T55 Absolute viscosity T202
Saybolt Furol viscosity T72
Note 5: a) Application temperature may, in some cases, be above the flash point of the
material. Caution must therefore be exercised to prevent fire or explosion.
b) The maximum temperature shall be below that at which fogging occurs.

Temperatures given are guides only.
F2.3.9 Bitumen Binder

Bitumen binder shall be petroleum derivative penetration 60/70 confirming to the
requirements of AASHTO designation M20.
SP 1279 Page 239 Dec 2009

General Requirements
R2.4 Setting Out & Site Clearances
R2.4.1 Setting Out
Proposals for setting-out and control of alignment shall be submitted to the Company for
approval prior to commencing the Works.
R2.4.2 Existing Ground Levels

Existing ground levels shall be verified. Anomalies shall be shall submitted to the Company
together with proposed revised levels. Relevant existing ground shall not be disturbed prior to
the Company's ruling on correct levels.
R2.4.3 Site Clearance

A working strip over the width of the earthworks, or as specified in the Contract documents or
as instructed by the Company, shall be cleared of all debris.
Trees and saplings shall be preserved and none shall be cut down without the prior approval of
the Company. Trees to be cut down shall be uprooted and the holes made by grubbing up,
removing roots, stumps and the like, shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted.
R2.4.4 Nature of Ground

Not withstanding any information contained within any Site Investigation Report, the
Contractor shall judge for himself the nature of the ground and shall be fully responsible for
ascertaining all necessary information concerning permanent water table, periods of rainfall,
flooding of the Worksite and all matters affecting excavations.
R2.4.5 Buried Services

The locations of existing services given in the Contract documents are indicative only and
shall be verified by hand excavation prior to starting work.
Details of existing services, or any other obstructions, encountered during excavation shall be
submitted to the Company to determine the appropriate course of action. Services affected by
the excavations shall be protected.
R2.4.6 Existing Ground

In areas other than rock, where the depth of fill to bituminous material (i.e., including road
base) is less than 600 mm, the existing ground shall be scarified, watered and re compacted to
a depth of at least 150 mm before any fill is placed.
R2.4.7 Defective & Remedial Works

During excavation or filling works, either below formation level or between formation level
and the underside of the bituminous material, all loose, soft spots or otherwise defective work
shall be dug out and made good with new material. The surrounding area shall be scarified to
a depth of 150 mm and the whole area watered and re-compacted to the approval of the
Company.
Test results from any area falling below the minimum specified shall be rectified by
scarifying, watering and re-compacting to the approval of the Company.
R2.4.8 Road Construction Safety

In general all safety regulations shall be in accordance with CP 122 ‘Code of Practice for
Health, Safety and Environmental Protection’.
Dec 2009 Page 240 SP 1279

Where work is required on, or adjacent to, an existing road, the Contractor shall provide, erect
and maintain such temporary traffic sign (refer Temporary Warning Plates detailed in SP
1284), lamps, barriers ad other measures in accordance with the requirements of the Ministry
of Communications, Directorate of Roads, together with any additional requirements specified
in the Contract.
R2.4.9 Explosives
Refer section C2.5.3 for all issues relating to the collection, transportation, delivery, use and
storage of explosives and associated materials.
Earthworks & Formation

R2.5 Excavation, Cutting & Embankments
In general, the Road pavement structure shall be supported by the Sub-grade/Formation and
consist of the following layers in ascending order, they are, Sub-base, Road-base and Flexible
Pavement (Bituminous Course & Wearing Course) or Rigid Pavement (Reinforced Cement
Concrete). General terms used to describe the roads and paving are detailed in Figure R3
‘Typical Road Cross-Section Details’.
Before constructing the main structural element of a road (the pavement) it will be necessary
to modify the existing ground level to accommodate the grade of the road. This is known as
‘Earthworks’. Where the pavement lies above existing ground level, the ground is raised into
an embankment using suitable fill. Where the pavement lies below existing ground level,
appropriate excavation or cutting shall be carried out on the ground surface.
R2.5.1 Excavation Method

The method of excavation shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. When excavations are
completed and are ready to receive new works, Company approval shall be required to
proceed.
R2.5.2 Excavation in Soil

Plant shall be suitable for excavating soil and shall not damage or reduce the natural strength
of the soil.
Construction plant shall not be used on the bottom surface of a cutting, unless the cutting is in
rock or a minimum level of 300 mm above formation level is maintained.
Where excavation to formation level is completed and either unsuitable, or a combination of

suitable and unsuitable, material is found at this level, then all unsuitable material shall be
removed and the resultant void backfilled with approved material compacted in accordance
with section R2.5.6.
Where sabka or dune sand is encountered at formation level, special methods of soil
reinforcement, such as geotextiles & Tensar spectra geogrids are required. The design and
application of such methods shall be subject to Company approval.
R2.5.3 Excavation in Rock

The term 'Rock' shall be defined as geological strata, or deposits so designated by the
Company as any hard natural or artificial material requiring the systematic use of blasting or
pneumatic tools for removal.
Rock fragments or boulders from the slopes of cuttings shall be removed to the approval of the
Company.
SP 1279 Page 241 Dec 2009

R2.5.4 Formation or Sub-Grade Level

The Formation or Sub-Grade level shall be defined as the finished level of the ground in
excavation, or as fill prepared into final shape after completion of filling to receive the road
construction.
The formation shall be subject to Company approval prior to placing fill material or road
construction. If required, the formation shall be proof-rolled and tested for suitability as
directed by the Company. The tests to be conducted depends on the type of material as
formation level.
Dec 2009 Page 242 SP 1279

Figure R3: Typical Road Cross-Section Details
SP 1279 Page 243 Dec 2009

Loose pieces of rock, or other material, exceeding 75 mm in any dimension shall be removed
and disposed. The whole of the formation shall be compacted by use of approved smooth
wheeled, or pneumatic tyre rollers or vibratory compactors, but final compaction shall be by
smooth roller. In cuttings other than rock, the formation shall be scarified to a depth of 150
mm before compaction unless specified otherwise. Re-compaction shall be to the
requirements of section R2.5.6.
Unsuitable material present at formation level shall be totally removed and replaced with a fill
material that has a minimum insitu CBR of 40 at 95% compaction with Plasticity Index of 6 -
12% max (see Table R1), or dealt with as described in section R2.5.2
Unsuitable material shall be defined as organic soils, topsoil, peat, stumps, perishable matter,
material of liquid limits exceeding 96% and/or plasticity index exceeding 65%, sabka or dune
sands and any other material prescribed by the Company.
R2.5.5 Embankment Filling

Fill material for Embankments placed below the sub grade level shall consist of uniform
mixtures of gravel and/or stone fragments with sand, silt and clay having a minimum insitu
CBR of 40 at 95% compaction with a plasticity index of 6 to 12%. PDO Type D & E fill
materials (Refer Table R1) shall be used for the Embankment works.
Rock or gravel used in embankments shall, except for any specified external cover to slopes or
near formation level, be of such size that may be deposited in layers each not exceeding 450
mm loose depth and extending over the full width of the embankment.
Where material is available which would be suitable, except that its CBR lies in the range 5 -
10%, it may be incorporated in embankments of width as required at 500 mm or more depth
below formation, subject to approval by the Company.
Material shall be spread or levelled by a crawler tractor weighing not less than 15 tonnes.
Water shall be added as necessary to maintain the optimum moisture content of the fill
material. Each layer shall be graded and all surface voids filled with broken fragments before
the next layer is placed and compacted by at least 12 passes of a towed vibratory roller with a
static mass per metre width of roll of at least 1800 kg or a grid roller with a mass per metre
width of roll of at least 8000 kg or other plant approved by the Company. The top surface and
side slopes shall be thoroughly blinded with approved fine graded material to seal the surface.
In rock fill embankments, the materials shall be carefully packed for such a distance from any
structure as may be required by the Company.
Where it is proposed to overlay an existing graded road, the following measures shall be
taken.
- Sufficient testing shall be carried out to determine the suitability of the existing road
materials in comparison having a minimum in-situ CBR of 40 at 95% compaction
with Plasticity Index of 6 - 12%. Company shall approve the suitability of the
existing material.
- If found suitable, the existing material shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 150
mm, watered and compacted to the specified profile for laying the road base
material.
- If found not suitable, all unsuitable material shall be removed from the Worksite.
The formation shall then be prepared as specified in section R2.5.4, and having a
minimum in-situ CBR of 40 at 95% relative compaction with Plasticity Index of 6 -
12% below road base material.
Dec 2009 Page 244 SP 1279

R2.5.6 Compaction
Fill material shall be placed, watered and compacted in layers of loose material not exceeding
150 mm in thickness over the full width of the formation. All fill material for the
embankment including sub-grade and verges shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry
density obtained in the modified AASHTO compaction test.
Compaction shall be carried out using approved compacting equipment progressing gradually
from the outside towards the centre with each succeeding pass uniformly overlapping the
previous pass. Rolling shall continue until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly and
uniformly compacted. Rolling shall be accompanied by sufficient balding in an approved
manner to ensure a smooth surface, free from ruts or ridges and having proper section and
crown.
Any areas inaccessible to normal compaction equipment shall be compacted by mechanical

tampers until satisfactory compaction is obtained.
Each layer of the inaccessible area shall be placed with appropriate fill materials, watered and
completely compacted to the approval of the Company before placement of materials for
succeeding layers.
Compaction of all fill material shall be carried out at moisture content between 1% above and
2% below the optimum for compaction. The Company may, however, direct that the moisture
content at compaction be further controlled in order to reduce any subsequent consolidation or
swelling. When necessary to increase the moisture content of materials, the water shall be
evenly sprinkled on the surface of the ground, or fill, by machine of a type, approved by the
Company, being capable of uniformly distributing the water at a predetermined and constant
rate.
Tests for the control of compaction shall be carried out at regular intervals, to the approval of
the Company.
In addition, if directed by the Company, prior to commencement of filling, trial lengths, not
exceeding 1 km shall be constructed. The object of the trials is to determine adequacy of the
Contractor's equipment, the loose depth measurements necessary to result in specified
compacted layer depths; the field moisture content, and the relationship between the amount
of compaction and the resulting density of material. The Contractor may proceed with filling
work only after methods and procedures established in compaction trials have been approved.
R2.5.7 Slopes for Cutting & Embankment

Where applicable, all slopes of cuttings and embankments shall be trimmed to the batters ,
with a tolerance of +50 mm measured at right angles to the slope.
R2.6 Sub-Base
The first major component below the Road base layer is known as Sub-base. Fill material for
sub-base shall consist of natural gravel or crushed rocks with sand, silt and clay confirming to
the requirements given in Table R1. PDO Type B & B1 fill material shall be used for all sub-
base works.
Laying and Compaction shall be carried out in accordance with section R2.5.5 & R2.5.6,
except as noted.
SP 1279 Page 245 Dec 2009

R2.7 Road Base

Road base material shall consist of a uniform mixture of gravel and/or stone fragments with
sand, silt and clay conforming to the requirements given in TABLE R1. PDO Type A fill
material shall be used for all road base works.
R2.7.1 Laying & Compaction of Road Base

Road base material shall be incorporated in an approved sequence including dumping,
spreading, watering, mixing and compacting. Equipment shall be subject to approval by the
Company. Generally, compaction shall be carried out in accordance with section R2.5.6
except as noted.
Road base material shall be compacted to 98% of the maximum density obtained in the
modified AASHTO compaction test and shall be carried out as soon as possible after the
material has been laid.
The completed road base material shall be protected against damage, and shall not be subject
to traffic unless approved by the Company.
R2.7.2 Compaction Equipment

Smooth-wheeled and pneumatic tyre rollers and vibratory compactors or power rammers,
employed for compacting soils and pavement materials, shall be of a type with compacting
effort approved by the Company and shall be capable of achieving the specified degrees of
compaction. The distribution of wheels on any roller shall be such that the whole of the
ground surface within the width of the roller is loaded during each pass.
Asphaltic Concrete – Flexible Pavement

R2.8 Asphalt Prime Coat
This work shall consist of applying a bitumen based surface coat by spray onto previously
constructed road surface. Grade MC 70 medium curing cut back asphalt confirming the
requirements to Table R7 shall be used for all prime coat.
R2.8.1 Construction Requirements for Prime Coat

1. Surface Preparation
The road surface shall be maintained in an approved condition, conforming to required grades
and sections. Defects shall be corrected immediately.
Prior to the application of priming coat, all loose materials shall be removed from the surface
and the surface shall be cleaned by approved mechanical sweepers or blowers and / or hand
brooms until as free from dust as practicable. The cleaned surface shall be given a light
application of water and allowed to dry before bituminous material is applied. The surface
shall not be subject to traffic after preparation to receive bituminous material.
2. Heating of Bituminous Material
Heating shall be by approved equipment. Methods of agitation or heating that introduce free
steam or moisture into bituminous material shall not be used. Materials heated 28oC above
the maximum application temperature specified in Table R7 shall be rejected as overheated.
3. Temperature of Bituminous Materials at the Time of Application
Bituminous materials shall be applied at temperatures within the ranges specified in Table R7.
Dec 2009 Page 246 SP 1279

R2.8.2 Application of Prime Coat

Prime coat shall be applied to all surfaces that will be covered by bituminous pavement.
Prime coat shall be applied to the surface as soon as practicable after it has been prepared and
is sufficiently dry, subject to Company approval.
Medium-curing cutback asphalt, grade MC-70, shall be applied by approved pressure

distributors operated by skilled workmen. Spray nozzles and spray bar shall be adjusted and
frequently checked so that uniform distribution is ensured. Spraying shall cease immediately
upon clogging or interference of any nozzle and corrective measures taken before spraying is
resumed.
Hand sprays shall be approved only for priming small patches or inaccessible areas that cannot
be primed by normal operation of the distributor.
Care shall be taken that application of bituminous material at the junction of spread is not in
excess of specified amount. Excess shall be squeezed from the surface. Skipped areas of
recognised deficiencies shall be corrected by means of approved hand sprays.
R2.8.3 Test Section & Rates of Application

Rate of application for prime coat material shall be within the limits shown in Table R9. This
shall be confirmed from field trials conducted on a test section or sections. Prior to the start of
priming operations, a test section of approved length shall be prepared to determine the rate of
application of prime coat. Where surfaces to be primed are constructed of different materials,
a test section for each type of material shall be prepared.
Table R9: Application Rates
Type of Surface Bituminous Material (kg/m2)
Minimum Maximum
Earth surfaces, shoulders and 0.8 1.2

water-bound base course.
Other surfaces. As determined from field tests
R2.8.4 Protection of Adjacent Structures

When bituminous materials are applied, surfaces of all structures, wheel guards, guardrail,
kerbs and gutters, and other roadway appurtenances shall be protected to prevent splattering
with bituminous material or marring by equipment operation.
Splattered or marred appurtenances shall have traces of bituminous materials removed and
damage repaired to the satisfaction of the Company.
R2.8.5 Blotting
If 48 hours after the bituminous materials has been applied, it has not dried sufficiently and
will still be damaged by traffic, a light application of blotting shall be applied, if required by
the Company,
Blotting material shall be of clean fine sand, chat sand or other material approved by the
Company, and shall be applied sparingly only on areas that have not dried.
SP 1279 Page 247 Dec 2009

R2.8.6 Maintenance of Prime Coat

The prime coat treatment and road base surface shall be maintained intact until covered by the
surface course. Areas where the prime coat has been damaged shall be cleaned from loose
material, defective road base repaired, to the satisfaction of the Company, and prime coat
reapplied. Prime coat shall be allowed for curing a minimum of 48 hours or as specified in the
contract document before laying the base course or wearing course.
R2.8.7 Traffic Control

Detours shall be provided for public and operational use in priming areas. Where no practical
detours are available, priming operations shall be confined to one-half of the roadway at a
time and traffic control shall be provided.
R2.8.8 Weather & Temperature Limitations

Prime coat shall only be applied when the surface is dry, when ambient temperature is above
15oC, and when there is no fog or rain.
R2.9 Asphaltic Concrete Base Course, Wearing Course & Single

Course
This work shall consist of mixing graded aggregate and bitumen binder in a central plant,
spreading and compacting the asphalt mix on an approved sub-base or road base surfaces.
Mineral aggregates confirming the requirements given in section R2.3.3 shall be used for the
Asphaltic Concrete Base Course, Wearing Course and Single Course.
Bitumen binder shall be petroleum derivative penetration 60/70 confirming to the

requirements of AASHTO designation M20.
R2.9.1 Mix Design

Company approval of job-mix formula shall be sought at least 30 days prior to the start of
production of plant mix, after approval of the aggregates, and after delivery to site of the
asphalt binder.
The Marshall Method Mix design (Asphalt Institute Manual Series MS-2) shall be used in
designing asphaltic concrete mixes.
Mixes shall be adjusted using the principles given in MS-2 to produce a satisfactory mix
performance in service. Particular regard should be given to secondary compaction and
sensitivity of the mix.
1. Job Mix Formula for Base Course or Single Course
The job-mix formula for asphaltic concrete base course or asphaltic concrete single course
shall combine mineral aggregates and asphaltic binder in such proportion as to produce a
mixture of asphalt conforming to the following composition limits by weight.
Materials % by weight
Total mineral aggregates 96 – 95
Bitumen (Asphalt) binder 4–5
When tested according to the Marshall Method, the asphalt mixture shall conform to the
following requirements.
Dec 2009 Page 248 SP 1279

Stability 800 min
Flow 2.0 – 5.0
Voids in total mix 4.0 – 7.0
Voids filled with asphalt 60 – 75
Voids in mineral aggregates As required by

the Marshall
Method Mix
Design (MS-2)
2. Job Mix Formula for Wearing Course
The job-mix formula for asphaltic concrete wearing course shall combine mineral aggregates
and asphalt in such proportion as to produce a mixture conforming to the following
composition limits by weight.
Materials % By weight
Total mineral aggregates 94 – 96
Asphaltic binder 4–6
When tested according to the Marshall Method, the asphalt mixture shall conform to the
following requirements:
Stability Kg 1000 min
Flow mm 2.0-4.0
Voids in total mix % 4.0-5.0
Voids filled with asphalt % 65-75
Voids in mineral aggregates % As required by the Marshall

Method Mix Design (MS-2)
Trial mixes shall be prepared and results submitted to the Company for approval.
The Marshall Test procedure shall be used to determine the optimum percentage of bitumen to
be incorporated in the mixture. The number of blows shall be 75 at each end of the mould.
3. Job-mix Tolerances for Base Course
Gradation of combined aggregate including mineral filler shall be within the limits specified in
section R2.3.3. The Company may require that the specified limits be varied, on the basis of
the Marshall tests, to obtain optimum stability and life of the completed mix.
Following approval of the job-mix formula, the plant shall be adjusted to proportion individual
aggregate, mineral filler and asphalt to produce a final mix that, when compared to the job-
mix formula, shall be within the limits given in Table R10.
SP 1279 Page 249 Dec 2009

Table R10: Job-mix Tolerances for Base course
Passing AASHTO No. 4 Sieve (4.75 mm) : + 5%
Passing AASHTO No. 10 Sieve (2.00 mm) : + 3%
Retained on AASHTO No. 200 Sieve (75 um) : + 5%
Passing AASHTO No.200 Sieve (75 um) : + 1.5%
Asphalt Content : + 0.3%
The mix shall be tested periodically and, if necessary, the plant shall be readjusted to maintain
conformity to the job mix formula. If, during construction, the grading of the aggregates
alters, the mix shall be redesigned and the plant readjusted.
R2.9.2 Preparation of Asphaltic Concrete

1. Preparation of Bitumen Binder
The bitumen binder shall be heated within a temperature range of 135 oC to 163 oC at the
time of mixing. Material reheated more than 42 oC above the maximum shown shall be
considered overheated and shall not be used. Binder received from the refinery at
temperatures in excess of 163 oC but not exceeding 191 oC may be used.
2. Preparation of Mineral Aggregates
Each aggregate ingredient shall be heated and dried such that the temperature in the hot fines
bin after screening shall not exceed 163 oC. Aggregates containing sufficient moisture to
cause foaming in the mixture, or of temperature is in excess of 163 oC, shall be removed from
the bins and returned to their respective stockpiles.
Immediately after heating, aggregate shall be screened in at least 3 sizes and conveyed into
separate bins ready for batching and mixing with asphalt material. When the aggregates
furnished are of such size and grading that separating into 3 bins is impractical, the number of
required separations may be reduced to 2, subject to approval by the Company. The efficiency
of screening operations shall be sufficient to produce, at plant operating capacity, gradations in
each of the sizes of heated and dried aggregates which are reasonably uniform and result in the
production of a mixture complying with the limits specified (refer section R2.3.3) for the
aggregate.
3. Preparation of Asphalt Concrete Mixture
Asphaltic concrete mixture shall be prepared in a central mixing plant of weight-batching

type, approved by the Company.
Dried aggregate, specified for asphalt concrete construction and prepared as prescribed, above
shall be combined in the plant in the proportionate amounts approved. Binder shall be
introduced into the mixture in the proportionate amount in accordance with the job-mix
formula.
Initial mixing time shall be determined by the Contractor and may be increased if additional
time is necessary to obtain a homogeneous mixture and satisfactory coating, subject to
On batch plants, timing shall begin at the start of the asphalt introduction into the pug mill.
Dec 2009 Page 250 SP 1279

The mixing time for continuous plants shall be determined by the following formula, or other
methods approved by the Company.
Pug mill dead capacity in kg
Mixing time in seconds: Pug mill output in kg/sec
The temperature of asphalt, except for temporary fluctuations, shall not be lower than 14 oC
below the temperature of the aggregate at the time the two materials enter the mixer or pug
mill.
R2.9.3 Transportation
Asphaltic concrete material shall be transported in clean vehicles, covered over during transit
or awaiting tipping. Dust, coated dust, oil or water on the interior of the vehicles may be used
to facilitate discharge of the mixed materials, but the amount shall be kept to a minimum and
any excess shall be removed by tipping or brushing.
The distance, and hence the time, between the mixing plant and the Worksite shall not be such
as to cause a change in the asphaltic concrete material to the detriment of the Works.
R2.9.4 Surface Preparation for Asphalt mix

When the Asphalt mixture is placed on a prepared sub-base or road base, the preparation and
finishing of the surface shall be in accordance with section R2.5 to R2.7.
When the asphalt mixture is placed on an existing primed surface, the surface shall be
prepared and primed in accordance with section R2.8.
When the asphalt mixture is placed on existing asphalt or a concrete surface, the surface shall
be cleaned by a mechanical sweeper or by a power broom and make the surface free from
dust. In addition any loose, broken or shattered asphalt material along the edges of the
existing surface shall be removed and exposed sub-grade and sufficient width of shoulder
adjacent to the edge of existing surface to receive new asphalt mixture shall be shaped, bladed,
compacted and primed to provide a uniform firm sub-grade for the new surface course.
R2.9.5 Tack Coat

When two layers of asphalt mixture are to be placed, a Tack coat shall be applied on the
existing layer.
Liquid asphalt for tack coat shall be of rapid curing type, cut back grade RC-250 as specified
in Table R8, at an application rate not more than 0.25 kg/m2. No asphalt mixture shall be laid
on a tack coat without the approval of the Company.
R2.9.6 Laying of Asphalt Mix

Asphalt mixture shall be spread and finished true to crown and grade by automatically
controlled asphalt paver. Asphalt mixtures may be spread and finished by hand methods only
where machine methods are impractical, subject to approval by the Company.
An automatically controlled paver shall spread asphalt mixtures without tearing the surface
and shall strike a finish that is smooth, true to cross section, uniform in density and texture and
free from hollows, transverse corrugations and other irregularities.
The paver shall be operated at a speed, which will give best results for the type of paver being
used and which coordinates satisfactorily with rate of delivery of the mixture to paver so as to
provide a uniform rate of placement without intermittent operation of the paver.
SP 1279 Page 251 Dec 2009

Mixed material shall be delivered to paver in time to permit completion of spreading, finishing
and compaction of mixture during daylight hours.
Asphalt mixtures shall be delivered to the paver at a temperature between 139-163 °C.
Mixtures delivered to the paver at lower temperatures shall be discarded. The leading half of
half-roadway paving shall not get ahead of the trailing half of the pavement by more than one
average full-day of paving and, in no case, shall the leading half be more than 0.5 km ahead of
the trailing half. Should this requirement not be complied with then paving shall be suspended
on the leading half until such time as the trailing half has been paved to a point approximately
even with the leading half.
Longitudinal joints in successive layers shall be offset not less than 150 mm nor more than
300 mm. The width of surface or top course placements, where applicable, shall conform to
traffic lane edges.
Where successive layers are to be placed, the surface of the existing layer shall be swept clean
with a power broom, or by other means as approved by the Company, and a tack coat shall be
applied in accordance with the section R2.9.5.
Asphalt mixtures, except on levelling courses, shall be spread in a placement thickness so that,
after rolling, nominal thickness of compacted asphalt material shall not exceed 80 mm. Where
practical, top layers should not exceed 60 mm.
Maximum thickness for layers may be increased slightly when such increase is more adaptable
to total pavement thickness and when, in the opinion of the Company, is not detrimental to
placement and rolling conditions and that the specified compaction densities are consistent.
1. Hand Laying
Hand Laying of bituminous material shall only be used for:
- Laying regulating courses of irregular shape and varying thickness.
- Confined spaces where it is impracticable for a paver to operate.
- Footways.
Hand-raking of wearing course material which has been laid by a paver, and the addition of
such material by hand-spreading to the paved area for adjustment of level, may be used only:
- At the edges of the layers of material and at gullies and manholes.
- Where otherwise approved by the Company.
Hand laid work shall conform to all specification requirements except for those relating to the
manner of operating pavers.
2. Preliminary Survey & Reference String Line
A survey shall be carried out as required for the reference grade and shall be subject to
Company approval.
Following approval, an approved reference string line shall be erected and maintained and the
paver operated to conform to the string line for the initial layer and/or any other layers, as
required. Elevation control point stakes for the sub-grade, road base and the first layer of base
course shall be set at a maximum spacing of 20 m. For subsequent layers, control points shall
be set at 10 m maximum spacing.
Dec 2009 Page 252 SP 1279

An approved mobile string line, for all layers not laid with the erected string line, shall be
furnished and maintained and the paver operated to conform to that string line. The string line
shall be erected parallel to the reference grade and the asphalt mixture shall be spread at a
constant elevation above, below or at the string line elevation.
The use of an automatically controlled asphalt paver to provide both longitudinal and
transverse control shall include furnishing and maintaining a string line, whether it be erected
or mobile.
Longitudinal and transverse controls shall operate independently of each other to the extent
that the surface of the asphalt mixture shall conform to the string line and shall be uniform in
cross section or crown.
Centreline points shall be established and maintained until surfacing is completed.
The Company may require a string line to be erected as a guide for the finishing machine in
order to maintain uniform edge alignment. Other methods shall be subject to approval by the
Company.
3. Machine Spreading
A survey study shall be made of the centre line profile and crown of existing surface or base to
determine or calculate a Reference Grade Line. The fill values at each profile point necessary
to erect the Reference String Line shall be submitted to the Company for reference and
approval.
On initial traffic lane paving operation, the asphalt mixture shall be spread with the asphalt
paver to a grade line constant to the Reference String Line. Erection and maintenance of the
Reference String Line shall be so coordinated that the string will be taut and free from sags at
the time it is in use as a guide for the paver. On second and subsequent layers asphaltic
mixture shall be spread as described for the initial layer except that spreading of the asphalt
shall conform to the Mobile String Line.
A Mobile String Line or equivalent shall be used as reference guide on all paving operations
except when Reference String Line is used or other provisions are made and approved by the
Company.
If the existing surface is of acceptable centreline grade, as determined from the profile survey,
the Company may approve the use of the Mobile String line for all layers.
4. Thickness of Cores
The total depth of base course, wearing course or single course shall be measured in two
separate operations for each type of material. Thickness determination shall be made at a
minimum of two locations per lane kilometre at locations approved by the Company.
First core in base course shall be taken when all layers but one are laid. Second core in base
courses shall be taken through the last layer adjacent to the location where the first core was
taken. The first core in the surface courses shall be taken when all layers but one of this type
of material are laid. The second core in surface courses shall be taken through the last layer
adjacent to the location where the first surface course core was taken.
An approved saw or core drill shall be used for cutting samples from compacted mixture on
the road. The equipment shall be capable of cutting mixture without shattering the edges of
the specimen or otherwise disturbing the density of the specimen. Sawed samples shall be
nominal 100 mm in diameter.
Unless approved otherwise, cores extracted for thickness measurement shall not be used for
density determination and density samples shall not be used for thickness measurements.
SP 1279 Page 253 Dec 2009

When necessary, water, ice or other cooling substance shall be applied to the surface of the
pavement to prevent samples from shattering or disintegrating. All sampling and testing for
the gradation, Marshal stability, flow, density, bitumen content, etc., shall be carried out in
accordance with BS EN 13036, BS 594987 and other appropriate BS EN, ASTM & AASHTO
standards.
R2.9.7 Compaction of Mixture

After spreading and strike-off and as soon as the mixture conditions permit, rolling shall be
performed without excessive shoving or tearing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and
uniformly compacted. Material, which has cracked as a result of over rolling, shall be rejected
and removed. Rejected material shall be replaced by new material.
Rollers shall be of steel wheel and/or pneumatic-tyre type and shall be in good condition,
capable of reversing without backlash and shall be operated at speeds slow enough to avoid
displacement of asphalt mixture. The number and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to
compact the mixture to the required density while it is still in a workable condition.
Equipments, which result in excessive crushing of aggregate, shall not be used.
Initial or breakdown rolling shall be carried out be means of a tandem power steel roller or a
3-wheel power steel roller. Rolling shall begin as soon as the mixture will bear the roller
without undue displacement. Rolling shall be longitudinally, beginning at low side of spread
material and proceeding toward the high side, overlapping successive trips by at least one-half
the width of rear wheels. Alternate trips of the roller shall be of slightly different lengths.
Motion of the roller shall be slow enough to avoid displacement of mixture. The spread of the
roller shall be subject to approval by the Company. To prevent adhesion of the mixture, the
wheels of the roller shall be kept properly moistened with water but excess water shall not be
used.
Initial or breakdown rolling, shall be followed by rolling with a pneumatic tyre roller. Final
compaction and finish rolling shall be carried out means of tandem power steel roller unless
otherwise approved. When the specified density is not obtained, changes in size and/or
number of rollers shall be made to satisfy the density requirement.
Rollers shall be operated by competent and experienced roller men and shall be kept in
operation continuously, if necessary, so that all parts of the pavement receive substantially
equal compaction at the required time. If a proper method of rolling is not employed, the
Company may stop the operation of the mixing plant.
Road density requirements shall be equal to or greater than 98% of the Marshall Density of
each day's production.
Mixture that becomes loose, broken, mixed with foreign material or which is in any way
defective in finished density or which does not comply in any other respect with requirements,
shall be removed, replaced with suitable material and finished in accordance with the
specifications.
R2.9.8 Joints for Asphalt Base Course, Wearing Course & Single Course
Where joints between laying widths or transverse joints have to be made in the wearing course
or single course, the material shall be fully compacted and the joint made flush in one or other
of the following ways, Method 3 always being used for transverse joints where applicable:
Method 1:
By heating the joint with an approved joint heater at the time when the additional width is
being laid but without cutting back or coating with binder. The heater shall raise the
temperature for the full depth of the wearing course or single course to a figure within the
rolling temperature range specified for the material and for a width not less than 75 mm on
Dec 2009 Page 254 SP 1279

each side of the joint. In this case, however, equipment necessary for operating Method 3
shall be available for use in the event of breakdown.
Method 2:
By using two or more pavers operating in echelon, where this is practicable and in sufficient
proximity for adjacent widths to be fully compacted by continuous rolling, or by using a
multiple-lane-width paver.
Method 3:
By cutting back the exposed joints to a vertical face of not less than the specified thickness,
discarding all loosened material and coating the vertical face completely with a thin uniform
coat of rapid curing cut back asphalt grade RC-250.
All joints shall be offset at least 300 mm, from parallel joints in the layer beneath, or as shown
on the drawings.
Transverse joints should be avoided where possible. The minimum space of transverse joints
in the final course shall be 15 m.
R2.9.9 Contact Surfaces, Lay-bys, Edges & Weather Limitations of

Asphalt works
1. Contact Surfaces of Structures
Contact surfaces of kerbing, gutters, manholes, Irish crossing, cut-off walls and similar
structures shall be painted with a thin uniform coating of asphaltic material, approved by the
Company. Where the machine method of laying and finishing of Asphalt works is
impractical, hand methods as detailed in section R2.9.6 & R2.9.7 shall be used for the areas
near the contact surfaces and shall be compacted to the required level.
2. Side Roads, Entrances, Lay-bys & Junctions
Side roads, entrances, lay-bys and junctions shall be surfaced in accordance with the Contract
documents or as directed by the Company.
3. Edges
On completion of the wearing course or single course, the edges shall be cut back to a vertical
face to the dimensions specified in the Contract documents unless laid against a vertical
surface, i.e., wall, kerbstone, etc.
4. Weather Limitations
Hot asphaltic mixtures shall be placed only when ambient temperature is 4 oC or above, when
there is no fog or rain and when the existing surface is free from moisture.
R2.9.10 Finishing Tolerances for Asphalt Works

On completion of each construction layer, compliance with the requirements of this section
shall be subject to approval by the Company before the start of work on the next layer.
1. Surface Level Tolerances
The levels of pavement courses shall be determined from the true finished road surface
calculated from the vertical profile and cross falls specified. The vertical depth below the true
pavement surface of any point on the constructed surface of the formation or pavement
courses shall be within the appropriate tolerances stated in TABLE R11.
SP 1279 Page 255 Dec 2009

Table R11: Surface Level Tolerances
Level Tolerance
Road Surface and Base Course + 6 mm
Road base + 15 mm
Formation + 20 mm
The surface level of the pavement at any point shall not deviate vertically from the true
finished road surface by more than + 6 mm. However, the combination of permitted
tolerances in different pavement layers shall not result in reduction of the overall depth of
wearing course and base course by more than 5 mm from that specified or a reduction in the
thickness of the whole pavement by more than 15 mm from the specified thickness.
For single course asphaltic concrete, the requirement that the minimum depth of asphaltic
concrete shall be not less than the value shown in the Contract documents shall take
precedence over all other requirements.
To confirm compliance with these requirements, measurements of surface levels shall be taken
at points, agreed with the Company, at 10 m centres longitudinally and at 2 m centres
transversely in any length of pavement. Compliance with these requirements shall be
regarded as met when not more than 1 measurement in any consecutive 10 longitudinally or 1
in any transverse line, exceeds the tolerances stated above, but this 1 measurement shall not
exceed the tolerance for the layer concerned by more than 5 mm.
2. Surface Regularity
The surface regularity shall be tested at points, agreed with the Company, with a 3 m long
straightedge placed in any direction on the road. The maximum deviation of the surface
below the straightedge shall be as given in Table R12.
Table R12: Surface Regularity
Level Deviation
Road Surface 3 mm
Base Course Surface 6 mm
Road base surface 10 mm
R2.9.11 Rectification of Formation & Asphalt Works

Areas out of tolerance shall be made good in the manner described below.
1. Formation Level
Surfaces that are too high shall be re-trimmed and re-compacted.
Surfaces that are too low shall be scarified and suitable material of the same classification and
moisture content, or other material approved by the Company, shall be laid and compacted.
Dec 2009 Page 256 SP 1279

2. Road base
The top 75 mm shall be scarified, reshaped with material added or removed as necessary, and
re-compacted. The area treated shall be not less than 10 m long and 2 m wide, or other
3. Asphaltic Concrete
A base course, wearing course or single course shall have the full depth of the layer removed
and replaced with fresh material laid and compacted to Specification. The area rectified shall
be the full width of the paving laid in one operation, and at least 5 m long if base course or 15
m if wearing course or single course. Testing of the wearing course or single course shall be
conducted as soon as practicable after completion of the surfacing and remedial works shall be
completed before the road is opened to traffic.
R2.10 Asphalt Surface Treatment

This work shall consist of spraying of one or two coats of bituminous binder onto a prepared
surface with each coat being spread with aggregate cover material. Asphalt surface treatment
shall be either single surface treatment or double surface treatment as described in this section.
Prime coat shall be medium-curing cutback asphalt of Grade MC-70 to confirm the
requirements as given in Table R7.
The seal coat shall be rapid-curing cutback asphalt of Grade RC-800 to confirm the
requirements as given in Table R8.
Aggregates used for cover materials shall comply with the requirements given in section
R2.3.4.
R2.10.1 Construction Requirement for Surface Treatments

1. Preparation for Surface Treatment
Existing road base shall be trimmed and graded to the elevations specified in the Contract
documents. Damaged areas shall be removed and reinstated to the approval of the Company.
2. Weather & Temperature Limitations
Surface treatment operations shall be carried on only when the surface is dry, when
atmospheric temperature is above 15 oC and when there is no fog or rain.
3. Protection of Adjacent Structures
When asphalt materials are applied, surfaces of all structures, wheel guards, guardrail, kerbs
and gutters and other roadway shall be protected to prevent splattering with asphalt material or
marring by equipment.
Splattered or marked appurtenances shall have all traces of asphalt materials removed and all
damage repaired to the satisfaction of the Company.
SP 1279 Page 257 Dec 2009

R2.10.2 Single Asphalt Surface Treatment - Construction Requirements

Prime coat shall be applied as detailed in section R2.8.
After the prime coat has been applied and has thoroughly penetrated the surface and cured, the
RC-800 Seal Coat shall be applied together with the cover material and the surface shall be
rolled and manipulated.
1. Application of Asphalt Seal Coat Material
Asphalt seal coat material shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor in a uniform,
continuous spread over the section to be treated and within the temperature range specified.
The quantity of asphalt seal coat material to be used per m2 shall be within the limits
hereinafter specified.
A strip of building paper, at least 1 m in width and with a length equal to that of the spray bar
of the distributor plus 300 mm, shall be used at the beginning of each spread. If the cut-off is
not positive, the use of paper may be required at the end of each spread. The paper shall be
removed and disposed of in an approved manner. The distributor shall be moving forward at
proper application speed at the time the spray bar is opened. Skipped areas or deficiencies
shall be corrected in an approved manner. Junctions of spreads shall be carefully made to
assure a smooth riding surface.
The length of spread of the asphalt seal coat material shall not be in excess of that which
trucks loaded with cover coat material may immediately cover.
The spread of asphalt material shall not be more than 150 mm wider than the width covered by
the cover coat material from the spreading device. Operation shall not proceed in such
manner that asphalt seal coat materials are allowed to chill, set up or dry or otherwise impair
retention of the cover coat.
The distributor, when not spreading, shall be so designed that the spray bar or mechanism will
not drip asphalt materials on the surface of the travelled way.
Distribution of asphalt seal coat material shall be so regulated, and sufficient asphalt material
left in the distributor at the end of each application, that there will be uniform distribution of
asphalt material. The distributor shall not be allowed to expel air with the asphalt material
thereby causing uneven coverage. The angle of spray nozzles and height of spray bar shall be
so adjusted and frequently checked that uniform distribution is ensured. If the raise of the
spray bar when the load is removed is excessive and contributes to dripping and streaking of
the seal course, the frame of the distributor shall be blocked or snubbed to the axle of the truck
to maintain a constant height of the spray bar above road surface. Distribution shall cease
immediately upon any clogging or interference of any nozzle and corrective measures shall be
taken before distribution is resumed.
2. Application of Aggregate
Immediately following application of asphalt seal coat material, cover material shall be spread
with an approved aggregate spreader, in quantities approved by the Company, and within the
limits specified. Spreading shall be accomplished in such a manner that tyres of trucks or
aggregate spreader shall not contact uncovered and newly applied asphalt seal coat material.
Moisture content in aggregate applied directly to the surface of asphalt seal coat material shall
not exceed 3% by weight plus one-half the water absorption of the aggregate at the time of
delivery to the Site. Free moisture shall not be allowed to leak from the truck bed.
The operation of distributing asphalt seal coat material shall not be in excess of 300 m ahead
of the cover material.
Dec 2009 Page 258 SP 1279

Equipment, which may result in displacement of cover material or damage to seal courses,
shall not be started, stopped or turned on the working area.
Spreading equipment shall be of such width and arrangement that as aggregate is placed,
complete coverage is obtained. Prior to initial rolling, cover material shall not be broomed,
dragged or bladed. Any rearrangement of the cover material shall be by hand methods.
Overlapping the applications of cover material shall be avoided and all spillage shall be
removed from the surface. Before rolling, the asphalt seal coat material shall be uniformly
covered.
Rates of application for asphalt seal coat material and aggregate shall be within the limits
given in Table R13.
Table R13 –Rate of Application of Asphalt & Aggregate for Single Asphalt Surface
Treatment
Material Min Max
Liquid Asphalt RC-800 (l/m2) 1.59 2.54
Coverage of Aggregate (m2/m3 ) 65 100
Specific rates of application of asphalt seal coat material and aggregate shall be subject to
approval by the Company from the test section performed in general conformance to the
requirements.
3. Manipulation
Following the application of the asphalt seal coat material and the aggregate to the road
surface, and after the aggregate has been rearranged as may be necessary to provide uniform
and complete coverage, the cover material shall be embedded by rolling in a manner described
as follows:
The first rolling shall be accomplished by the use of a self-propelled, two axle tandem steel
roller.
Sufficient number of steel rollers shall be furnished so that initial rolling consisting of one
complete coverage with steel rollers shall be completed within 30 min after the cover material
has been applied. Pneumatic-tyred rolling shall begin immediately after completion of initial
rolling and shall continue until 3 complete coverage have been obtained. The sequence of
rolling, with steel and pneumatic-tyred rollers may be varied subject to approval by the
Company.
Rollers shall be self-propelled and shall be operated on each coverage so that each succeeding
trip of the roller overlaps the coverage of the preceding trip. Steel wheel rollers shall be
operated at a maximum speed of 5 km/h and pneumatic-tyred rollers at a maximum speed of 8
km/h. Weight of rollers shall be varied to obtain the most satisfactory embedment of cover
material without undue crushing of the aggregate.
Speed of rollers or rolling sequence shall be controlled so that it is unnecessary for one roller
to turn out to permit another roller to pass. Rollers shall not turn on the surface.
Pneumatic-tyred rollers may be substituted for steel wheel rollers, subject to approval by the
Company, when the cover material is excessively crushed under a tandem roller. When
pneumatic-tyred rollers are substituted for steel rollers, the rolling specified shall not be
decreased; two passes of a pneumatic-tyred roller are required to equal one pass of a steel
roller.
SP 1279 Page 259 Dec 2009

Drag brooms or light blades shall not be used to shift the cover material until initial rolling
with pneumatic-tyred and steel rollers has been completed and the asphalt seal coat material
has cooled and set-up sufficiently to hold the cover material, preferably not earlier than the
day following the application of the cover material. However, the entire surface shall be kept
completely covered at all times to prevent traffic from picking up the asphalt seal coat
material. If necessary, additional cover material shall be added and the additional material
shall receive additional rolling.
The second period of manipulation shall begin on the day following the first rolling, if
satisfactory weather conditions permit, or as soon thereafter as conditions do permit. This
manipulation shall consist of blading and dragging the loose aggregate to spread it uniformly
over the roadbed and the rolling of the surface with a pneumatic-tyred roller. Blading and
dragging shall be conducted so as not to displace embedded material.
Rolling during the second period of manipulation shall constitute rolling the entire previous
day's work with two complete coverage with a pneumatic-tyred roller. A suitable light blade
and drag broom shall be operated immediately prior to and just ahead of the roller to keep all
of the loose aggregate uniformly spread over the asphalt surface during rolling.
The third period of manipulation shall begin on the day following the second period of
manipulation, if satisfactory weather conditions permit, or as soon thereafter as weather
conditions do permit. This third period of manipulation shall be as specified for the second
period of manipulation. The third period of manipulation may be omitted if, in the opinion of
the Company, the weather and roadbed conditions are such that the dragging and rolling
would not be beneficial to the surface.
4. Maintenance of Completed Work
Asphalt seal coat material, or aggregate or both asphalt seal coat material and aggregate, shall
be added to portions of the project as required. After all other work has been completed and
prior to final inspection and acceptance, excess loose cover material along the edges of the
surface shall be broomed and bladed off the shoulder to provide a definite and distinct line
along the edge of the sealed surface.
5. Working Period
Work shall be so conducted that the work of applying asphalt and aggregate and rolling shall
be completed during the time from sunrise to sunset and under favourable weather conditions.
R2.10.3 Double Asphalt Surface Treatment - Construction Requirements

All of the requirements specified for "Single Asphalt Surface Treatment" in section R2.10.2
(except for the rate of application), shall apply to "Double Asphalt Surface Treatment"
supplemented as follows.
1. Asphalt Seal Coat
Immediately after the application of asphalt seal coat and aggregate to the road surface and
after aggregate has been rearranged as may be necessary to provide uniform and complete
coverage, the surface shall be sufficiently rolled with an approved pneumatic-tyred roller to
embed the aggregate thoroughly into the asphalt seal coat material.
Sufficient rollers shall be provided for initial rolling consisting of two complete coverage with
pneumatic-tyred rollers to be completed within 30 min after cover material is applied. Rollers
shall be operated on each pass such that each succeeding trip of a roller will overlap at least
50% of the width of the proceeding trip. There shall be no blading or dragging of aggregate
for the first seal coat.
Rearrangement of cover material before or during initial rolling shall be by approved hand
methods. Rolling shall be continued after the rolling specified above is completed until a
Dec 2009 Page 260 SP 1279

maximum amount of the aggregate is satisfactorily embedded in the asphalt seal coat material.
Pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be operated at a maximum speed of 8 km/h.
Rates of application for asphalt seal coat material and aggregate for Double Asphalt Surface
Treatment shall be within the limits given in Table R14.
Table R14 –Rate of Application of Asphalt & Aggregate for Double Asphalt Surface
Treatment
Liquid Asphalt RC-800 Aggregate Coverage of

(l/m2) Aggregate (m2/m3)
Application
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
First Course 1.10 1.70 55 80
Second Course 1.20 1.80 110 165
Specific rates of application of asphalt seal coat material and aggregate shall be established
from a test section approved by the Company.
2. Second Seal Coat
The second seal coat shall not be applied for 30 days after application of the first seal coat
without the approval of the Company.
Immediately prior to the second application of asphalt seal coat material for sealing, the
surface shall be cleaned in an approved manner of all dust and excess cover material which is
not embedded in the first application of asphalt seal coat material. Care shall be exercised not
to dislodge any cover material, which is embedded in the asphalt material. The second seal
coat shall be applied as specified in section R2.10.2, except that immediately following
completion of the initial pneumatic rolling the surface shall be rolled with an approved steel
roller.
Brooms or drag brooms shall not be used to shift the cover material until the initial rolling
with the pneumatic-tyred and steel rollers is completed and until the asphalt seal coat material
has cooled and set up sufficiently to hold the cover material, not earlier than the day following
the application of the second seal coat. Rearrangements of the cover material during the initial
rolling shall be by approved hand methods.
Rolling shall be longitudinal and shall commence at the outer edges of the road, overlapping
the shoulders, and progress toward the centre. Rolling shall continue until the entire surface
has been completely covered at least twice with a pneumatic-tyred roller and once with a steel
wheel roller. Maximum speed of the rollers shall be as specified in section R2.10.2.
3. Additional Manipulation of Completed Surfaces
The surface shall be manipulated for a period of 5 days after the second seal coat has been
applied. The manipulation shall consist of application of additional asphalt seal coat material
or aggregate or additional dragging and rolling or all of these operations to portions of surface
that, require such additional treatment. Manipulation shall also include the dragging and one
complete rolling with the steel roller over the entire surface each day from the time the surface
is complete until and including the fifth day after. A light blade equipped with broom drag
shall be operated immediately ahead of the roller throughout all rolling during the
manipulation period.
SP 1279 Page 261 Dec 2009

Daily dragging and rolling under manipulation may be omitted, if in the opinion of the
Company, weather and roadbed conditions are such that dragging and rolling would not be
beneficial to the surface.
R2.10.4 Resurfacing
1. Potholes
Prior to resurfacing, all loose material from potholes shall be removed and excavated back to
firm material. The pothole shall be filled with approved well-compacted granular material.
Work shall generally be carried out in accordance with section R2.5.5 & R2.5.6.
2. Preparation of existing road surface
The surface of an existing road to be resurfaced shall be thoroughly cleaned by brushing and
shall be free from loose or foreign material, slightly damped and free from standing water.
After approval of the surface by the Company, a tack coat of emulsified asphalt type SS-1, SS-
1h, CSS-1, or CSS-1h diluted one part water to one part emulsified asphalt shall be applied at
a rate of spread of 0.23 to 0.68 l/m2 at least 24 h before surfacing, or as approved by the
Company. Before dilution the emulsified asphalt shall comply with the requirements of
AASHTO specification M140 or M208. Traffic shall be prevented from using the primed
surface.
3. Materials for Asphaltic Concrete Overlay
The materials used for asphaltic concrete overlay shall comply with section R2.3.3.
4. Regulating Course
A regulating course of asphaltic concrete overlay of 25 mm minimum thickness shall be laid

and compacted in accordance with section R2.9.6 & R2.9.7.
5. Wearing Course
A wearing course of asphaltic concrete shall be laid and compacted in accordance with section
R2.9.6 & R2.9.7.
6. Surface Regularity
The surface regularity shall be tested in accordance with section 2.9.10 and the nominal
allowable deviation of the surface below the straightedge shall be as follows:
Regulating Course: 8 mm
Road Surface: 4 mm
Where any tolerances are exceeded, rectification shall be executed in accordance with section
R2.9.11.
Dec 2009 Page 262 SP 1279

Cement Concrete - Rigid Pavement

R2.11 Concrete Paving
The Specification for concrete works associated with concrete paving areas shall comply with
Chapter D, supplemented by the following:
R2.11.1 Preparation of Pavement Base

The base upon which concrete pavement is laid shall have been constructed or prepared in
accordance with provisions of sections R2.5 to R2.10 and shall be smooth, true to design
grades and cross-sections and shall so be maintained throughout the period of placing concrete
pavement.
Where specified in the Contract documents, an underlay shall be used to provide a

waterproof/slip membrane between the concrete slab and the base course. Overlap of underlay
material, where required, shall be at least 300 mm. Water shall not pond on the membrane,
which shall be completely waterproof when the concrete is laid.
To ensure proper depth and section, a scratch template, true to depth and section and resting
on accurately set side forms, shall be moved over the surface immediately before placing
concrete. Any irregularities shall be immediately corrected. High spots shall be planed down.
Low spots shall either be filled to the proper elevation with approved material, which shall be
watered, compacted and struck off to required grade, or additional concrete shall be placed.
Material shall not be deposited on sub grade prior to checking and approval. Materials shall
not be stored or stockpiled on sub grade.
R2.11.2 Formwork
Forms shall be made of steel of approved section, with a base width of at least 200 mm and
depth equal to the thickness of pavement at the edge. Forms shall be staked with steel stakes.
Each section of the forms shall have a stake pocket at each end and at intervals of not more
than 1.5 m between ends. Stake pockets shall have approved devices for locking forms to steel
stakes. Each section of forms shall be straight and free from bends and warps. No section
shall show a variation greater than 3 mm in 3 m from a true plane surface on the top of the
form and the inside face shall not vary more than 6 mm from a plane surface.
Before placing forms, underlying material shall be excavated to the required grade and shall
be firm and compact. Forms shall have full bearing upon the foundation throughout their
length and shall be placed to the required grade and alignment of the edge of finished
pavement. Forms shall be so supported, during the entire operation of placing, tamping and
finishing the pavement, that vertical deviation from the proper elevation shall not exceed
3mm.
Forms shall be well set to required lines and grades in advance of placing concrete preferably
not less than 200 m.
R2.11.3 Reinforcement
Reinforcement for concrete roads shall be either square or oblong welded mesh fabric
complying with BS 4483.
Reinforcement shall be free of pitting, both loose and surface rust, mill scale, oil, grease,
adherent earth or any other material that may impair the bond between concrete and
reinforcement, or that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the
concrete. Reinforcement shall be protected against sodium chloride contamination.
Reinforcement shall be stacked, correctly labelled and neatly stored clear of the ground.
Wire for fixing reinforcement shall be No. 16 BSWG black, annealed, soft iron, tying wire.
SP 1279 Page 263 Dec 2009

R2.11.4 Spacers for Concrete Cover

Spacer blocks used for maintaining the min concrete cover shall comply with the requirements
stated in Chapter D– Concrete Works. Where two layers of mesh reinforcement are required,
the bottom layer shall be supported by bar chairs.
R2.11.5 Mixing, Transportation, Placing & Compaction of Concrete

Data on mixing, mixes, delivery, storage and batching of concrete shall be in accordance with
Chapter D.
1. Trial Bays
The plant, equipment and method of construction shall be demonstrated to the Company by
first laying two trial bays.
At least one month prior to the date proposed for the trial, a description of the plant,
equipment and method of construction shall be submitted for approval to the Company.
For the trail to be approved, the length of pavement shall conform, without remedial works.
2. Placing Concrete
Concrete shall be placed on the prepared surfaces in successive batches for the full width
between forms and in a manner, which will require as little re-handling as possible. Spreading
shall be by an approved mechanical spreader in a manner that shall prevent segregation and
separation of materials. Hand spreading, where required, shall be with shovels, not rakes.
Workmen shall not walk in freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes coated with earth or
foreign substances. The amount of material deposited shall be sufficiently in excess of that
required to form the pavement to the required cross-section after consolidation, in order to
provide a roll of concrete, ahead of the front screed of the finishing machine, for the full
length of the screed.
Concrete shall be placed as near to expansion and contraction joints as possible without
disturbing them, but shall not be dumped from the discharge bucket or hopper onto a joint
assembly unless the hopper is well centred on the joint assembly. Damage to joint assemblies
caused by dumped concrete shall be repaired immediately.
3. Compaction
Concrete compacted by a vibrating beam shall be struck off at such a level that the surface
level after all entrapped air has been removed is above that of the side forms. The concrete
shall be compacted by a steel-shod hardwood compacting beam, not less than 75 mm wide,
225 mm deep with an energy input of not less than 250 W/m width of slab, the beam being
lifted and moved forward by increments not exceeding the beam width. Alternatively, a
vibrating twin beam compactor of equivalent power may be used. After every 1.5 m length of
slab has been compacted, the vibrating beam shall be taken back 1.5 m and then drawn slowly
forward whilst vibrating over the compacted surface, to provide a smooth finish.
The surface shall then be regulated by at least 2 passes of a scraping straight edge with blade
length not less than 1.8 m. If the surface is torn extensively by the straight edge, owing to
irregularities in the surface, a further pass of the vibrating beam shall be made, followed by a
further pass of the scraping straight edge.
Superficial water shall not be added to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing
operation.
Hand finishing methods shall require prior approval by the Company.
Dec 2009 Page 264 SP 1279

4. Surface Finish
During initial construction, after the completion of joints and the final pass of the finishing
beam, and before curing, the surface of concrete shall be wire brushed at right angles to the
centre line of the pavements.
R2.11.6 Protecting and Curing of Concrete Works

1. Initial Curing
As the surface of the newly laid pavement is progressively finished initial curing and
protection operations shall be started.
Upon completion of the finishing operation, and while the surface of concrete is still moist but
no free water remains, a liquid curing membrane, as specified in AASHTO M 148 (Type 2),
shall be applied to exposed surfaces of pavement at a rate of not less than 1 litre to 3.67 m2 of
surface area when mechanical pressure distributors are used. Curing membrane, except on
irregular areas, shall be applied by means of approved self-propelled mechanical pressure
distributors or approved hand sprays. Satisfactory means shall be provided for thoroughly
mixing curing membrane compound before and during use.
Mechanical spraying equipment may be either full width spray bar equipped with multiple
nozzles or traversing spray which travels from one edge of the pavement to the other. In
either case, the path of adjacent nozzles or passes of the traversing spray shall overlap a
minimum of 50% of the width of the spray pattern so that all portions of surface shall receive
double applications from adjacent nozzles or passes. Pumping, pressure and distribution
arrangement shall be correlated with forward speed to provide adequate and uniform coverage
of pavement at not less than the minimum rate required. Irregular areas to which mechanical
distributor cannot be adapted may be covered with hand sprays.
When hand sprays are used, curing membrane shall be applied in 2 applications each at a rate
of not less than 1 litre to 5 m2 of surface area so as to provide a total rate of application of 1
litre to 2.5 m2 of surface area. The path of the spray on second application shall be at right
angles to the path of the spray on first application. When hand operated sprays are permitted
equipment supplying pressure to the spray nozzle shall be capable of supplying a constant and
uniform pressure to provide uniform and adequate distribution of curing membrane compound
at the rates required. If for any cause, such as rainfall soon after its application, curing
membrane is damaged, another application of curing membrane shall immediately be applied
to the surface of the pavement. The rate of application for replacement membrane shall be the
same as for the original membrane.
Unless otherwise approved by the Company, immediately following application of the curing
membrane, an approved shade-canvas shall be placed approximately 300 mm above the
pavement surface. Shade-canvas shall not come in contact with the pavement and shall be
subject to approval by the Company.
Initial curing shall be continued for a period of 24 h from the time the curing membrane has
been applied.
When forms are removed, whether during initial or final curing periods, edges of the
pavement shall receive curing membrane at the rate of coverage specified for the pavement
surface.
Curing membrane may be applied to vertical edges of pavement by means of hand sprays or
by nozzles attached to mechanical distributor, but edges of pavement shall be covered with
curing membrane at the rate specified within 30 min after removal of forms.
When cold-poured joint compound is used all joints shall be sawed during the initial curing
period. Shade-canvas may be moved at joint locations for short periods of time to permit
sawing. Before being sealed joints shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose saw dust, laitance,
SP 1279 Page 265 Dec 2009

dirt or other foreign matter and be free of water. As the method of final curing is different
from that of initial curing, cleaning and sealing of joints shall be performed immediately
following removal of shade canvas at the end the of initial curing period and prior to
application of polyethylene sheeting.
When hot poured joint compound is used, joints shall be sawed, cleaned and filled with jute or
other acceptable protective material in the same time sequence as for cold-poured joints.
Concrete pavement shall not be exposed to direct rays of the sun for more than 1 h.
Following jointing operations, curing membrane shall be applied to joint areas at the rate
specified for pavement surface.
2. Final Curing
Upon completion of the initial curing period and after shade-canvas has been removed and
jointing operations completed, the pavement shall be completely covered with White Opaque
Polyethylene Film as specified in AASHTO M 171. Adjoining sheets shall be lapped a
minimum of 450 mm. Sheeting shall be held in place in a manner approved by the Company.
Final curing shall be continued until concrete reaches an age of 14 days. During this period,
the curing membrane and polyethylene film shall be protected from damage. Damage shall be
immediately repaired. There shall be no traffic, including workmen and pedestrians, on the
surface of the pavement until the end of the 14-day curing period.
R2.11.7 Removing Forms

Unless otherwise provided, forms shall not be removed from freshly placed concrete until set
for at least 12 h. Forms shall be removed carefully so as to avoid damage to the pavement.
After the forms have been removed the sides of the slab shall be cured as specified for the
surface. Major honeycombed areas shall be considered as defective work and shall be
removed and replaced. Any area or section so removed shall not be less than 3 m in length
nor less than full the width of the lane involved. When it is necessary to remove and replace a
section of pavement, any remaining portion of slab adjacent to joints that is less than 3 m in
length shall also be removed and replaced.
R2.11.8 Joints for Concrete Pavement
R2.11.8.1 Installation
Joints shall be formed in a straight line and shall cross each other at right angles. Joints
running in one direction shall be parallel.
That part of the groove to be sealed whether wet formed or sawn after concreting, shall be
within a tolerance of + 5 mm from a straight line along the length of the joint.
Dec 2009 Page 266 SP 1279

R2.11.8.2 Expansion Joints

Expansion joint details and locations within the works, where not specified in the Contract
documents, shall be submitted for approval prior to the commencement of work. Details
submitted shall conform to the following requirements.
- Expansion joints shall comprise vertical preformed joint filler and a groove as
specified in section R2.11.8.7 of this document, which shall be located directly over
the joint filler.
- The Joint filler shall comply with the requirements in section R2.11.8.8 of this
document and be of sufficient rigidity to be satisfactorily installed in the joint. It
shall resist deformation during concreting and shall be installed with such accuracy
that its upper surface lies within the width of the part of the groove to be sealed and
at such a depth below the surface as to allow the depth of seal as given in Table R15.
The joint filler, together with the seal, shall provide complete separation of adjacent
slabs.
R2.11.8.3 Contraction Joints

Contraction joint details and their locations within the Works, where not specified in the
Contract documents, shall be subject to Company approval prior to commencement of
concrete work. Details submitted shall conform to the following requirements.
- Contraction joints shall comprise a bottom crack inducer groove as specified in

section R2.11.8.7 of this document. The bottom crack inducer shall be an approved,
under-laying synthetic strip or filler, securely fixed to the surface under laying the
slab along the line of the joint within a tolerance of + 5 mm and cast into the bottom
of the slab.
- A groove shall be located in the top of the slab vertically above the centre of the
crack inducer to within a horizontal tolerance of + 13 mm. The combined depth of
the groove and the crack inducer shall be between 1/4 and 1/3 of the depth of the slab
and the difference between the depth of the groove at the top and the height of the
crack inducer at the bottom shall not be greater than 13 mm.
- The crack inducer may be omitted if grooves, as specified in section R2.11.8.7 of this
document, are sawn. In these cases, the depth of the groove shall be between 1/4 and
1/3 of the depth of the slab.
R2.11.8.4 Longitudinal Joints

Longitudinal joint details and their location within the Works, where not specified in the
Contract Documents, shall be subject to Company approval prior to commencement of
concrete work. Details submitted shall conform to the following requirements.
- A crack inducer which shall consist of an approved timber or synthetic strip or filler
securely fixed to the surface under laying the slab along the line of the joint within a
horizontal tolerance of + 5 mm, and cast into the bottom of the slab. A groove shall
be made in the top of the slab, and be located vertically above the centre of the filler
to within a horizontal tolerance of + 13 mm, and shall not deviate from the general
line of the joint as laid by more than 5 mm.
- The combined depth of the groove and the crack inducer shall be between 1/4 and
1/3 of the depth of the slab and the difference between the depth of the groove at the
top and the height of the crack inducer at the bottom shall not be greater than 13 mm.
The crack inducer shall be omitted if grooves as specified in section R2.11.8.7 are
sawn. In this case, the depth of the groove shall be between 1/4 and 1/3 of the depth
of the slab, but the top of the tie bar shall be at least 20 mm below the bottom of the
groove.
SP 1279 Page 267 Dec 2009

R2.11.8.5 Emergency Construction Joints

Emergency construction joints in reinforced concrete pavements shall only be installed in the
event of mechanical breakdown or adverse weather conditions and shall not be constructed
less than 3 m from any expansion or contraction joint. Emergency construction joints shall be
formed by means of a drilled and split cross form in which tie bars, 12 mm diameter, 1000
mm long at 600 mm centres at mid-depth of the slab, shall be inserted and which shall permit
the reinforcement to project through the joint for a distance of at least 600 mm. The next
reinforcement shall completely overlap and be tied to the projecting reinforcement.
R2.11.8.6 End-of-Day Joints

End-of-day joints, other than emergency construction joints, shall be at contraction or
expansion joints.
R2.11.8.7 Grooves at Joints

Grooves in the surface of the concrete at joints may be formed in the plastic concrete.
Alternatively, grooves may be sawn after the concrete has set. That part of the groove to be
sealed shall have truly vertical and parallel sides, except when special formers are used in the
plastic concrete, subject to approval by the Company, in which case the centre line of the
former shall be vertical. Grooves shall be sealed in accordance with section R2.11.8.8.
If the grooves are to be sawn, slots shall initially be sawn as follows.
- For construction joints to the depth required by section R2.11.8.8 and of any
convenient width not greater than the width required for the seal specified in section
R2.11.8.8
- For expansion joints to the full depth and width required for the seal specified in
section R2.11.8.8, two slots one along each edge of the joint filler to the depth of the
seal. The overall distance between the outside edges of the two slots shall be the
required width of the seal.
The initial sawing shall be completed as soon as possible and not later than 8 h after the final
compaction of concrete.
Expansion joint grooves shall be temporarily or permanently sealed before traffic uses the
carriageway.
Contraction joint grooves, wider than 5 mm, shall be temporarily or permanently sealed before
traffic uses the carriageway. Narrower slots shall be sawn to the full width and depth required
for the seal immediately prior to permanent sealing.
If the grooves are to be formed, it shall be demonstrated, to the approval of the Company, that
a surface finish across the joint is obtainable within the permitted tolerances. The forming
mechanism shall include a horizontal vibrating plate at least 300 mm wide across the line of
the joint, or similar device, to ensure that the concrete displaced to form the groove is fully re-
compacted into place, followed by, or incorporating, a screed of sufficient width to ensure the
surface finish is satisfactory. When the grooves to be formed are more than 13 mm wide, the
method of forming adopted shall remove from the slab the volume of concrete displaced to
form the groove.
If rough arises develop when grooves are formed, they shall be ground to provide a radius of
approximately 6 mm.
Dec 2009 Page 268 SP 1279

Where flexible material abuts concrete slabs longitudinally at road surface level, and no detail
is provided in the drawings, subject to approval by the Company, a groove 10 mm wide, 20 -
25 mm deep shall be formed or sawn and sealed in accordance with section R2.11.8.8 with a
poured sealant compatible with both pavements.
R2.11.8.8 Sealing of Grooves

Before traffic is permitted to use the pavement, in advance of permanent sealing, grooves shall
be cleaned of dirt or loose material and be protected by insertion of a temporary sealing strip
of a material approved by the Company. This requirement shall not apply where narrow
grooves are first sawn in accordance with section R2.11.8.7 until the grooves are widened.
Alternatively formed joints, where a temporary filler or former is used, shall be left in position
until the joints are prepared for permanent sealing.
The permanent sealing of the joints shall be carried out not less than 28 days after laying the
concrete except when a permanent seal is used in forming the joint, or as otherwise approved
by the Company.
The joint, immediately prior to permanent sealing, shall be cleaned, and any dirt or loose
material or any temporary sealing, former or other filling material shall be removed, except
where a permanent seal is used when the joint is formed. The sides of the part of the groove to
be sealed and shall be scoured by either grinding or sawing except where plastic formers are
used. In addition, or for the removal of old sealing compound, high pressure water jetting or
water-and-sand-blasting may be used. The surfaces of the groove shall be dry at the time of
sealing. The dimensions of the seals shall be in accordance with Table R15 but, if the depth of
the groove exceeds the depth of the seal, the groove may be caulked to the required depth with
a compressible caulking material of a type, which does not affect, and is not affected by, the
sealing compound.
Compressible filler shall be used in all grooves with poly-sulphide type sealant so that the
width/depth ratio of the seal shall be between 2:1 and 1:1. Spalling at the edges of the grooves
shall be made good before the sealant is applied, to the approval of the Company, using an
approved material compatible with the sealant.
The prepared grooves shall be sealed with poured sealing compounds. Where recommended
by the manufacturer of the sealing compound, an appropriate primer shall be used in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Two component cold poured sealants shall be thoroughly mixed in the specified proportions,
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, using an automatic mixer-dispenser
approved by the Company, or for small quantities for hand application, using a power
operated mixer for sufficient time to produce a homogenous mix.
As soon as possible after mixing, the material shall be poured into the joint or applied using a
caulking gun, to a level between 3 mm and 6 mm below the concrete surface. The tack-free
time shall be achieved within 3 h for machine-applied material or 12 h for hand-applied
sealants.
SP 1279 Page 269 Dec 2009

Table R15: Dimensions of Joint Seals
Type Spacing of Joints Width of Seal Depth of Cold

(m) (mm) Poured Seal (mm)
Contraction Under 8 10 8 - 10
8-15 15 10 - 15
Expansion All spacing 5 mm greater than 20 - 25

thickness of the
filler
Sawn Longitudinal 5 10 - 15
R2.11.9 Cold – Poured Joint Sealants

Cold-poured sealants and cold-poured compounds shall comply with the following
requirements.
- Cold-poured sealants for joints in pavements and footways shall comply with the
performance requirements of BS 5212.
- The sealant shall comprise a curing agent and a base resin, which shall be in such
proportions as recommended by the manufacturer to provide a fast cure if the
material is mixed and applied by special machines, or a retarded cure if mixed by
hand. Primers recommended by the manufacturer shall be applied within the
temperature range of 10 oC and 40 oC and shall cure within 1 h and remain active for
not less than 4 h. The sealant shall be applied after the curing period of the primer
and within the period that the primer remains active.
- Materials mixed and applied by hand shall be supplied in separate containers in the
correct proportions and shall be mixed using a powered stirrer or mixer.
- The working life for machine mixed material shall be adjusted to suit the appliance.
- Joint sealing compounds shall be suitable for exposure to extreme and prolonged
doses of ultraviolet light or / and hydrocarbons without premature mechanical or
chemical breakdown.
R2.11.10 Pre – Formed Joint Filler

Preformed joint filler shall be compressible filler board comprising wood fibre impregnated
with bitumen emulsion.
R2.11.11 Shrinkage & Early Age Effects

The size of each pour and sequence of work shall be subject to the approval of the Company
with the aim that shrinkage and early age effects are reduced to a minimum.
Concrete shall be cast in alternate panels between construction joints.
Panels shall be allowed to cure for a minimum period of 5 days before concreting adjoining
panels.
A pouring sequence plan, including all construction, expansion and contraction joints, shall
be submitted to the Company for approval, prior to commencing the work.
Dec 2009 Page 270 SP 1279

R2.11.12 Surface Level Tolerances for Pavement Courses and Formation

The levels of pavement courses shall be determined from the true finished road surface
calculated from the vertical profile and cross-falls, as specified in the Contract documents
where applicable. The vertical depth below the true pavement surface of any point on the
constructed surface of the formation or pavement courses shall be within the tolerances
given in Table R16.
Table R16: Tolerances in surface Levels of Pavement Courses & Formation
Surface Tolerance
Concrete Road + 6 mm
Road Base Material + 15 mm
Formation + 20 mm
The surface level of the pavement at any point shall not deviate vertically from the true
finished road surface by more than + 6 mm. However, the combination of permitted
tolerances in different pavement layers shall not result in a reduction of the overall depth of
concrete slab by more than 5 mm from that specified or a reduction in the thickness of the
whole pavement by more than 15 mm from the specified thickness.
For checking compliance with these requirements, measurements of surface levels will be
taken at points, approved by the Company, at 10 m centres longitudinally and at 3 m centres
transversely. In any length of pavement, compliance with these requirements shall be
regarded as met when not more than one measurement in any consecutive 10 longitudinally
or 1 in any transverse line, exceeds the tolerances stated above, but this one measurement
shall not exceed 5 mm more than the tolerance for the layer concerned.
R2.11.13 Surface Regularity for the pavement courses

The surface regularity of pavement courses shall be tested, where necessary, at points
approved by the Company, with a straightedge 3 m long placed parallel with or at right
angles to the centre line of the road. The maximum allowable deviation of the surface below
the straightedge shall be as given in Table R17.
Table R17: Surface Regularity
Course Deviation
Road Surface 3 mm
Road Base 10 mm
SP 1279 Page 271 Dec 2009

R2.11.14 Rectification for the Pavement Courses

Areas out of tolerance shall be made good in the manner described below.
1. Formation Level
Surfaces too high shall be re-trimmed and re-compacted.
Surfaces too low shall be scarified and suitable material of the same classification and
moisture content added or other approved material laid and compacted.
2. Road base
The top 75 mm shall be scarified, reshaped with material added or removed as necessary, and
re-compacted. The area treated shall be not less than 10 m long and 2 m wide, or such area
3. Concrete Slab
The complete bay shall be removed and replaced, or, subject to approval by the Company
where the area out of tolerance is small, rectified by cutting out the surface and replacing to a
depth of not less than 20 mm with a proprietary repair material to an approved mix design and
method of replacement.
R2.12 In-situ Concrete Footpaths

Materials, mixing and batching shall comply with Chapter D.
R2.12.1 Ground Preparation

Ground preparation and fill material shall be in accordance with section R2.13.2.
R2.12.2 Granular Base

Granular base shall be in accordance with section R2.13.4.
R2.12.3 Damp Proof Membrane (DPM)

A damp proof membrane shall be laid over the prepared ground surface and shall be 1000
gauge polyethylene sheet. Joints in sheets shall have a minimum 150 mm overlap and the top
sheet shall be continuously sealed to the lower sheet with 75 mm wide self-adhesive
polyethylene jointing tape. Care shall be taken to ensure that the sheets are sound and free
from holes and tears and that the concrete blinding is sufficiently smooth to avoid puncturing
the DPM. The DPM shall be treated with care after-laying.
R2.12.4 Laying
Formwork to be used for in situ concrete footpaths shall be rot timber. The surface finish shall
be wood trowelled but slopes over 1 in 10 should receive a tamped finish across the path
width.
Where specified in the Contract Documents, reinforcement shall be welded mesh complying
with BS 4483. Minimum lap length and cover to reinforcement shall be as specified in the
Contract document where applicable.
Movement joints shall be provided at 5 m centres along the path length and at changes of
direction. Joints shall be a minimum of 12 mm wide, or as specified in the Contract
documents, and shall be formed with fibreboard filler and sealed with an approved sealant.
Fibreboard filler shall be compressible filler board consisting of wood fibre impregnated with
bitumen emulsion. Filler boards shall be cut to exact widths with edges neatly trimmed and
Dec 2009 Page 272 SP 1279

recessed from external faces to accommodate specified depth of joint sealing compound. Cold
poured sealants shall conform the requirements of section R2.11.8.
All freshly deposited concrete shall be protected from premature drying and rapid temperature
change by covering the entire surface with hessian or polythene sheeting and kept continually
wet for a period of 4 days.
R2.13 Pre-Cast Concrete Paving Slabs & Kerb Stones

Pre-cast concrete paving slabs and kerb stones shall be proprietary items manufactured in
accordance with BS EN 1339 using:
- OPC complying with BS EN 197
- Sulphate resisting cements complying with BS 4027.
- Aggregates from natural sources complying with BS EN 12620
- Building sands from natural sources complying with BS EN 13139
- Water complying with BS EN 1008.
- Pigments (where specified) complying with BS EN 12878.
Any slab or kerbstone found to be broken or with chipped arises shall not be used and shall be
removed from the Worksite.
Two samples of each slab or kerb type to be used shall be submitted for approval to the
Company. The samples shall be clearly marked as to their type, and retained on the worksite
until completion of the Works.
R2.13.1 Site Storage & Handling

On delivery to the worksite, pre-cast concrete paving slabs and kerbstones shall be carefully
offloaded onto a cleaned level area and neatly stacked in racks on boards or battens, off the
ground, to provide adequate ventilation and prevent contamination from mud or soluble salts
or dust. Pre-cast concrete paving slabs and kerbstones shall be carefully removed and
transported to their point of use, with every care taken to ensure that the arises are not chipped
and exposed surfaces are not marked or damaged.
Any items so damaged shall not be used and shall be removed from the Worksite.

The working area for pre-cast concrete paving and kerbstones shall be cleared of all
vegetation, topsoil and debris. The formation shall be thoroughly wetted with water and
compacted using hand operated vibrating plate compaction equipment, to achieve a firm
uniform surface.
Fill material to make-up levels shall be naturally occurring gravel, adequately graded to enable
it to be well compacted by rolling and with a maximum size of 75 mm. The material shall not
contain more than 15% sized greater than 40 mm, shall be free from silt and clay and shall not
contain any other debris or deleterious matter.
The formation shall be subject to approval by the Company prior to either forming the
concrete base for the kerbs or laying the granular base for the paving slabs.
SP 1279 Page 273 Dec 2009

R2.13.3 Concrete Base for Kerbs

Mass concrete base for kerbs shall be made using OPC to BS EN 197 and 20 mm maximum
size aggregate to BS EN 12620 to sizes as specified on the Contract drawings or as approved
by the Company.
Forms shall be of approved wood or steel. All forms shall be sufficiently strong and rigid and
securely staked and braced to obtain a finished product correct to the dimensions, line and
grade required. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled before each use. When approved by the
Company, forms for the concrete base may be omitted and the concrete placed directly against
undisturbed excavated faces.
All concrete shall be placed, compacted and shaped to the required section and subject to
approval by the Company. The concrete shall be compacted with an approved internal type
vibrator or by hand spudding and tamping.
Concrete finish shall be a true and even surface.
R2.13.4 Granular Base for Paving Slabs

Granular base shall be of 150 mm thick PDO Type E fill materials shall comply with the
requirements given in Table R1 of this specification.
The material shall be laid in a single layer, wetted with water and thoroughly compacted using
approved roller equipment. The finished surface shall not be higher than required, but may be
20 mm lower, such that 4 m long straightedge to the surface shall not exceed 20mm.
R2.13.5 Laying of Kerbs and Paving Slabs
R2.13.5.1 Kerbs
Pre-cast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants shall be laid and bedded in a layer of
cement mortar not less than 10 mm thick and not more than 30 mm thick. Mortar shall consist
of 1 part of cement (OPC to BS EN 197), to 6 parts of sand, (to BS EN 13139). Kerbs shall be
based with mass concrete as described in section R2.13.3.
For radii of 12.0 m or less, kerbs of corresponding radius shall be used.
Kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants deviating more than 3 mm in a 3.0 m line and level
shall be made good by lifting and relaying.
R2.13.5.2 Paving Slabs

Concrete paving slabs shall be laid to the predetermined pattern on a full bed of sand as
described in section R2.14.4, not less than 25 mm thick, and conform with the requirements of
section R2.14.5.
Joint width shall be 10 mm wide + 2 mm. Slabs shall be laid so that the difference in levels
across joints shall not exceed 3 mm.
Gaps at edges to adjacent surfaces, kerbs, wall etc, not exceeding 50 mm, shall be filled with
concrete using OPC to BS EN 197 and 10 mm maximum size aggregate.
Dec 2009 Page 274 SP 1279

Jointing between slabs shall be executed as follows:
- Joints shall be thoroughly filled by brushing in a dry cement/sand mortar mix ratio of
1:3 and all residue brushed off.
- The area shall be thoroughly wetted with fine water spray, and joints pointed to a
slightly dished profile.
- The area shall be covered with polythene sheeting for a minimum period of 3 days,
and shall not be subjected to pedestrian traffic during this period.
R2.14 Pre-Cast Concrete Block Paving

Interlocking concrete paving blocks shall be preparatory items manufactured and tested in
accordance with BS EN 1338.
Blocks broken or with chipped arises shall not be used and shall be removed from the
Worksite.
Two samples of each block type to be used shall be submitted for approval to the Company.
The samples shall be clearly marked as to their type, and retained on the worksite until
completion of the Works.
R2.14.1 Site Storage & Handling

On delivery to the Worksite, blocks shall be carefully offloaded on to a cleared levelled area
and neatly stacked on to boards or battens, off the ground to provide adequate ventilation and
prevent contamination from mud, soluble salts or dust.
Stacks should be covered with tarpaulin or polythene sheeting, or other suitable material, as a
precaution against damage and the effect of rain or dust. Blocks shall be carefully removed
and transported to their point of use, with every care taken to ensure that arises are not chipped
and exposed surfaces are not marked or damaged. Damaged items shall not be used in the
Works and shall be removed from the Worksite.

Ground preparation and fill material shall be in accordance with section R2.13.2.
R2.14.3 Granular Base

Granular base shall be in accordance with section R2.13.4.
R2.14.4 Bedding Course

The bedding course shall comprise a uniform thickness of 50 mm compacted washed sharp
sand and contain a maximum of 3% by weight of silt and clay, capable of a 90% pass rate
through a 5 mm sieve to BS 410, a zone 2 sand to BS EN 12620 & BS EN 12139. The sand
shall be obtained from a single source, allowed to drain before use and covered with suitable
sheeting to minimise moisture changes.
R2.14.5 Laying & Compaction

Pre-cast paving blocks shall be laid to the predetermined bond pattern. The direction of the
pattern shall be maintained throughout the total area to be paved.
SP 1279 Page 275 Dec 2009

The laying course shall be laid to an un-compacted thickness of 50 mm plus a surcharge

necessary to result in the specified final bed thickness after vibration of the block paving.
During laying the sand screed shall be carefully laid to a smooth surface to receive the paving
blocks. The layer shall not be compacted nor subject to traffic, including pedestrians, before
blocks are laid.
The profile of the laying course shall be similar to that of the finished surface. The maximum
deviation from the design levels shall be + 10 mm.
The edge restraints to the paved area shall be laid in advance of the laying course and all
obstacles within the area, such as manhole covers, shall be constructed to the correct finished
levels.
The paving blocks shall be laid on the sand, laying course in such a manner as not to disturb
the blocks already placed. Each block shall be placed firmly against its neighbour so that they
fit closely together. The joints between blocks shall not exceed 3 mm.
Where blocks do not fit at the edge restraints, or other obstructions such as manholes or up
stands, the gaps shall be filled using cut blocks. Blocks shall be cut using a mechanical block
splitter.
Damaged or broken blocks shall not be laid. Blocks damaged during compaction shall be
replaced.
Due allowance shall be made in the final levels of the base for the compaction of the laying
course which occurs when the paving blocks are being vibrated. The amount of surcharge
required for the laying course shall be determined by site trials prior to the commencement of
the actual surfacing and shall be repeated when the source of sand supply or a change of
weather conditions occur.
After each 20 m2, or such area approved by the Company, has been laid, the blocks shall be
compacted to the required levels using a plate vibrator. Plate vibrators shall be used to ensure
thorough compaction of the blocks as the work proceeds. Performance of vibrators shall be
given in Table R18.
Table R18: Vibrator details for Pre-cast Concrete Block Paving
Vibrator Details
Block Type Plate Area in m2 Capacity in kN
Blocks up to 80 mm thick 0.2 – 0.4 7 – 16 kN
Blocks over 80 mm thick 0.35 – 0.5 16 – 20 kN
A minimum of two passes of the plate vibrator shall be made in each direction, i.e. at 90o to
each other. Vibration shall continue until no further compaction of the sand layer is apparent.
Fine dry sand with a particle size of 0.3 mm shall then be brushed over the paving and further
passes of the plate vibrator made in each direction, until the sand is no longer absorbed into
the joints. The plate vibrator shall not pass closer than 1 m to a temporarily unrestrained edge
during compaction.
Paving shall not be left un compacted overnight except for the 1 m strip at the temporarily
unrestrained edge, which shall be covered and protected from rain.
Dec 2009 Page 276 SP 1279

R2.15 Irish Crossings, Pipe and Box Culverts & Other Drainage
Structures
The details for Irish Crossings, pipe and box culverts and other drainage structures, including
requirements for rip rap protection, shall be as specified in the Contract documents or, where
not shown, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of the Ministry of
Communications Highway Design Standards.
For the details in the Ministry of Communications Highway Design Standards, sub-grade shall
be deemed to be formation, and aggregate base to be road base, as described in this document.
Where graded roads cross wadis at Irish Crossings and concrete paving is specified in the
Contract documents, shall be constructed in accordance with the following
- Highway Design Manual - Sultanate of Oman Ministry of Communications
- General Specification for Roads – Sultanate of Oman Ministry of Communications
R2.16 Graded Roads

R2.16.1 General
In general, the road pavement structure of a graded road shall be supported by a Sub-grade /
Formation and consist of the following in ascending order, they are Sub-base and Road base
layers. General terms used to specify the graded roads are detailed in SP-1275 ‘Specification
and criteria for design of Civil & Building works.’
This section specifies the requirements for Graded Roads and shall be read in conjunction with
sections R2.1 to R2.5 for the general requirements, plant schedule, method, materials,
earthworks, formation or sub grade preparation etc.
Surface preparation, laying, compaction and other requirements of a sub-base and road base
layers shall comply with the requirements as stated in R2.6 & R2.7 except as noted.
R2.16.2 Classification of Graded Roads

Graded roads, used for Company operations, are classified as follows.
- Exploration or Temporary Roads
- Field or Area Roads
- Secondary or Radial Roads
- Primary or Trunk Roads
2.16.2.1 Exploration or Temporary Roads

Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, Exploration or Temporary Roads shall
be constructed with a 9 m wide carriageway. A strip 2.5 m wide (but not like a hard shoulder)
next to the windrow on either side of the road shall be kept free or shall not have any
obstruction with any size larger than 0.2 m. (Road signs, and Road light poles are not
regarded as obstructions).
Construction above formation or sub-grade level for Exploration or Temporary Roads shall be
as follows:
SP 1279 Page 277 Dec 2009

1. Road base
Road base shall be a 150 mm compacted thick layer of PDO Type B1 granular fill material
and shall comply with the requirements as stated in Table R1.
Laying and compaction of road base shall comply with the requirements as stated in section
2.16.1.
2.16.2.2 Field or Area Roads

Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, Field or Area Roads are same as
exploration or temporary roads except its pavement structure as stated in section 2.16.2.1,
Construction above sub-grade or formation level for Field or Area Roads shall be as follows:
1. Sub-base
Sub-base shall be a 150 mm compacted thick layer of PDO Type B1 granular fill material and
shall comply with Table R1.
2. Road base
Road-base shall be a 150 mm compacted thick layer of PDO Type B granular fill material and
Laying and compaction of sub-base and road base shall comply with the requirements as
stated in section 2.16.1.
2.16.2.3 Secondary or Radial Roads

Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, Secondary or Radial Roads shall be
constructed with a 9 m wide carriageway, and a 2.5 m wide hard shoulder on each side of the
carriageway. A strip 2.5 m wide (but not like a hard shoulder) next to the windrow on either
side of the hard shoulder shall be kept free or shall not have any obstruction with any Unless
specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, Primary / Trunk Roads shall be constructed
with a 10 m wide carriageway, and a 2.0 m wide hard shoulder on each side of the
side of the hard shoulder shall be kept free or shall not have any obstruction with any size
larger than 0.2 m. (Road signs, and Road light poles are not regarded as obstructions).
Construction above sub-grade or formation level for Primary or Trunk Roads shall be as
follows:
1. Sub-base
2. Road base
Road base shall be made up of 2 layers. The first layer shall be a 150 mm compacted thick
PDO Type B granular fill material. The second layer shall have a compacted thickness of 150
mm of PDO Type A granular fill material.
Dec 2009 Page 278 SP 1279

2.16.2.4 Primary or Trunk Roads

Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, Primary / Trunk Roads shall be
constructed with a 10 m wide carriageway, and a 2.0 m wide hard shoulder on each side of the
side of the hard shoulder shall be kept free or shall not have any obstruction with any size
larger than 0.2 m. (Road signs, and Road light poles are not regarded as obstructions).
Construction above sub-grade or formation level for Primary or Trunk Roads shall be as
follows:
1. Sub-base
2. Road base
Road-base shall be made up of 2 layers. The first layer shall be a 150 mm compacted thick
PDO Type B granular fill material. The second layer shall have a compacted thickness of 150
mm of PDO Type A granular fill material.
R2.16.3 Windrows
Windrows, which are formed naturally during the final grading of the carriageway of graded
roads. Windrows shall be left in position to clearly indicate the carriageway alignment and
define the outside edge of the hard shoulder for Secondary/Radial roads and Primary/Trunk
roads.
Windrows shall not be higher than 100 mm, and shall have a maximum width of 350 mm.
At locations where there is a marked depression (trough) in the vertical alignment of the
graded road, a 1 m wide simple slot shall be cut through the windrow at its lowest point. The
sides of these slots shall be sloped at 1:1.5.
R2.16.4 Hard Shoulders

Hard shoulders on graded roads are provided to:
- Allow slowing down/stopping areas to avoid the danger of dust clouds from
oncoming traffic, etc.
- Protect the carriageway from ingress from rainwater ponds on the side of the road.
Hard shoulders shall be treated as an integral part of the road construction, and therefore the
specification of each layer of the hard shoulder is the same as that specified for the
carriageway.
R2.16.5 Re-Sheeting for Existing Graded Roads
2.16.5.1 Materials & Construction

Materials for the re-sheeting of existing graded roads shall comply with the requirements as
given in Table R1.
Exploration or Temporary Roads - Type B1
Field or Area Roads - Type B
SP 1279 Page 279 Dec 2009

Secondary or Radial Roads - Type A
Primary or Trunk Roads - Type A
The formation level, defined as the running surface of the existing road and levels on
formation, shall be subject to Company approval prior to commencing work.
The existing formation shall only be scarified if the existing materials are not up to the
specification (Refer to section R2.5.4). In such cases, the existing formation shall be scarified
to a depth of 150 mm, watered and compacted to the specified profile to receive the re-
sheeting material. The final formation shall be subject to approval by the Company prior to
the laying of granular fill. Any loose material found shall be removed and replaced with
approved fill material.
The prepared formation shall have the approved granular material laid over in one layer. The
filling material shall be laid and compacted generally in accordance with section 2.16.1 to
achieve 150 mm minimum compacted thickness across the full width of the formation.
2.16.5.2 Detours
Road detours, where required, shall be subject to approval by the Company. Detours shall be
constructed in accordance with sections 2.5, 2.8.7 & 2.16.1 of this document.
Temporary signs shall be provided in accordance with SP-1284, Specification for Signs &
Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’.
R2.16.6 Construction Tolerances for Graded & Re-Sheeted Roads

The levels of road construction shall be determined from the true finished road surface
calculated from the vertical profile, cambers and cross-falls, shown on the Contract documents
for a particular work or approved by the Company and based upon existing ground levels as
agreed with the Company for re-sheeting of existing graded roads. The vertical depth below
the true finished road surface of any point on the constructed surface of the formation or
course shall be within the tolerances stated in Table R19.
Table R19: Construction Tolerances for graded and Re-sheeted Roads
Level Tolerance
Road Surface + 15 mm
Sub-base + 15 mm
Formation + 20 mm
For checking compliance with these requirements, measurements of surface levels shall be
taken at points, approved by the Company, at 10 m centres longitudinally and at 2 m centres
transversely. In any length of road, compliance with these requirements shall be regarded as
met when not more than one measurement in any consecutive ten longitudinally or one in any
transverse line, exceeds the tolerances stated above but this one measurement shall not exceed
the tolerance for the layer concerned by more than 5 mm.
R2.16.7 Rectification
Areas out of tolerance shall be rectified as follows.
2.16.7.1 Formation Level

Surfaces that are too high shall be re-trimmed and re-compacted.
Dec 2009 Page 280 SP 1279

Surfaces that are too low shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 150 mm and material added
of the same type, watered and compacted. Work shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements as stated in section R2.5.
2.16.7.2 Sub-base and Road base

The top 75 mm shall be scarified, re-shaped with material added or removed as necessary,
watered and re-compacted. The area treated shall be not less than 10 m long and 2 m wide, or
other approved by the Company. Work shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements as stated in section 2.16.1.
R2.16.8 Anti-Dusting Road Binders

Anti-dusting road binder shall be of Bituminous Paving or Prime coat. Anti-dusting road
binder materials shall be stored, mixed, transported and applied in accordance R2.3.
R2.17 Highway Signing

The provision of signs shall comply with the latest issue of the following
- SP-1284 Specification for Signs & Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’
- General Specification for Roads: Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of Communications
- Highway Design Manual: Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of Communications
R2.18 Road Marking

Road and pavement marking paints shall comply with BS EN 1436 & BS EN 1871. Full
details and necessary certification of all road marking paints to be used, together with a
schedule of road markings, shall be submitted to the Company for approval, prior to
incorporation into the Works.
Road markings shall not be applied within 3 weeks of laying asphalt surface. Markings shall
be free from raggedness at their edges and shall be uniform and free from streaks.
R2.18.1 Thermoplastic Material

Thermoplastic materials shall be suitable for Concrete and Bituminous Surfaces, shall comply
with the requirements of BS 3262 and be laid to the following thickness:
Sprayed markings other than yellow lines: 2 + 0.5 mm
Sprayed yellow edge lines: 1 + 0.2 mm
Thicknesses are exclusive of surface applied ballotini. The method of thickness measurement
shall be in accordance with BS 3262.
Thermoplastic markings shall be screed or spray applied, incorporating ballotini, and have a
surface application of ballotini applied evenly at the rate of 400 - 500 g/m2.
R2.18.2 Road Marking Paint

Road Marking Paints are suitable for Concrete Surfaces Only and shall be a proprietary
chlorinated rubber based road marking paint, suitable for applying by brush or mechanical
means to give a chemically stable film of uniform thickness.
White paint shall contain not less than 6 % by mass of titanium dioxide as a pigment,
conforming to type A (anatase) or type R (rutile) specified in BS EN ISO 591.
SP 1279 Page 281 Dec 2009

Yellow paint shall be standard colour BS 381C No. 355, except where an alternative shade has
been specified in the Contract Documents, and shall contain not less than 6 % by mass of a
suitable yellow pigment.
The paint shall be supplied fresh and ready for use in sealed new containers and stored in
accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. Application shall be without the use of
thinners.
R2.18.3 Pavement Finish for Road Markings

Road marking materials shall only be applied to surfaces, which are clean and dry. The
following pavement finishes shall be achieved prior to applying road markings.
R2.18.3.1 Concrete
Transverse texturing shall be carried across the full width of the pavement under the marking,
which shall be freed by wire brushing, or other approved means, from all traces of curing
compound. A tack coat compatible with the marking material shall be applied in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions prior to the application of thermoplastic material.
R2.18.3.2 Bituminous Surface

Chippings applied to the surface shall extend over the area to be covered by the marking.
R2.18.3.3 Surface Dressing

All loose chippings shall be removed from the surface before applying markings.
R2.18.4 Mechanical Spraying for Thermoplastic Material

Spraying equipment shall consist of a motor powered, self propelled, machine coupled with a
compressor of sufficient capacity to fulfil the requirements of the work. At least one spray
gun and one bead gun shall be available so that a minimum line width of 100 mm may be
sprayed in one pass.
The spray gun should be heated so that even working is attained and the material flows out at
the correct temperature, producing a clean straight line without furry edges or blemishes. The
bead gun shall be synchronised to spray glass spheres immediately on to the hot spray plastic.
An automatic skip mechanism shall be fitted in order to produce the correct pattern of broken
and dotted lines without pre-measurement and such mechanism shall be capable of operating
at the application speed.
R2.18.5 Hand Spraying for Thermoplastic Material

Pressurised apparatus and adequate equipment, stencils, specialised labour and anything else
necessary to perform spray plastic hand spraying in a proper manner for arrows, chevron
stripping, lettering, etc, shall be provided. Maximum care shall be taken during hand spraying
so that the results obtained shall match in quality and finish that of the mechanically sprayed
work. Painting on kerbs shall be hand sprayed under pressure, or manually painted.
R2.18.6 Application of Road Marking Paint

The surface to be painted shall be dry and free from loose debris, mud and other extraneous
matter. Old paint or thermoplastic materials shall be removed, so that the surface is in a
suitable condition for spraying.
Obsolete or existing marking, which requires renewal and shall be removed by a suitable line
removal machine approved by the Company. The working width shall be adapted to the width
of the marking line up to a maximum of 400 mm. The working advance of the unit shall be
600 to 2500 m/h for protracted intermittent and continuous lines. Where a hand-operated
machine is used for removal of small areas of marking, a work rate of 3 m/min should be
achieved.
Dec 2009 Page 282 SP 1279

In addition to the ballotini premixed in the material, a further quantity shall be sprayed on to
the hot spray plastic line at a rate of application of approximately 400 - 500 g/m2.
The material shall be applied to 1.5 mm thickness for broken, dotted and continuous lines,
using an approved pressure spray unit. Where gore area striping, stop lines, special letters,
arrows or symbols are required, the thickness of application shall be 3 mm.
Finished lines, letters etc, shall be true to line and level, free from raggedness on sides and
ends and upper finished surface shall be level, uniform and free from streaks. Paint applied in
unauthorised areas shall be completely removed.
R2.18.7 Pre-Marking of Lines

Pre-marking shall be manual in an approved manner. Straight lines shall be marked by means
of 100 m rope and curves shall be similarly pre-marked. On tangents, the pre-marking shall
consist of 1 dot every 3 m, and on curves every 1 m. The pre-marking dot shall be a circle of
40 mm diameter cut into 2 equal parts by a gap of 10 mm.
A continuous line shall not be accepted for pre-marking. Barrier lines shall be located by
means of an optical telemeter with an accuracy of 1 % of the sight distance. Errors in the
location or application of the barrier lines shall be corrected.
R2.19 Road Accessories & Furniture

Rumble strips, reflective studs, crash barriers and other miscellaneous street furniture and their
installation, where specified in the Contract documents or proposed, shall be subject to
Speed breakers shall be constructed in accordance with the latest issue of the following
Standard Drawing.
STD 2 4401 001: Standard Speed Breaker Arrangement.
R2.20 Sampling and Testing

Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with appropriate standards as listed in section
R1.2.3. Copies of all reports and test results shall be issued, for information, to the Company.
Company shall instruct a complete analysis or part of the tests as detailed in the relevant ITP
and SP-1274 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Materials Testing’ in case of
Facilities, equipment and staff used to carry out specific tests shall be subject to approval by
the Company.
All sampling and testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. The Company may order that
sampling or testing be repeated, at the Contractor's expense, until satisfied that a truly
representative test result has been obtained.
The Company shall be present when the trial mixes are made and tested.
R2.20.1 Routine Tests on Earthworks below Road Base

Earthworks shall be defined as all fill materials below road base i.e., Sub-base and Formation
(embankment filling or cutting) works.
A minimum of one set of test shall be carried out at either 5000 m3 of fill or 20000 m3 of
cutting or change in fill material or a visible change in the material in cutting.
SP 1279 Page 283 Dec 2009

The material used for testing material in cutting should be taken from the top 300 mm of
material immediately below finished formation level.
For the earthworks material below road base, the following set of tests shall be carried out as
described in BS 1377:
- Particle Size Analysis
- Atterberg Limits
- Moisture Content
- Specific Gravity
- Soil Compaction Tests
- California Bearing Ratio Test
For every 1000 m2 of any layer compacted, or such smaller area as may be worked on at any
particular time, field density and moisture content shall be determined. Further tests over and
above routine tests, may be required by the Company.
R2.20.2 Routine Tests on Road Base

A minimum of one complete set of tests as described in section R2.20.1 shall be carried out
for every 1000 m2 of road base material. Testing shall be of materials taken from the borrow
pit or stockpile and the materials shall not be used in the Works until the test results have been
R2.20.3 Routine Tests on Aggregates

For aggregates, the following set of tests shall be carried out as described in BS EN 932 and
appropriate BS EN standards as listed section R1.2.3.
- Bulk Density
- Aggregate Crushing Value
- Specific Gravity
- Particle Shape
- Test for Silt, Clay and Impurities of Fine Aggregate
- Aggregate Abrasion Test
A minimum of one set of tests shall be carried out for every 1000 m3 of aggregates. Testing
shall be of materials taken from the borrow pit or stockpile and the materials shall not be used
in the Works until the test results have been approved by the Company.
R2.20.4 Routine Tests on Concrete

Refer to Chapter D– Concrete Works.
R2.20.5 Routine Tests on Bitumen

A minimum of one Supplier's test certificate for quantities of bitumen over 5 tonnes, and for
every 500 tonnes delivered to the Worksite thereafter shall be submitted to the Company. In
Dec 2009 Page 284 SP 1279

addition the following tests, as described in BS EN 13036, shall be carried out, at the
Worksite, for every 300 tonnes of bitumen delivered:
- Penetration Test
- Saybolt Viscosity
- Specific Gravity
- Solubility in Carbon Tetrachloride
R2.20.6 Routine Tests on Bitumen Mix

On each 100 tonnes of mix, tests as described in BS EN 13036 shall be carried out on
representative samples taken at the mixing plant for:
- Extraction of Bitumen Content
- Marshall Stability and Flow
On compacted pavement and representative samples taken at the laying plant, tests, as
described in BS 594987, shall be conducted also for density and voids ratio for each 1000 m2,
or at least once from each day's output.
Test results shall be submitted to the Company within 24 h of testing.
R2.21 Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

ITP shall cover as a minimum of the following:
- Granular Fill
- Aggregates (Coarse, Fine & Combined)
- Water
- Asphalt (Bitumen)
- Concrete
- Completed Earthworks
- Completed Asphalt Works
- Completed Concrete Works
Requirements of the Inspection Test Plan are given in Appendix. Additional Testing
R3.0 Appendices
Appendix: Inspection Test Plan (ITP)
SP 1279 Page 285 Dec 2009

R3.1 Appendix: Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

ITP No: SP-1279-R-001 - Granular Fill
ITP No: SP-1279-R-002 - Aggregates (Coarse, Fine & Combined)
ITP No: SP-1279-R-003 - Water
ITP No: SP-1279-R-004 - Asphalt (Bitumen)
ITP No: SP-1279-R-005 - Concrete
ITP No: SP-1279-R-006 - Completed Earth Works for Roads & Paving
ITP No: SP-1279-R-007 - Completed Asphalt (Bitumen) Works for Roads & Paving
ITP No: SP-1279-R-008 - Completed Concrete Works for Roads & Paving
Dec 2009 Page 286 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-R-001 - Granular Fill

Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Controlling Conducted by Number of Tests Acceptance Criteria Remarks
Materials Document (min)
Granular Fill for Physical & Chemical BS/BSEN/ASTM/AASHTO One complete See note below
Embankment, Sub - Properties Tests includes analysis
base and Road base
Works Particle Size Analysis BS 1377 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.1 See note: 2 & 3
Atterberg Limit BS 1377 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.1 See note: 2 & 3
Moisture Content BS 1377 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.1 See note: 2 & 3
Specific Gravity BS 1377 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.1 See note: 2 & 3
Soil Compaction BS 1377 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.1 See note: 2 & 3
California Bearing Ratio BS 1377 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.1 See note: 2 & 3
(CBR)
Chemical Test BS 1377 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.1 See note: 2 & 3
Note:
1. Contractor shall submit a test certificate to prove the requirements as stated in section R2.3.1. The test certificate shall cover the complete test
results.
SP 1279 Page 287 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-R-002 - Aggregates (Coarse, Fine & Combined)

Test Specimen Description of Test Test Method / Conducted by Number of Tests Acceptance Criteria Remarks
/ Materials Controlling Document (min)
Aggregates Aggregate test includes

(Coarse, Fine the following
& Combined)
Visual Observation Visual and verification of Contractor / Each Consignment / Refer section R2.3.3 & See note 1
Suppliers Test Certificate CSR Random R2.3.4
Sieve analysis BS EN 932 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.3 & See note2 & 3.
R2.3.4
Aggregates Physical & Mechanical BS/BSEN/ASTM/ One Complete

(Coarse, Fine Properties Tests AASHTO analysis
& Combined) includes
Shell Content BS EN 932 / BS EN 1367 Third Party Refer section R2.19 Refer section D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Shape (Elongation & BS EN 932 Third Party Refer section R2.19 Refer section D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Flakiness index)
Particle Density & BS EN 932 Third Party Refer section 2.19 Refer section D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Moisture Content
Water absorption BS EN 932 Third Party Refer section 2.19 Refer section D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
(Contd.)
Dec 2009 Page 288 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-R –002 - Aggregates (Coarse, Fine & Combined) contd.
Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Controlling Conducted Number of Tests (min) Acceptance Remarks
Materials Document by Criteria
Aggregates Physical & BS/BSEN/ASTM/AASHTO

(Coarse, Fine & Mechanical Properties
Combined) contd. Tests (contd.)
Soundness BS EN 932 / BS EN 1367 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Mg SO4 < 15% See note 2 & 3
Na2SO4 < 10%
Shrinkage BS EN 932 / BS EN 1097 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
10% fines value BS EN 932 / BS EN 1097 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Crushing value (ACV) BS EN 932 / BS EN 1097 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Los angles Abrasion BS EN 932 / BS EN 1097 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Test
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 289 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-R-002 - Aggregates (Coarse, Fine & Combined) contd.
Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Controlling Conducted Number of Tests Acceptance Criteria Remarks
Materials Document by (min)
Aggregates Contamination Tests BS/BSEN/ASTM/AASHTO

(Coarse, Fine & includes
Combined) contd.
Fines (clay, silt & dust) BS EN 932 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Clay, Lumps and BS EN 932 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Friable particles
Organic impurities BS EN 1744-1 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Chloride content BS EN 932 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
SO 3 content BS EN 932 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer D2.3.2 See note 2 & 3
Note:
1. Contractor shall submit a test certificate to prove the requirements as stated in Chapter D ‘Concrete Works’. The test certificate shall cover the
complete test results.
ITP No: SP-1279-R-003 - Water

For the ITP of ‘Water’ for Roads and Paving Works, refer Chapter D ‘Concrete Works’ ITP No: SP-1279-D-003.
Dec 2009 Page 290 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-R-004 - Asphalt (Bitumen)

Test Specimen / Description of Test Test Method / Controlling Conducted Number of Tests Acceptance Criteria Remarks
Materials Document by (min)
Asphalt (Bitumen) Application Temperature Visual Contractor Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 &
R2.3.8
Asphalt (Bitumen) BS /BS EN / ASTM / Complete Analysis

AAASHTO
Viscosity (Saybolt Furol or BS EN 13036 / BS 2000 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 &3
Kinematic and Absolute) R2.3.8
Penetration BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note: 2 & 3
R2.3.8
Flash & Fire Point BS EN ISO 2592 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 &3
R2.3.8
Water Percent BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note: 2 & 3
R2.3.8
Ductility BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 &3
R2.3.8
Distillation BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note: 2 & 3
R2.3.8
Specific Gravity BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 &3
R2.3.8
Solubility of Carbon Tetra BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note: 2 & 3
Chloride R2.3.8
(Contd.)
SP 1279 Page 291 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-R-004 - Asphalt (Bitumen) contd.
Note:
1. Contractor shall submit a test certificate to prove the requirements as stated in section R2.3.7 & R2.3.8. The test certificate shall cover the complete
test results.
ITP No: SP-1279-R-005 - Concrete

For the ITP of Concrete materials (Cement, Aggregates, Water, Reinforcement), Concrete mix, Formwork, Admixtures, Grouts, etc., for the Roads and
Paving Works, refer Chapter D ‘Concrete Works’ ITP No: SP-1279-D-001 to 007.
Dec 2009 Page 292 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-R-006 - Completed Earthworks for Roads and Paving

Test Specimen / Materials Description of Test Method / Conducted by Number of Tests Acceptance Remarks
Test Controlling Document (min) Criteria
Completed Earthworks for Visual Verification of records CSR / Random Refer section R2.3.1
Embankment, Sub-base & Road Contractor
Base – For every 150 mm thick
layer or Specified thickness Field Density BS 1377 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.1 See note below
Moisture Content BS 1377 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Refer section R2.3.1 See note below
NOTE:
1. Refer SP-1274 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Materials Testing’ for the appropriate AASHTO or ASTM test methods.
SP 1279 Page 293 Dec 2009

ITP No: SP-1279-R-007 - Completed Asphalt (Bitumen) works for Roads & Paving
Test Specimen / Materials Description of Test Test Method / Conducted by Number of Tests Acceptance Criteria Remarks
Controlling Document (min)
Asphalt (Bitumen) mix Visual Inspection Verification of records CSR / Contractor Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 &
R2.3.8
Asphalt (Bitumen) mix BS /BS EN / ASTM / Complete Analysis See note below
AAASHTO
Viscosity (Saybolt BS EN 13036 / BS Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 & 3
Furol or Kinematic and 2000 R2.3.8
Absolute)
Particle Size analysis BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 & 3
R2.3.8
Marshall Stability and BS EN ISO 2592 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 & 3
Flow R2.3.8
Extraction of Bitumen BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 & 3
content R2.3.8
Compaction BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 & 3
R2.3.8
Density BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 & 3
R2.3.8
Void Ratio BS EN 13036 Third Party Refer section R2.20 Ref section R2.3.7 & See note 2 & 3
R2.3.8
(Contd.)
Dec 2009 Page 294 SP 1279

ITP No: SP-1279-R-007 - Completed Asphalt (Bitumen) works for Roads & Paving (contd.)
NOTE:
1. Contractor shall submit a test certificate to prove the requirements as stated in section 2.3.7 & 2.3.8. The test certificate shall cover the
complete test results.
3. Refer SP-1274 Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Guideline to Materials Testing’ for the appropriate AASHTO or ASTM test
methods
ITP No: SP-1279-R-008 - Completed Concrete Works for Roads & Paving
For the ITP of Fresh and Hardened Concrete for the Roads and Paving Works, refer Chapter D ‘Concrete Works’ SP-1279-D-006.
SP 1279 Page 295 Dec 2009

Version 2.0 Specification for Civil & Building Construction
Chapter – S
Rig Locations, Airstrips, tank Pads & Bunds
Dec 2009 Page 296 SP 1279

Specification for Civil & Building Construction Version 2.0
S1.0 Introduction
S1.1 User Guidelines
This Specification supersedes Version 1.0 of SP1279-Part-S ‘Civil & Building Construction
Specifications Graded Roads, Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bunds’. Other than the
conversion or formatting, the following are the main changes to this document.
- Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes are revised.
- Specification for graded roads moved to chapter R.
S1.2 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes

S1.2.1 PDO Standards

SP-1128 : Specification for ‘Cathodic Protection Design’
SP-1129 : Specification for ‘Construction, Installation and Commissioning

of Cathodic Protection Systems’
SP-1130 : Specification for ‘Cathodic Protection Materials and Equipment’
SP-1236 : Cathodic Protection Drawings
SP-1275 : Specification and Criteria for design of Civil & Buildings
SP-1282 : Specification for Reinforced Concrete – Production &

Construction
SP-1284 : Specification for Signs & Signboards – Standard Signs Catalogue
STD-1-1090-01 : Well Site Layout for Rig 9 & 12
STD-1-1090-02 : Well Site Layout for All Rigs Except Rigs 9 & 12
STD-2-1603-01 : Airstrip Perimeter Fencing
S1.2.2 Omani Standards

Highway Design Manual : Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of
Communications
General Specification for Roads : Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of

Communications
Bye-Laws & Ordinances : Royal Oman Police
SP 1279 Page 297 Dec 2009

S1.2.3 International Standards

ASTM : Appropriate standards for materials testing methods
and specifications
ICAO : Aerodrome Design Manual
BS EN 206 : Concrete. Specification, performance, production and

conformity
BS EN 932 : Test for General Properties of Aggregates
BS EN 1008 : Mixing Water for Concrete
BS EN 1097 : Test for Thermal & Physical Properties of Aggregates
BS EN 1367 : Test for Thermal & Weathering Properties of

Aggregates
BS EN 12620 : Specification for Aggregates from Natural Sources for

Concrete
BS EN 13139 : Aggregates for Mortar
BS 1377 : Methods of Test for Soils for Civil Engineering

Purposes
S1.2.4 SIEP / Shell GSI Standards

DEP-30.10.73.10-Gen. : Manual for ‘Cathodic Protection’
DEP-30.10.73.33-Gen. : Technical Specification for ‘Installation and

Commissioning of Cathodic Protection System’

DEP 34.11.00.12-Gen. : Geo Technical Foundation Engineering
DEP 34.13.20.31-Gen. : Roads, Paving, Surfacing, Slope Protection and

Fencing
DEP 34.14.20.31-Gen. : Drainage and Primary Treatment Facilities
S1.2.5 SIEP / Shell GSI Standard drawings

S.12.001 (Sheet 1) : General Tank foundation without Leak
detection
S.12.001 (Sheet 2) : Conceptual Concrete Tank foundation
S.12.002 : Bund wall details
Dec 2009 Page 298 SP 1279

S.12.003 : Conceptual Tank Foundation and Tank Leak

Detection & Management system
S1.3 Quality Control

S1.3.1 Quality Plan
requirements, BS EN 206 and or in accordance with the contract requirements of a particular
contract. The Quality plan shall cover quality assurance and control and shall be divided into
detailed design and production/execution plan. The quality plan shall be subject to audit by
Company.
S1.3.2 Reporting system

S1.3.3 Records
contract period or a minimum of one year. The records shall include the following:
- Method of Curing
See also Inspection Test Plan in Appendix-A
S1.4 Supervision
S1.4.1 Contractor’s Supervisor
production and placing of high quality Asphalt and Concrete shall be employed by the
Contractor on the Worksite and shall directly supervise all Asphalt and Concrete works.
S1.4.2 Company Inspection

SP 1279 Page 299 Dec 2009

contractor in any way from his responsibilities as to carry out the works in accordance with the
contract and specifications.
S1.5 Product / Asset Warranty

The entire Works, executed under a particular contract, shall be guaranteed to meet the
Any defects, identified within the maintenance period (as per the contract or a minimum of one
year), have to be repaired by the Contractor at his own cost.
In the event of defect of any part of works or item being of such a nature that the Specification
requirements cannot be fulfilled by repair, such part of the Work or item shall be replaced by
the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Company.
The Company shall not approve the repaired work, unless the Contractor guarantees in writing
that the repaired work will have a service lifetime from the original year of construction.
Dec 2009 Page 300 SP 1279

S2.0 Scope
S2.1 General
describes the minimum requirement for the ‘Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bund
Works’. This Specification shall also define the type of testing requirements, frequency of
each test and number of samples for the materials, mixes of these Works.
S2.2 Plant, Schedule & Method

S2.3 Materials
All materials shall be obtained from a source approved by the Company known to produce
suitable materials for the Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads and Bund Works. Contractor
shall get approval for all materials prior to the delivery to worksite.
The Contractor shall locate all borrow pits, quarries and other sources of necessary materials.
Particulars of materials shall be clearly marked on the delivery note, invoice or supplier's
certificate supplied with each consignment and shall include:
- Quantity, Type and Size of Material
S2.3.1 Granular Fill

Granular Fill materials used for these works, shall comply with the requirements as given in
Chapter R– ‘Roads & Paving Works’, section R2.3.1.
Note: Depending on the nature of the Works and its life expectancy, a modified material
specification may be issued by the Company for a particular work. Modified material
specification shall only be used to:
- Achieve a cost saving, due to the type of work
- Avoid delay in completing the Works
S2.3.2 Rock Fill

Rock fill materials shall be used for the embankment works and shall comply with the
requirements as given in Chapter R– ‘Roads & Paving Works’, section R2.3.2.
S2.3.3 Aggregate or Gravel Fill

PDO type G40 & S40 aggregates comply with the requirements as stated in Chapter D –
‘Concrete Works’, or the gravel fill specified in DEP 34.11.00.11-Gen., section 5.5.4.2, shall
be used as Aggregate or Gravel Fill of these works.
SP 1279 Page 301 Dec 2009

S2.3.4 Asphalts
Asphalts used for the anti-dust surface treatment shall comply with the requirements as stated
Chapter R– ‘Roads & Paving Works’, section R2.3.7 & R2.3.8.
S2.3.5 Water.
Water used in the work shall be clean and free from organic matter, sulphates, waste matters
and other harmful or deleterious substances and shall be obtained from a source approved by
the Company. Refer to Chapter D – ‘Concrete Works’ for the specifications and other
requirements.
S2.3.6 Concrete
Concrete used for these works shall comply with the requirements as given in Chapter D –
‘Concrete Works’.
S2.4 General Requirements (Setting Out, Site Clearances etc.,)

Refer Chapter R– ‘Roads & Paving Works’, section R2.4 and its subsections for the setting out
and site clearances Works.
S2.5 Earthworks & Formation (Excavation, Cutting &

Embankments)
Refer Chapter R– ‘Roads & Paving Works’, section R2.5 and its subsections for the
Earthworks, Formation (Cutting, and Embankment filling), laying & compaction works.
S2.6 Rig Locations

This section specifies the requirements for Rig Locations and shall be read in conjunction with
sections S2.1 to S2.5 for the general requirements, plant schedule, method, materials,
earthworks, formation or sub grade preparation etc.
S2.6.1 Materials & Construction

For size of Rig Locations references shall be made to Standard Drawings STD-1-1090-01 and
STD-1-1090-02.
In order to optimise the construction cost of rig locations two or more wells could be placed on
a single rig location where feasible and at the discretion of the Company.
The specified construction above formation level for rig locations shall be a single layer of 200
mm thick compacted PDO Type C granular fill.
For the materials, laying and compaction requirements refer Chapter R – ‘Roads & Paving
Works’ Table R1 and section R2.5.6.
In the event where soil conditions are weak with very low CBR values, e.g. in Sabkha area, the
use of geo-grids should be considered in order to enhance structural stability and to reduce the
amount of earthworks. The design for the number of geo-grid layers and the height of the pad
shall be determined by structural and foundation calculations.
S2.6.2 Construction Tolerances for Rig Locations

The surface level of Rig Locations shall be determined from the true level calculated from the
vertical profile. The vertical depth below the true finished surface at any point on the surface
shall be + 30 mm.
For checking compliance with these requirements, measurements shall be taken at points
selected by the Company at 10 m centres in both directions of the Rig Location.
Dec 2009 Page 302 SP 1279

S2.7 Airstrips
This specification details the construction requirements for un-surfaced airstrips used for
operating small aircrafts. Airstrips shall comply with the requirements of the International
Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO) in particular with the Annexure 14 Volume 1 ‘Aerodrome
Design Manual’.
This Section specifies the construction of Airstrips and shall be read in conjunction with
sections S2.1 to S2.5 of this Specification for the general requirements, plant schedule,
method, materials, earthworks, formation or sub grade preparation etc.
S2.7.1 Materials & Construction

Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, Airstrip Runways shall be constructed
1,850 m long x 46 m wide (including the aircraft turning circle) with a Stop way at each end of
463 m long x 46 m wide, to accommodate ATR42-500 Series or the Fokker F27-500 Series
aircraft. Granular fill materials for airstrip works shall comply with the requirements as given
in Chapter R – ‘Roads & Paving Works’ Table R1.
Prior to constructing Airstrips the Contractor shall carry out site preparations (Formation or
Sub grade) and preliminary earthworks in accordance with section S2.1 to S2.5 of this
Specification. The specified construction above formation level for airstrips shall be as
follows:
Sub-base for all 250 mm compacted thickness of PDO Type B granular

surfaces fill material shall comply with the requirements as given
in Chapter R Table R1 and shall be laid on approved
formation or sub-grade level.
Airstrips Runway, 250 mm compacted thickness of PDO Type A granular

Stop Way, Taxiway & fill material shall comply with the requirements as given
Apron Surfaces in Chapter R Table R1 and shall be laid on approved
sub-base.
Granular fill materials shall be laid and compacted in accordance with the requirements as
given in Chapter R – Roads & Paving Works’ section R2.5.6.
S2.7.2 Construction Tolerances for Airstrip Works

All measurements shall be taken horizontally and at right angles to the centre line of the
airstrip.
S2.7.2.1 Alignment for Earthworks & Formation

The alignment of the finished earthworks or formation shall be such that the dimension from
the designated centre line to the top of the slope of embankment or to the tow of the batter in
cuttings is in no case less than the dimensions specified in section S2.7.1 or as shown in the
Contract documents for a particular Project.
S2.7.2.2 Runway Alignment

The alignment of the runway shall be such that the dimensions from the designated centre line
to the edge of the runway is in no case less than the dimensions specified in section S2.7.1 or
as shown in the Contract documents for a particular Project.
S2.7.2.3 Stop way Alignment

The alignment of the stop way shall be as for the runway section 2.7.2.2 except that the
transition from runway to stop way shall be smooth and within the tolerances specified in
section 2.7.2.4.
SP 1279 Page 303 Dec 2009

S2.7.2.4 Grading
The finished runway surface and sub base at the centre line shall be as shown in the Contract
documents.
The allowable tolerances shall be + 20 mm provided that:
- The algebraic difference of the deviations for the two points 25 m apart shall not be
greater than 15 mm.
- The deviation from a straight edge laid on the surface and parallel to the centre line
shall not exceed 5 mm in 3 m.
- The thickness of the pavement shall not be less than that specified.
S2.7.2.5 Transverse Slope

Unless specified otherwise in the Contract documents, the transverse slope shall not exceed
2%.
When tested with a 3 m straight edge the transverse slope shall not deviate more than 4 mm
from the design cross fall nor at a rate of more than 10 mm per metre.
The Contractor shall keep a template and spirit level to be used for checking the transverse
slope in each section of the Work and such equipment shall be made available to the Company
upon request.
S2.7.3 Checking of Finished Work

The finished Work shall be checked as follows:
1. Longitudinal profile check by levelling, boxing and straight edge.
2. Transverse slope check by use of 3 m straight edge slope evaluator at intervals over the
full length and width of the runway, taxiway and apron.
3. Thickness of surface by dipping at intervals, specified by the Company, over the full
length and width of the pavement.
4. Compaction by testing at intervals specified by the Company over the full length, width
and thickness of the runway, taxiways and apron.
5. Over and above the requirements of this Specification the airstrip surface shall
withstand test drives driven by a motor vehicle as follows:
a) If a steady speed of 80 km/h cannot be obtained, the surface shall be scarified, watered
and re-compacted.
b) Tyre ruts of more than 25 mm deep shall not result from an emergency stop from a
vehicle travelling at 60 km/h
S2.7.4 Airstrips Drainage

The Contractor shall construct open, unlined drains where specified on the Contract documents
or directed by the Company. Such drains shall run parallel to the runway.
Drains shall be diverted at every favourable opportunity offered by the terrain, generally at
intervals not exceeding 500 m by blocking the drains and turning water by offset drains into
water courses or catch drains as directed by the Company. In upstream drains where water is
required to be carried a greater distance the 500 m, drains shall be widened as directed by the
Company.
Dec 2009 Page 304 SP 1279

Outlet drains shall be of a capacity equal to that of the drain, properly aligned and graded
without obstructions so that water will be drained away without scouring the airstrip runway,
taxiway or apron.
S2.7.5 Airstrips Fencing

The Complete airstrip (runway, stop ways, taxiways and apron surface), shall be enclosed by
PDO Type D fencing, as shown on Standard Drawing STD-2-1603-01 or as specified in the
contract document for a particular project.
Note: The requirement of fence type to be checked with the air operations and area
coordinator.
S2.7.6 Navigational and other requirements

The navigational requirements for the aircrafts like Airstrip markers and lighting facilities for
the runway, taxiway and apron area, PAPI system for the runway, windsock & flood lighting
etc., shall comply with the requirements as stated in ICAO Annex 14 volume 1‘Aerodrome
Design Manual’ and the requirements of the local airfield authorities.
S2.8 Tank Pads, Bund Walls & Bund Floors

S2.8.1 General and Functional Requirements
Foundations for storage tanks shall be in the form of a tank pad constructed with durable, inert,
granular materials, such as crushed rock, coarse sand etc. The Tank surface shall be covered
with a surface finish layer. For smaller tanks concrete foundation ring beams with or without
holding down bolts are sometimes used for foundation.
This Section specifies the requirements of Tank Pads, Bund Walls and Bund Floors
comprising granular fill materials and shall be read in conjunction with sections S2.1 to S2.5
or Chapter D - ‘Roads & Paving Works’.
The use of non-granular fill materials for the tank foundations or the uses of concrete rafts are
not preferred unless specifically approved by the Company.
The functions of a Tank Pad are to:
- Spread and transfer the load from the tank and its contents to the sub-grade.
- Raise the tank bottom above ground water, capillary water, surface water and minor
spillages.
- Provide a smooth surface with sufficient bearing capacity for the construction of the
tank itself, and therefore tank pads shall be constructed such that differential
settlements or tilt are kept to a minimum when fully loaded.
The functions of a Tank pad shoulder are to:
- Provide sufficient lateral support to the tank under all conditions
- Resist the edge settlement (cutting) beneath the tank shell
- Resist wash out or the tank foundation as a result of tank bottom leakages and
possible ingress of rainwater
- Resist erosion by wind or water
The function of a Tank Bund and its associated drainage system is to control oil spillages from
tanks, and therefore Tank Bunds and Bund Floors shall be constructed as a liquid tight
SP 1279 Page 305 Dec 2009

structure. The drainage systems shall be designed and constructed in accordance with DEP
34.14.20.31.Gen.
S2.8.2 Materials & Construction of Tank Pads & Bund Works

Prior to constructing Tank Pads, Bund Walls & Bund Floors, the Contractor shall carry out site
preparation and earthworks in accordance with sections S2.1 to S2.5. After excavation, but
before backfilling, take place, an inspection of the site shall be made to confirm the findings of
the earlier soil investigation.
Granular Fill materials shall be used for the tank foundation body, bund walls, bund floors and
above formation level which has been approved by the Company and shall be PDO Type A fill
material, comply with the requirements as given in Chapter R – ‘Roads & Paving Works’
Table R1.
Coarse Aggregate or Gravel fill shall be used for the foundation ring of a tank foundation,
shoulder and a zone under the tank shell. PDO Type G40 & S40 fill materials, comply with
the requirements as given in Chapter D or the materials specified in DEP 34.11.00.11-Gen
shall be used for the foundation ring, shoulders and the zone under the tank shell.
PDO Type-A granular fill material may also be used for the ‘foundation ring and its shoulder’
provided special attention given to compaction and protection from damage during tank
construction. In addition, measures shall be taken to ensure the material under the tank shell is
not disturbed, as this could result in edge settlement and possible deformation or failure.
Granular fill material shall be laid and compacted in accordance with Chapter R – ‘Roads &
Paving Works’ section R2.5.6 of this specification. Construction and testing of the Tank Pads
shall be in accordance with DEP 34.11.00.11-Gen. ‘Site Preparation & Earthworks including
Tank Foundations & Tank Farms’.
Cathodic Protection system shall be required for the Tank shell and its bottom plates.
Installation of Cathodic Protection system shall comply with the requirements as stated in the
following Standards and Specifications.
- SP-1128 Specification for ‘Cathodic Protection Design’
- SP-1129 Specification for ‘Construction, Installation and Commissioning of Cathodic

Protection Systems’
- SP-1130 Specification for ‘Cathodic Protection Materials and Equipment’
- SP-1236 Cathodic Protection Drawings
- DEP-30.10.73.10-Gen. Manual for ‘Cathodic Protection’
- DEP-30.10.73.33-Gen. Technical Specification for ‘Installation and Commissioning

of Cathodic Protection System’
S2.8.3 Surface Dressing
S2.8.3.1 Asphalt
Where surface dressing to the Bund Walls, Bund Floor or Tank Pad Shoulder is specified in
the Contract document as being asphalt surface dressing, the work shall comply with the
requirements of Chapter R section R2.10. The fine aggregate shall be clean and have a silt
content (material passing BS 410 sieve No 200 - 75 um) of less than 5 % (see also DEP
34.11.00.11-Gen. ‘Site Preparation & Earthworks including Tank Foundations & Tank Farms’,
and Standard Shell DEP Drawing S12.002).
Dec 2009 Page 306 SP 1279

S2.8.3.2 Concrete
Where surface dressing is specified in the contract document as being concrete surface
dressing, work shall comply with the requirements of Chapter D – ‘Concrete Works’.
S2.8.3.3 Bedding under Tanks

Bedding under tanks shall consist of a sand/bitumen mix, applied in a thickness and area
specified in the Contract document in accordance with DEP 34.11.00.11-Gen. ‘Site
Preparation & Earthworks including Tank Foundations & Tank Farms’, and Standard Shell
DEP Drawing S12.001 – ‘Tank Foundation’.
S2.8.4 Construction Tolerances for the Tank Pads, Bund Walls & Bund
Floors
The surface level of Tank Pads and Bund Walls shall be determined from the true level shown
in the Contract documents, calculated from the vertical plane. The vertical depth below the
true finished surface at any point on the surface shall not vary more than the following:
For the top of Tank Pads - + 6 mm in 3 m
- + 12 mm between any two given points
For the top of Bund Walls - + 30 mm for top of bund walls
All slopes shall be trimmed to batters specified in the Contract document with permissible
tolerances.
S2.8.5 Hydrostatic Testing

The hydrostatic testing procedure of tanks (which is governed to a great extent by the
behaviour of the subsoil) shall be approved by the Company, and shall follow
recommendations set out in Appendix 6 of DEP 34.11.00.11-Gen. ‘Site Preparation &
Earthworks including Tank Foundations & Tank Farms’.
Considering that most subsoil conditions encountered in Oman lie between Weathered
Rock/Cemented Soil and Sand, and this to be confirmed by a site soil investigation, unless
stated otherwise in the Contract documents filling rates and duration of observation periods
shall be that for Sand.
S2.9 Sampling and Testing

Refer Chapter R – ‘Roads& Paving Works’ section R2.20 for Sampling and testing
requirements for Materials, Earthworks, Concrete and Asphalt for these works.
S2.10 Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

Refer the following specifications for the Inspection Test Plan (ITP)
- Chapter R – ‘Roads & Paving Works’ section 2.21 and its Appendix.
- Chapter D – ‘Concrete Works’ Appendix.
S3.0 Appendices
Appendix A: Inspection Test Plan (ITP)
Appendix B: SP User-Comment Form
SP 1279 Page 307 Dec 2009

S3.1 Appendix A: Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

ITP No: SP1279-S-001 : Granular Fill
ITP No: SP1279-S-002 : Aggregates
ITP No: SP1279-S-003 : Water
ITP No: SP1279-S-004 : Asphalt
ITP No: SP1279-S-005 : Concrete
ITP No: SP1279-S-006 : Completed Earth Works for Graded Roads, Rig
locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads and Bunds
ITP No: SP1279-S-007 : Completed Asphalt Works for Tank Pads and Bunds
ITP No: SP1279-S-008 : Completed Concrete Works for Tank Pads and Bunds
Dec 2009 Page 308 SP 1279

ITP No: SP1279-S-001 - Granular Fill

For the ITP of Granular Fill, refer SP-1279-R Specification for Civil & Building Construction –
‘Roads & Paving’ ITP No: SP-1279-R-001.
ITP No: SP1279-S-002 - Aggregates

For the ITP of Aggregates, refer SP-1279-R Specification for Civil & Building Construction –
ITP No: SP1279-S-003 - Water

For the ITP of Water, refer SP-1279-D Specification for Civil & Building Construction –
‘Concrete Works’ ITP No: SP-1279-D-003.
ITP No: SP1279-S-004 - Asphalt

For the ITP of Asphalt, refer SP-1279-R Specification for Civil & Building Construction –
ITP No: SP1279-S-005 - Concrete

For the ITP of Concrete, refer SP-1279-D Specification for Civil & Building Construction –
‘Concrete Works’ ITP-No: SP-1279-D-006.
ITP No: SP1279-S-006 - Completed Earth Works for the

Graded Roads, Rig locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads and Bunds
For the ITP of Completed Earth Works for the Graded Roads, Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank
Pads and Bunds, refer SP-1279-R Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Roads &
Paving’ ITP-No: SP-1279-R-006.
ITP No: SP1279-S-007 - Completed Asphalt Works for the

Tank Pads and Bunds
For the ITP of Completed Asphalt Works for the Tank Pads and Bunds, refer SP-1279-R
Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Roads & Paving’ ITP No: SP-1279-R-007.
ITP No: SP1279-S-008 - Completed Concrete Works for the

Tank Pads and Bunds
For the ITP of Completed Concrete Works for the Tank Pads and Bunds, refer SP-1279-D
Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Concrete Works’ ITP No: SP-1279-D-006.
SP 1279 Page 309 Dec 2009

S3.2 Appendix B: SP User - Comment Form

SP User-Comment Form
If you find something that is incorrect, ambiguous or could be better in an SP, write your
comments and suggestions on this form. Send the form to the Document Control Section (DCS).
They make a record of your comment and send the form to the correct CFDH. The form has
spaces for your personal details. This lets DCS or the CFDH ask you about your comments and
tell you about the decision.
SP Details Title Issue Date:
Number:
Page number: Heading Number: Figure Number:
Comments:
Suggestions:
User’s personal details
Name: Ref. Ind: Signature: Date:
Phone:
Document Control Section Actions
Comment Number: Dates CFDH
Recd: To CFDH: Ref. Ind:
CFDH Actions
Recd Date: Decision: Inits: Ref. Date:

Ind:
Reject:
Accept, revise at next issue:
Accept, issue temporary

amendment
Comments:
Originator Date: Inits: Document Control Date: Inits:

Advised: Section Advised:
Dec 2009 Page 310 SP 1279

PDO sp1279

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PDO sp1279

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Petroleum Development Oman L.L.C.

UNRESTRICTED Document ID: SP-1279

Specification for Civil & Building Construction

Authorised For Issue December 2009

Version No. Date Author Scope / Remarks

Revision 1 Aug ‘93 W. Von Schmidt, TTH/4 Original issued as ERD-17-01

Dec 2009 Page 2 SP 1279

1.0 Introduction ................................................................................................ 9

General Requirements ........................................................................................... 12

Demolitions & Alterations ..................................................................................... 19

Excavation & Earthworks ..................................................................................... 24

Concrete Works ..................................................................................................... 42

SP 1279 Page 3 Dec 2009

D1.1 User Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 43

Block work ............................................................................................................. 82

Roofing Works ....................................................................................................... 90

Structural Steel Works ........................................................................................ 101

Dec 2009 Page 4 SP 1279

G2.9 Runway Beams ....................................................................................................... 109

Metal Works......................................................................................................... 111

Carpentry and Joinery Works............................................................................. 120

Ironmongery Works ............................................................................................ 129

Glazing Works ..................................................................................................... 139

SP 1279 Page 5 Dec 2009

L3.0 Appendix ................................................................................................ 144

Building Painting & Decorating Works .............................................................. 160

Fencing & Gates................................................................................................... 174

Dec 2009 Page 6 SP 1279

Landscaping Works ............................................................................................. 185

Roads & Paving Works........................................................................................ 219

Rig Locations, Airstrips, tank Pads & Bunds ..................................................... 296

SP 1279 Page 7 Dec 2009

S1.1 User Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 297

Dec 2009 Page 8 SP 1279

This specification is intended to:

- Disseminate and record facilities related information, experience and procedures.

1.2 User Guidelines

1.3 Specification Index

Chapter - A : General Requirements

Chapter - B : Demolition and Alterations

Chapter - C : Excavation and Earthworks

Chapter - D : Concrete Works

Chapter - E : Block Works

Chapter - G : Structural Steel Works

Chapter - H : Metal Works

Chapter - J : Carpentry and Joinery

Chapter - M : Floor, Wall and Ceiling Finishes

Chapter - N : Painting and Decorating

SP 1279 Page 9 Dec 2009

Chapter - P : Fencing and Gates

Chapter - S : Landscaping Works

Chapter - R : Roads and Paving Works

1.4 Changes to the Specification

1.5 Quality Control

1.5.2 Reporting system

- Materials and its manufacturer or supplier’s details

- Location of borrow pits with test results

- Quantity and grade of material

- Complete Field and Laboratory test results

- Date, time, including commencing and finishing time of pouring works

Dec 2009 Page 10 SP 1279

- Name and signature of Contractors supervision

See also Inspection Test Plan in Appendices

1.6.2 Company Inspection